This is a modern-English version of The Busy Woman's Garden Book, originally written by Bennett, Ida D. (Ida Dandridge). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.



Title Page

Transcriber's Note

Obvious typographical errors have been silently corrected. Variations in hyphenation have been standardised but all other spelling and punctuation remains unchanged.

Obvious typos have been silently fixed. Hyphenation variations have been standardized, but all other spelling and punctuation remains unchanged.

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

The cover image was made by the transcriber and is in the public domain.


THE BUSY WOMAN'S
GARDEN BOOK

THE BUSY WOMAN'S GARDEN GUIDE


Window Box
An exterior window box that complements the overall architectural design.

THE BUSY WOMAN'S
GARDEN BOOK

BY
IDA D. BENNETT

BOSTON
SMALL, MAYNARD & COMPANY
PUBLISHERS

BY
IDA D. BENNETT

BOSTON
SMALL, MAYNARD & COMPANY
PUBLISHERS


Copyright, 1920,
BY SMALL, MAYNARD & COMPANY
(INCORPORATED)

Copyright, 1920,
BY SMALL, MAYNARD & COMPANY
(INCORPORATED)


INTRODUCTION

This little book has a very definite aim—a big aim too, though two little words or even one will serve to define it—To help, or better still, perhaps—helpfulness. It does not aim to tell everything there is to tell about gardening; that would be encyclopedic and quite out of the scope of a small, practical work on gardening, but it does aim to give, in plain, everyday language sufficient and clear directions for caring for an ordinary kitchen garden in a way the least exhausting of time and strength and with all unnecessary expenditure eliminated. It covers all necessary detail except that of personal equation; that—Dear Woman, when the spring time calls and you go forth full of enthusiasm, is, in the language of the day—"Up to you." Your garden will give back to you just What you put into it—no more, and the more you give to it the less it will exact of you; neglect it ever so little and it willvi prove a hard taskmaster indeed, or a living reproach—a reproach that will burgeon and bloom in noxious weeds and sickening plants, a garden where the worm dieth not and the aphis and grub revel undisturbed and unchecked.

This little book has a clear goal—a big goal too, which can be summed up in just a couple of words: To help, or even better—helpfulness. It doesn’t try to provide every piece of information about gardening; that would require an encyclopedia and is beyond the scope of a small, practical gardening guide. Instead, it aims to offer straightforward, everyday guidance for maintaining a typical kitchen garden in a way that minimizes the time and effort needed while eliminating unnecessary expenses. It includes all essential details except for personal involvement; that—Dear Reader, when spring arrives and you step out filled with enthusiasm, is entirely “Up to you.” Your garden will give back exactly what you invest in it—no more, and the more effort you put in, the less it will demand from you; neglect it even just a little and it will become a tough taskmaster or a constant reminder—a reminder that will flourish with stubborn weeds and unhealthy plants, a garden where pests thrive and multiply unchecked.

There is nothing so easy as to keep a garden in perfect order, free from weeds and pernicious insect life, nothing easier than to have the reverse of this. One cannot garden successfully on the principle that one can work in the garden when there is nothing else to do, no one to play with, nowhere to go. The garden should be first to a certain extent, and this is not an arbitrary or exacting condition for the toll exacted is paid for many times over in the peace of mind that comes from work well and conscientiously done, to say nothing of the economic value of thrifty vegetables.

There’s nothing easier than keeping a garden in perfect shape, free of weeds and harmful pests, and nothing harder than the opposite. You can’t successfully garden with the mindset that you’ll only work on it when you have nothing else to do, no one to hang out with, or nowhere to go. The garden should take priority to some extent, and this isn’t an unreasonable or demanding requirement because the effort you put in is rewarded many times over with the peace of mind that comes from working diligently and thoughtfully, not to mention the savings from growing your own vegetables.

There are always critical times in the life of the garden;—the gardener must recognize these and be prepared to give just the assistance the condition requires at just the time it is required; if this is done promptly it will surprise one whovii has had no system heretofore in the garden work to see how little time is really required to care for a garden successfully. The failure to co-operate with nature at the right time may result in many hours of wearisome work.

There are always key moments in the life of a garden; the gardener needs to recognize these and be ready to provide exactly the help that is needed at the right moment. If this is done quickly, it can surprise someone whovii hasn’t had a plan for gardening before to see how little time is truly needed to take care of a garden effectively. Not working with nature at the right time can lead to many hours of exhausting labor.

Take the matter of weeds;—if the planting is closely watched and the weeds cut off as quickly as they show a seed leaf above ground, and before they have stuck their roots deeply enough into the ground to make more than a mere stirring of the soil necessary, an entire week's crop of weeds will be destroyed with one stirring of the soil. Weeds come in relays a week or ten days apart, come not at all if the soil is kept properly stirred—which should be after every rain and between if the rain is infrequent, and it is well worth one's time to exercise a little self-denial and give this cultivation even though it may mean letting something else go that one would like to do.

Take the issue of weeds: if you keep a close eye on your plants and cut off the weeds as soon as they first appear above ground, before they have a chance to sink their roots deeply enough into the soil, you can eliminate an entire week’s worth of weeds with just one light turning of the soil. Weeds come in cycles every week or ten days, and if the soil is kept properly stirred, they won’t grow at all—which should be done after every rain and in between if it hasn’t rained in a while. It’s worth your time to make a little sacrifice and give this care, even if it means putting off something else you'd prefer to do.

And one need not worry too much about being scientific in one's gardening; insecticides, fungicides and the like are the allies of the careless gardener, but the wide awake, industrious gardenerviii has little need of them. Healthy, vigorous plants are not especially susceptible to insect attacks and with the exception of potato bugs, squash bugs and cabbage worms the danger from them is merely negligible, but the careless, slovenly gardener is a real and pestilential danger.

And you don’t need to stress too much about being scientific in your gardening; insecticides, fungicides, and similar products are the crutches of the neglectful gardener, but the alert, hardworking gardenerviii hardly needs them. Healthy, strong plants aren’t particularly vulnerable to insect attacks, and aside from potato bugs, squash bugs, and cabbage worms, the threat from them is pretty minimal. However, the careless, sloppy gardener poses a real and troublesome danger.

There is much in choosing the right time of day for work in the garden; it is delightful to wield the rake and hoe in the cool of the afternoon, but where the object is the destruction of weeds the morning hours of a sunny day will give permanent results as the weeds will be killed by the hot sun, while those hoed up in late afternoon will often be revived by the coolness and dew of night and be ready to withstand the morrow's sun, so take the morning hours for destroying weeds, and the cooler hours for planting seeds, staking up plants, thinning out plants and the like but always the bright, dry sunny hours for tying up such vegetables as need blanching: cauliflower, endive and the like. This will make for success in the various operations and comfort in working.

Choosing the right time of day for gardening is really important; it’s enjoyable to use the rake and hoe in the cool of the afternoon, but if you're trying to get rid of weeds, the morning hours on a sunny day will give you lasting results since the hot sun will kill the weeds. Weeds that are hoed up in the late afternoon often bounce back due to the coolness and dew at night, making them ready to resist the next day's sun. So, use the morning for destroying weeds, and save the cooler hours for planting seeds, staking plants, thinning them out, and similar tasks. Always use the bright, dry sunny hours for tying up vegetables that need blanching, like cauliflower and endive. This approach will lead to success in completing various tasks and make working more comfortable.

Where it is necessary to water the garden this should if possible be done after the sun has nearly or quite gone from it in order to reduce the loss of moisture by evaporation; this is especially desirable in city gardens where the water is metered and always, if possible a night's watering should be followed by shallow cultivation the following forenoon to restore the dust-mulch and necessitate as little watering as possible. These are a few of the little attentions which make for success in the garden and minimize the sum of the season's work.

Where it’s necessary to water the garden, it should ideally be done after the sun has mostly or completely gone down to reduce moisture loss from evaporation. This is especially important in city gardens where water is metered. Whenever possible, watering at night should be followed by light cultivation the next morning to restore the dust layer and minimize the need for watering. These are just a few small details that contribute to a successful garden and lessen the overall workload for the season.


CONTENTS

Chapter PAGE
I Garden Planning 1
II Hotbeds, cold frames, and trays 12
III Planting Seeds in the Open Ground 36
IV Transplanting 48
V Gardening Tools 53
VI Maintaining and Boosting Soil Fertility 64
VII Asparagus 80
VIII Spring Veggies 86
IX Seasonal Veggies 122
X Vining Vegetables 171
XI Less Commonly Grown Vegetables 186
XII Amount of Seed Needed 200
XIII Sweet, Pot, and Healing Herbs 202
XIV Plant Pests and Pesticides 208
XV Winter storage 220
XVI Canning the Extra Produce from the Garden for Winter Use 232
XVII Fall Gardening Tasks 256
XVIII The Annual Garden Event 261
XIX The Hardy Garden 273
XX Fall Bulb Planting 282
XXI Saving Money When Buying Shrubs 289
XXII A Constant Stream of Flowers in the Bushes 297
XXIII Indoor Gardening for Shut-Ins 308
XXIV The Potential of an Urban Apartment 318

THE BUSY WOMAN'S
GARDEN BOOK

The Busy Woman's Garden Book


THE BUSY WOMAN'S
GARDEN BOOK

The Busy Woman's Garden Guide

CHAPTER I
Garden Planning

The favorable location of the garden is the initial step in its planning. The kitchen garden—always an important auxiliary of the kitchen—is now, in these days, something more; it is becoming more and more a part of the domestic routine; it is a woman's garden, to be planned for and cared for by the women of the family, and in that relation must be considered from all its points of view. Location, then, becomes of first importance. It must be accessible, that its care may demand as little extra work as possible, and that little be given to the actual cultivation and care and not to going back and2 forth. If one can run out and cultivate a row of lettuce or train up a row of peas while waiting for the irons to heat or the kettle to boil, then one will find the sum total of the garden work far less onerous than where one must calculate on going over the entire plat, or a stated portion of it, at one operation.

The garden's location is the first step in its planning. The kitchen garden—always an important extension of the kitchen—is now more than that; it is increasingly becoming a part of daily life. It’s a woman's garden, meant to be designed and maintained by the women of the family, and should be considered from every angle. Therefore, location is crucial. It should be easy to reach so that its upkeep requires minimal extra effort, allowing more time for actual cultivation rather than traveling back and forth. If you can quickly step out to tend to a row of lettuce or support a row of peas while waiting for the iron to heat or the kettle to boil, you'll find that the overall gardening work feels much lighter than if you have to plan to cover the entire area in one go.

A location close to the house, more or less secluded, that one may work free from interruption and espionage and where the vegetables may bask in the sun from early morning till late afternoon, is desirable, and this is best achieved in a southern exposure with the garden rows running north and south.

A spot near the house, somewhat private, where you can work without being disturbed or watched, and where the vegetables can enjoy sunlight from early morning until late afternoon, is ideal. This is best achieved with a southern exposure and garden rows that run north and south.

If the garden plot is protected by buildings or a high fence, or a wind-break of evergreen on the north it will afford a favorable position for the necessary hotbeds and cold frames and the close relationship of the two will work for efficiency in handling.

If the garden area is sheltered by buildings or a tall fence, or a windbreak of evergreens on the north side, it will create a good spot for the needed hotbeds and cold frames, and their close proximity will enhance efficiency in managing them.

A warm, mellow, sandy loam is the ideal soil for the vegetable garden, but even a poor soil may be so built up and redeemed by proper cultivation3 and fertilising as to make the quality of the soil of secondary consideration, but if one can have both at once then one is happy indeed. Tenacious, clayey soil or newly broken sod ground should not, however, be undertaken by a woman, such ground is a man's job.

A warm, rich sandy loam is the best soil for a vegetable garden, but even poor soil can be improved and redeemed through proper cultivation3 and fertilizing, making the quality of the soil less important. However, if you can have both, then you're really lucky. Tough, clay-like soil or freshly broken ground shouldn't be tackled by a woman; that's a job for a man.

But it is the warm, sunny location that is vital to the successful cultivation of the garden. All the early vegetables—peas, lettuce, endive and the like—call for abundant sunshine in the cool days of early spring, and, as the season advances and the fall chill is in the air at nightfall, then the warm sunshine will hasten the maturity of such late comers as tomatoes, winter squash, citron and any late-sown vegetables that are used to succeed the earlier growths. Again in the late days of winter or early spring those vegetables that were left in the ground for early use—the parsnips, and salsify, will be available much earlier if given a warm location where the ground thaws readily, rather than a cold exposure that holds frost late in the season.

But the warm, sunny spot is crucial for successfully growing the garden. All the early vegetables—peas, lettuce, endive, and such—need lots of sunshine during the cool days of early spring. As the season moves forward and the fall chill sets in at night, that warm sunlight will speed up the ripening of late arrivals like tomatoes, winter squash, citron, and any late-planted veggies that follow the earlier crops. Moreover, in the late winter or early spring, those vegetables left in the ground for early harvesting—like parsnips and salsify—will be ready much sooner if they’re in a warm location where the soil thaws easily, rather than in a cold spot that stays frosty late into the season.

A piece of ground adjoining other cultivated4 areas is far preferable to an isolated plot as it may be ploughed in conjunction with the larger piece and so kept in a better grade and condition. An isolated garden plot, which must be prepared separately necessitating a dead furrow in the center, becomes, in the course of a few years a dish shaped area very disagreeable to cultivate; an open area, on two sides at least, obviates this in a measure and renders the ground more level and easily prepared.

A piece of land next to other cultivated areas is much better than a separate plot since it can be plowed together with the larger area, keeping it in better shape and condition. A standalone garden plot, which has to be worked on separately and requires a trench in the middle, often turns into a bowl-shaped area that is really difficult to manage after a few years. Having an open space on at least two sides helps to minimize this issue and makes the ground more level and easier to prepare.

Any garden spot, however, should always be ploughed rather than spaded and as deep ploughing as possible should be the rule. If the soil is good go as close to the bottom of it as possible, the shallow ploughing so universal—seldom more than six inches in depth, does not give a mellow bed for any but shallow rooted vegetables. Carrots, salsify, parsnips and similar long-rooted things must fairly drill their way into the hard ground below the shallow cultivation, this resulting in deformed, stunted or many twigged roots, unsalable and of little value for the home table. The long, smooth, beautiful bottoms are only produced5 by deep cultivation to start with and, of course, the subsequent cultivation must efficiently supplement this. A very excellent method of preparing the ground would be to turn a deep furrow with the plough and follow this with the subsoil plough, stirring up the subsoil, but not mixing it with the top soil; this would give several inches of loose soil beneath the first furrows that the roots could readily penetrate. So many consider that all the fertility in a soil is contained in the few top inches of soil, and in a measure this is true—the available fertility is right there—but there is a wealth of unused fertility in the lower strata, but lack of cultivation, lack of moisture and most of all, lack of the humus which makes the soil retentive of moisture, render it unavailable, but if it is broken up and gradually mixed with the humus of the upper soil it becomes available and the soil is increasing in fertility instead of growing thinner and poorer year by year.

Any garden area should always be plowed instead of spaded, and deep plowing should be the standard practice. If the soil is good, dig as close to the bottom as possible. The common practice of shallow plowing—usually no more than six inches deep—doesn't create a suitable environment for anything but shallow-rooted vegetables. Carrots, salsify, parsnips, and similar long-rooted plants need to push through the hard ground below the shallow cultivation, which can lead to deformed, stunted, or branched roots that aren't marketable and are of little value for home cooking. The long, smooth, beautiful roots are achieved only through deep initial cultivation, and subsequent cultivation must effectively build on that. A great way to prepare the ground would be to create a deep furrow with the plow and then follow it with a subsoil plow that stirs up the subsoil without mixing it with the topsoil; this would provide several inches of loose soil beneath the first furrows which the roots could easily penetrate. Many people believe that all the nutrients in the soil are found in the top few inches, which is partially true—the available nutrients are there—but there’s a lot of unused fertility in the lower layers. The lack of cultivation, moisture, and especially the absence of humus that helps the soil retain moisture make it unavailable. However, if this lower layer is loosened and gradually mixed with the humus in the upper soil, it becomes accessible, and the soil increases in fertility instead of becoming thinner and poorer each year.

Following the ploughing comes the smoothing and leveling of the ground by dragging with a6 spiked or spring tooth harrow; this part of the work should be very thoroughly done; too fine a seed bed can never be produced, whatever the means employed and the use of drags and harrows by no means spells the whole operation of fitting a garden for planting. After the dragging the garden rake is in order and the ground must be raked over and over until thoroughly fine and free from roughage of sticks, stones, clods and the like. If any weeds have been drawn to the surface in dragging they must be pulled out and thrown aside. If there is a dead furrow in the middle of the plot then the raking should be towards that from both directions so as to fill it in as much as possible and so restore the level of the ground.

After plowing, the next step is to smooth and level the ground using a6 spiked or spring tooth harrow; this part of the job needs to be done very thoroughly. You can never create a perfect seed bed, no matter what tools you use, and dragging and harrowing aren’t the only steps in preparing a garden for planting. Once you’ve finished dragging, it’s time to use a garden rake, and you should rake the ground repeatedly until it’s completely fine and free from debris like sticks, stones, and clumps of soil. If any weeds have surfaced during dragging, they need to be pulled out and tossed aside. If there’s a dead furrow in the center of the area, then rake toward it from both sides to help fill it in and restore the level of the ground.

It is not necessary to rake the entire garden at once if time and strength are at a premium. One may rake a space sufficient for the first planting and when that is done rake another space and so equalize the labor, but it is easier to rake soon after the preliminary fitting is done than to leave it until a rain has packed the earth and made it7 heavy to move. A good rain, however, should always precede the planting, if possible, as newly worked ground is not sufficiently settled for sowing seed and not so desirable for setting out of plants.

You don’t need to rake the whole garden at once if you’re short on time and energy. You can rake an area just big enough for the first planting, and once that’s done, tackle another area, balancing the work. However, it’s easier to rake soon after the initial preparation is finished rather than waiting until after a rain has packed the soil down and made it7 hard to move. Ideally, a good rain should come before planting, since freshly worked soil isn’t settled enough for sowing seeds and isn’t ideal for planting.

The arrangement of the vegetables in the garden has much to do with the convenience of caring for it. It is always a good arrangement to plant the early vegetables, such as lettuce, radishes, beets, endive and onions at the end of the garden nearest the house where they are most easily available as one has occasion to use them in preparing a meal. Then, too, all these small things are planted a standard distance apart—usually twelve or fifteen inches,—twelve if the gardener is addicted to trowsers, fifteen if skirts are in evidence, for it is difficult to work in a narrower space, especially among the tender tops of seedling onions, in petticoats. So, with the rows running north and south, that the vegetables may receive the greatest possible amount of sunshine, and the vegetables planted in consecutive rows of increasing distances apart, one has a8 planting schedule economical of space and labor.

The layout of the vegetables in the garden greatly affects how easy it is to take care of them. It's always a smart idea to plant the early vegetables, like lettuce, radishes, beets, endive, and onions, at the end of the garden that’s closest to the house, making it convenient to grab them when you’re preparing a meal. Also, all these small plants should be spaced out a standard distance—usually twelve or fifteen inches apart. It’s twelve inches if the gardener is wearing pants, and fifteen if skirts are involved, since it’s tough to work in a tighter space, especially among the delicate tops of young onions while in a dress. So, with the rows running north and south to maximize sunlight exposure, and the vegetables planted in consecutive rows with increasing distances apart, you’ll have a8 planting schedule that saves both space and effort.

This order of planting should also be made to include height as well as distance apart of the rows of vegetables. Low growing things should always occupy the front rows of space and not be overshaded by tall growths. For this reason the planting of sweet corn in the garden plot is not desirable; it is best to give this a space by itself—preferably on the north side of the garden. Vine vegetables, too, have little place in the garden proper—a place for them on the south side of the garden should be reserved if possible, for with the best of management they will break bounds and encroach on other plants. I recall a planting of English marrows which were placed in the garden next to a row of red peppers. They were bought for bush marrows but proved to be the vine variety and in a month's time had practically taken possession of that end of the garden; peppers and tomatoes were smothered under a luxuriant growth of squash vines whose luxuriance was only equalled by the astonishing amount of fruit they bore. In desperate9 effort to check their encroachments great lengths of vines, bearing half grown marrows, were ruthlessly removed with no more apparent result than to encourage a still more luxuriant growth and to increase the gardener's knowledge of the amount of pruning a really ambitions, vigorous vine will stand.

This planting order should also consider both height and spacing of vegetable rows. Low-growing plants should always be at the front and not shaded by taller ones. For this reason, planting sweet corn in the garden is not ideal; it’s better to give it a space on its own—preferably on the north side of the garden. Vine vegetables also have limited space in the main garden; if possible, reserve an area for them on the south side, as they will inevitably spread and invade other plants. I remember a time when English marrows were planted next to a row of red peppers. They were supposed to be bush marrows but turned out to be the vine variety, and within a month, they had practically taken over that end of the garden, smothering the peppers and tomatoes under an overwhelming growth of squash vines, which not only thrived but also produced an astonishing amount of fruit. In a desperate attempt to control their spread, long lengths of vines with half-grown marrows were ruthlessly cut back, but this only seemed to encourage even more vigorous growth and increased my understanding of how much pruning a truly ambitious, vigorous vine can handle.

The bush varieties of many vegetables are a great boon to the small home gardener as most of them are prolific bearers and require no more room than a hill of potatoes or an eggplant. Squash, melons, lima beans—all have dwarf forms that are preferable to the usual vine varieties.

The bush varieties of many vegetables are a huge advantage for the small home gardener since most of them produce a lot and need no more space than a hill of potatoes or an eggplant. Squash, melons, and lima beans all have dwarf versions that are better than the typical vine varieties.

The home garden should not be too large—a plot forty by eighty feet will grow all the summer and winter vegetables a small family can make use of and a considerable surplus for sale, especially is this the case where the corn and vines are planted outside the garden proper. Potatoes, too, are excluded from this estimate, though a few rows of early potatoes may find room available.

The home garden shouldn’t be too big—a plot that’s forty by eighty feet can grow all the summer and winter vegetables a small family needs, with plenty left over for sale. This is especially true if corn and vines are planted outside the main garden area. Potatoes aren’t included in this estimate, although you can fit a few rows of early potatoes in the space available.

The accompanying planting table, while intended10 to be merely suggestive will be of use as indicating the amount of room required for the several varieties of plants and a convenient arrangement. The amount to be grown of any one variety however, must be decided by the individual gardener and it will be time well spent to make a diagram for one's self, based on the amount of various vegetables that experience shows to be needed. To those vegetables to which the family are most addicted should always be added a few that are grown with the occasional guest in mind and the few things that one likes to try from season to season, and that add zest to gardening but should never be allowed to occupy space needed for more standard sorts.

The planting table provided, while meant to be just a suggestion, will help show how much space is needed for different types of plants and a practical layout. The amount of each variety to plant, however, should be determined by each gardener, and it’s worth taking the time to create a personalized plan based on the amount of vegetables typically needed. For vegetables that the family enjoys the most, it's good to also include a few that are intended for occasional guests and those items one likes to experiment with each season, which can enhance the gardening experience, but they should never take up space that could be better used for more common varieties.

PLANTING-TABLE FOR A SMALL GARDEN APPROXIMATELY FORTY BY EIGHTY FEET

PLANTING TABLE FOR A SMALL GARDEN ABOUT FORTY BY EIGHTY FEET

Lettuce—May King, 1 row. Transplant from hotbed to 9 in. apart
Onions—Transplanted seedlings of Prizetaker, Ailsa Craig
or Silver Skin, 1 in.
1 oz.
Parsley—Dwarf Perfection. Transplant to 9 in. apart 1 Pkt.
Endive—One row, Giant Fringed. Transplant to 9 in.
apart
1 Pkt.
Beets—Two rows, Crosby's Egyptian. Thin to 3 in. 2 oz.
Carrots—Two rows, Danvers Half Long. Thin to 3 in. 1 oz.
Parsnips—Large Sugar or Hollow Crown. Two rows.
Thin to 3 in.
½ oz.
11Salsify—Two rows, smooth, Mammoth Sandwich Island.
Thin to 3 in.
1 oz
Spinach—One row, All Season. Thin to 8 in. ½ oz.
Lima Beans—Fordhook Bush. Thin to 6 in. 2 lb.
String Beans—Wardwell's Kidney Wax, or Navy Beans.
Two rows
2 lb.
Peas—Double rows, Senator, Gradus, Telephone. On wire
netting
2 lb.
Peppers—One row, Ruby Giant, Bull Nose, or Pimento.
12 in. apart
1 Pkt.
Bush Muskmelons—Three ft. apart 1 Pkt.
Okra—Perkins' Long Pod. Half row, thin to 1 foot ½ lb.
Eggplant—Black Beauty. 18 in. 1 Pkt.
Early Potatoes—Dreer's Perfection, Early Ohio. Fifteen
inches apart
1 Pkt.
Cauliflower—Early Snowball. Twenty in. apart 1 Pkt.
Cauliflower—Dry Weather. Twenty in. apart 1 Pkt.
Cabbage—Late Flat Dutch. 2 ft. apart 1 Pkt.
Squash—Delicious, Burbank's Hubbard. 6 ft. apart each
way
1 oz.

CHAPTER II
Hotbeds, cold frames, and flats

So important is the preparatory work performed by a well started and conducted hotbed that its use cannot be too insistently recommended. The smallest, least ambitious home garden is dependent upon the use of artificial heat in the starting of such plants as cabbage, cauliflower, peppers, tomatoes and the like, either in hotbeds on the home grounds, flats in the windows or plants grown in commercial greenhouses; these, owing to the long season required to bring them into bearing, cannot be started in the open ground; especially is this true of such heat loving things as peppers and tomatoes.

So crucial is the prep work done by a well-set-up and managed hotbed that it can't be recommended strongly enough. Even the smallest, least ambitious home garden relies on using artificial heat to start plants like cabbage, cauliflower, peppers, tomatoes, and similar varieties—whether in hotbeds on your property, in flats on the windowsills, or in plants grown in commercial greenhouses. Because these plants need a long season to produce, they can't be started directly in the open ground; this is especially true for heat-loving plants like peppers and tomatoes.

Owing to the quite general practice of buying these plants of the commercial gardeners or florists a much smaller area of ground is devoted to their growth than would be the case were the plants grown in one's own hotbeds where the13 initial cost would have been that of a few packets of seeds. Purchased plants are by no means immune from late frosts or the assaults of cut worms and not infrequently demand successive replantings before a satisfactory stand is secured. With a well stocked hotbed this does not spell so great a disaster, as only the labor of resetting is demanded and this is not of much moment as the lines and points of setting are already laid down and the hills of tomatoes, eggplants and peppers already supplied with their spade full of manure. In a generous sized garden where perhaps a hundred plants of a kind are grown the saving in the cost of plants will cover the construction and maintenance of an ordinary hotbed and the cost of a bed of the best concrete construction, which will last almost a lifetime, will be covered in a reasonably short time.

Because it's common to buy these plants from commercial gardeners or florists, less ground is used for growing them than would be the case if you grew them in your own hotbeds, where the initial cost would just be a few packets of seeds. Purchased plants aren't immune to late frosts or cutworms, and often require replanting multiple times before you get a good result. However, with a well-stocked hotbed, this isn't much of a setback since you only have to reset the plants, which isn't a big deal because the planting lines are already established and the hills for tomatoes, eggplants, and peppers have their shovelful of manure ready. In a larger garden, where you might grow around a hundred plants of a particular kind, the savings on plants will offset the cost of building and maintaining a standard hotbed. The expense for a high-quality concrete hotbed, which will last nearly a lifetime, can be recouped in a reasonable amount of time.

There is nothing about the construction or care of a hotbed that offers any obstacles to its possession and I have about come to the conclusion that the only reason more gardeners do not have them is because they cannot borrow them; they are the14 only thing about a garden that some one can't and doesn't borrow and if some one would invent a portable one it would undoubtedly become popular.

There’s nothing about building or maintaining a hotbed that makes it hard to own one, and I’ve pretty much concluded that the only reason more gardeners don’t have them is that they can’t borrow them; they’re the14 only thing in a garden that people can't and don’t borrow, and if someone were to invent a portable version, it would definitely become popular.

The requirements are simple:—A sunny location, protected from prevailing winds—usually from the west, and on the north by a wall, building or fence. Being started in the early days of spring—from February, in the vicinity of the Ohio river, to late March or early April in the vicinity of the Great Lakes; they require a background that will hold the heat of the sun instead of allowing it to escape.

The requirements are straightforward: a sunny spot, sheltered from the prevailing winds—usually coming from the west—and to the north, there should be a wall, building, or fence. They should be started in early spring—from February around the Ohio River, to late March or early April near the Great Lakes; they need a background that retains heat from the sun rather than letting it escape.

A well-drained position should be chosen and it should be as handy to the house and garden as practicable, especially the former as, once it is planted and plants up and growing, it will require frequent supervision in the changeable weather of early spring. Under a bright sun the temperature rises very rapidly in a glass-covered hotbed and it is necessary to see that it does not rise high enough to injure the plants; equally the temperature falls rapidly in an open bed when15 the sun goes under a cloud, and the sash must be adjusted to meet these deviations of temperature; often a moment's work in raising or lowering the sash will spell success or failure in the conduct of the bed.

A well-drained spot should be selected, and it should be as close to the house and garden as possible, especially the house, since once it's planted and the plants are growing, it will need regular checking in the unpredictable weather of early spring. In bright sunlight, the temperature in a glass-covered hotbed can rise quickly, so it's important to make sure it doesn't get too high and harm the plants; similarly, the temperature drops rapidly in an open bed when the sun gets covered by clouds, and the sash needs to be adjusted to cope with these temperature changes. Often, just a moment's effort in raising or lowering the sash can determine the success or failure of managing the bed.

A pit or excavation in the ground for holding a supply of fermenting manure to furnish heat for the bed is the first step in the construction of the hotbed; the size and depth of this will depend somewhat upon the number of plants it is desired to produce and upon the rigors of the climate and the prevalence of late springs and frosts. As a general thing, for the ordinary home garden a bed three feet by twelve is sufficient, but the added expense of a few additional feet is so slight and the use of a bed so appeals to one once one realizes its convenience, that it is seldom a mistake to make it too large as, aside from the sowing of seed, it may be used for starting roots of bedding plants, cannas, dahlias, begonias, tuberoses, caladiums; the striking of cuttings and many garden operations that have formerly been done in a bungling, cumbersome16 way in the house or with the costly assistance of the florists.

A pit or hole in the ground for storing fermenting manure to provide heat for the bed is the first step in building a hotbed. The size and depth of this will depend on how many plants you want to grow and the severity of the climate, as well as the likelihood of late springs and frosts. Generally, for a typical home garden, a bed that is three feet by twelve is sufficient, but the extra cost of going a few feet larger is minimal. Once you see how convenient a larger bed is, it’s usually worth it. Besides sowing seeds, it can also be used for starting bedding plant roots, cannas, dahlias, begonias, tuberoses, and caladiums, as well as taking cuttings and many other gardening tasks that used to be done clumsily in the house or with expensive help from florists.

The depth of the pit should not be less than three feet and four, from the top of the frame, is better, as it is upon the depth of the manure that the length or duration of the heat depends. A shallow pit will give a quick heat which soon gives out, usually when most needed, during a sudden cold wave, and as the expense of a foot more or less counts for little it is best to be on the safe side and have sufficient heat.

The pit should be at least three feet and four inches deep from the top of the frame, as the depth of the manure affects how long the heat lasts. A shallow pit will generate heat quickly but will run out fast, usually when it's needed the most during a sudden cold snap. Since the cost of adding an extra foot or so is minimal, it’s better to be safe and ensure there’s enough heat.

If economy must be observed or the bed is for temporary use, a rough frame of boards will answer every purpose; it need not even extend below the surface of the ground, but merely rest upon it, but such construction is not to be recommended except for temporary structures or where it is desired to remove the frame as soon at it has served its purpose in supplying plants for spring planting; but a well built, permanent hotbed has by no means served its mission with the passing of the spring months, it may be profitably kept in commission the year around.

If you're keeping an eye on costs or using the bed temporarily, a simple frame made of boards will work just fine; it doesn't even have to be buried underground, just resting on it will do. However, this setup isn't advisable unless it's for temporary structures or if you plan to take it apart as soon as it's done providing plants for spring planting. On the other hand, a well-made, permanent hotbed remains useful even after spring is over; it can be beneficial to maintain it all year long.

If, however, the construction must be along economical lines waste lumber and old window sash may be employed very satisfactorily. Having dug the pit of the required depth and width and length—three feet if old sash are to be used will be the best width and is desirable anyway as it can be easily reached across and can be placed close to a building and so occupy much less ground than where the usual florist sash is used, a frame consisting of four upright posts two by four inches and six feet long for the two rear posts and five feet long for the front, to give the necessary slant to the frame, should be used; on these the boards for the sides and ends should be nailed, the end boards sawed to a true slant that the sash may rest evenly upon them; the frame is then lowered into the pit and the soil leveled off around it and made firm so that no cold air finds entrance. To such a frame the sash may be hinged at the back and notched sticks adjusted to hold it at any desired angle.

If, however, the construction needs to be cost-effective, you can use scrap lumber and old window sashes quite effectively. After digging a pit of the required depth, width, and length—three feet is ideal if using old sashes, and it’s also preferable because you can easily reach across it and place it close to a building, taking up much less space than the usual florist sashes—construct a frame with four upright posts that are two by four inches and six feet long for the two rear posts and five feet long for the front to create the necessary slant. Nail the boards for the sides and ends onto these posts, ensuring the end boards are cut to a precise slant so the sashes can rest evenly on them. Then, lower the frame into the pit and level the soil around it, making sure it’s packed down so no cold air can get in. You can hinge the sashes at the back of the frame and use notched sticks to hold them at any angle you want.

In the permanent cement hotbed the pit is dug as before, then interlined with boards to form18 a mould and the space filled in with a good cement mixture, paddling it smooth on the side next to the boards and allowing the boards to remain in place until the cement has hardened.1 Before the cement has set, however, a frame of two by four must be fitted on top of the cement to receive the sash. Long spikes should be driven through the timbers at intervals to be pressed into the cement to insure a good joint. It is also an advantage to arrange for partitions through the bed by nailing cleats of wood on the inside of the wooden form at points where the sash will meet. This will form slots in the concrete into which thin boards can be slipped to separate such plants as require much heat from those requiring less heat and much air. The partitions should not extend much, if any below the surface of the soil so the slots need not extend19 below the top foot of wall. These partitions are not really necessary but often come in very handy and are so easily arranged for that their occasional use justifies their presence. Where they are employed the sash can be left open where required far more safely than if they were not in use. Cabbage and cauliflowers do best if given plenty of air and even a tinge of frost will not injure them, while it would be fatal to such heat loving plants as tomatoes, peppers, eggplants and many tender flowers and bulbous plants.

In the permanent cement hotbed, dig the pit as usual, then line it with boards to create a mold and fill the space with a good cement mix, smoothing it on the side next to the boards and leaving the boards in place until the cement hardens.18 Before the cement sets, though, you need to fit a two-by-four frame on top of the cement to hold the sash. Long spikes should be driven through the timbers at intervals so they press into the cement to ensure a solid joint. It’s also helpful to plan for partitions by nailing wooden cleats inside the wooden form at points where the sash will meet. This will create slots in the concrete where thin boards can be inserted to separate plants that need a lot of heat from those that require less heat and more air. The partitions shouldn’t extend much, if at all, below the surface of the soil, so the slots don’t need to go beyond the top foot of the wall. These partitions aren’t absolutely necessary, but they can be very useful and are easy to set up, making their occasional use worthwhile. When they are used, the sash can be left open safely where needed. Cabbage and cauliflower thrive best with plenty of air, and a bit of frost won't harm them, while it would be deadly for heat-loving plants like tomatoes, peppers, eggplants, and many delicate flowers and bulbous plants.19

The double sash is a great protection for hotbeds started very early, but as a rule there is little occasion for starting the beds before the middle of March or early April in the northern states as it is only necessary to give the plants about six weeks' start of open ground operations. Usually we make our out-of-door planting about the twentieth of May at the north and correspondingly later as we go south, but if we count back six weeks from "Corn planting time," the country over we will have reliable data for starting the hotbed. Plants left too long in the bed deteriorate20 and should be scheduled to be got into the ground as soon as they are fit; if this is done they will not suffer from over crowding nor will it be necessary to transplant; though this is always an advantage with certain plants. If to the hotbed is added the convenience of a cold frame to which the cabbage and cauliflower can be transplanted as soon as they show rough leaves it will be a decided advantage and the room thus secured in the hotbed can be used to transplant tomatoes, peppers and the like, thus giving better rooted, stockier plants.

The double sash is a great protection for hotbeds started very early, but generally, there's not much reason to start the beds before mid-March or early April in the northern states, as it's only necessary to give the plants about a six-week head start before outdoor planting begins. Typically, we do our outdoor planting around May 20th in the north and later as we move south, but if we count back six weeks from "Corn planting time" across the country, we will have reliable information for starting the hotbed. Plants left in the bed too long will deteriorate20 and should be planted in the ground as soon as they're ready; if this is done, they won't suffer from overcrowding, and there's no need to transplant, although this can always be beneficial for certain plants. If you add the convenience of a cold frame to the hotbed, where you can transplant the cabbage and cauliflower as soon as they show rough leaves, it'll be a significant advantage, and the space created in the hotbed can then be used to transplant tomatoes, peppers, and similar plants, leading to better-rooted, sturdier plants.

Fresh horse manure is used for heating the bed and must be procured from stables where a number of horses are kept that sufficient may be obtained at one time. It is not necessary for the small hotbed to pile the manure and turn it over two or three times before putting it into the pit; much time and labor is saved by putting it at once in the pit, tramping it down as filled in until it is within five or six inches of the level of the ground outside. Care must be taken that it is tramped down evenly, especially in the corners,21 or it will settle unevenly and cause the soil to sink in places. The earth may be placed on at once if the manure is steaming when put in the pit. Good, mellow loam, containing a portion of humus or leaf mould is the best hotbed soil and it should be fine and free from all roughage of sticks and stones and hard lumps of soil. Putting the top inch or two through a sand screen is a good practice as this gives a fine soil suitable for the finer seeds.

Fresh horse manure is used for heating the bed and should be collected from stables with multiple horses so that there's enough at once. For a small hotbed, it’s not necessary to stack and turn the manure two or three times before putting it in the pit; you save a lot of time and effort by placing it directly into the pit and packing it down until it’s about five or six inches below the ground level outside. Make sure it's packed evenly, especially in the corners, or it will settle unevenly and cause the soil to sink in some areas. If the manure is steaming when added to the pit, you can put the earth on right away. Good, loose loam that includes some humus or leaf mold is the best soil for a hotbed, and it should be fine and free of any debris like sticks, stones, or hard clumps of soil. It’s a good idea to sift the top inch or two through a sand screen as this creates a fine soil that's ideal for smaller seeds.

Usually the bed will be in condition for sowing in twenty-four hours, if the manure is heating well—and this can be ascertained by thrusting a fork down into the bed and leaving it a few moments, withdrawing and feeling of the tines, when the temperature can be quite accurately gauged—or a thermometer may be forced down through the soil upon the manure for a test. From four to five inches of soil will be sufficient if the season is late—slightly more if the season is early and the plants likely to remain long in the beds, and it must be leveled off as flat as possible so that in watering the water will22 not run and wash the seeds out of the ground.

Usually, the bed will be ready for planting in twenty-four hours if the manure is heating up well—and you can check this by pushing a fork into the bed and leaving it for a few moments, then pulling it out and feeling the tines to gauge the temperature accurately—or you can insert a thermometer into the soil above the manure for a better assessment. Four to five inches of soil will be enough if the season is late—slightly more if it’s early and the plants are likely to stay in the beds longer. It must also be leveled as flat as possible so that when you water, the water won’t run and wash the seeds out of the ground.

The sowing of the seed is one of the fascinating phases of gardening that every born gardener enjoys and the watching for the breaking of the soil with the tiny green seed leaves is a joy indeed. Unlike open air planting, there is rarely a failure in seed germination if good seed is used. The ideal conditions of warm soil, mellow, moist soil of just the right consistency; protection from changes of weather all make for a high per cent of plants from the sowing, and the chief difficulty is often an embarrassment of plants—that is they come up too thickly, a trouble that is easily obviated by sowing quite thinly, holding back a portion of the seed for later sowings if needed, or for a later crop.

Sowing seeds is one of the most exciting parts of gardening that every gardener loves, and watching the soil break as the tiny green leaves emerge is truly a joy. Unlike planting directly in the ground, the chances of seeds not germinating are very low if you use good seeds. The perfect conditions—warm, well-aerated, and moist soil combined with protection from weather changes—create a high percentage of successful plants from sowing. The main challenge is often dealing with too many plants sprouting, which can be easily managed by sowing the seeds sparsely, saving some for later use, or for a second crop.

Each variety of seed must be given a little plot of ground by itself and should be separated from its neighbor by thin strips of wood pressed into the soil; this not only helps in identifying plants of similar appearance, but also prevents the washing together of the seed when too much water is applied. Where two or three different varieties of23 the same plant—as Early Dutch Cabbage, Danish Roundhead, Early Summer, etc., are sown it will be well to alternate the plots with some other vegetable so as to leave no chance for mistakes in setting out the plants later on. A row of lettuce or radishes may be interposed if desired; at any rate the presence of the strips of wood will aid greatly in keeping them distinct.

Each type of seed should have its own small plot of soil and should be separated from its neighbors by narrow strips of wood pressed into the ground. This not only helps in identifying plants that look similar but also prevents the seeds from mixing when too much water is applied. When sowing two or three different varieties of23 the same plant—like Early Dutch Cabbage, Danish Roundhead, Early Summer, etc.—it's a good idea to alternate the plots with another vegetable to avoid any confusion when planting them later. You can insert a row of lettuce or radishes if you’d like; regardless, the wooden strips will greatly help in keeping them separate.

Each plot of seeds must be plainly labeled with thin strips of wood marked with the name of the seed and the date of sowing. If seeds of certain plants have been purchased of different seedsmen it will be well to indicate the source on the labels, in this way one can compare the fertility of the two purchases of seed and decide which is the more desirable.

Each seed plot must be clearly labeled with thin wooden strips that have the name of the seed and the date of planting. If seeds of certain plants have been bought from different suppliers, it's a good idea to note the source on the labels. This way, you can compare the productivity of the two batches of seeds and determine which one is better.

There is a great difference in the germination of different garden seeds, certain varieties appearing in from three to five days—as cabbage, radishes, etc. Others—like peppers, parsley and the like—require from two to three weeks to appear above ground and one should not lose faith in the "Quickness" of the seed until a reasonable24 time has elapsed, nor will it be desirable to dig them up every day or two to see if they are growing; this will discourage rather than accelerate the process.

There is a big difference in how quickly different garden seeds germinate. Some varieties, like cabbage and radishes, sprout in about three to five days. Others, such as peppers and parsley, can take from two to three weeks to come up. It's important not to lose faith in the seed's "quickness" until a reasonable amount of time has passed. Constantly digging them up every day or two to check on their growth will discourage the process rather than speed it up.

If the soil in the hotbed appears dry when sowing the seed it should be carefully watered by means of a fine-nosed watering pot or a whisk broom dipped in water, care being taken that not enough water is used at a time to wash the soil or disturb the planting. If any seed is uncovered it must be recovered. Seed sown under the protection of sash, either in hotbed or cold frame, does not require to be covered as deeply as when in the open ground, often about as much soil as will entirely cover it is sufficient, always so in the case of fine seed which should be sown broadcast in sections and covered by sifting fine soil or clean sand over and pressing all down firmly with a piece of board. Larger seeds may be sown in drills, opened a quarter of an inch deep and the earth drawn over them and pressed down.

If the soil in the hotbed looks dry when planting the seeds, carefully water it with a fine-nosed watering can or a whisk broom dipped in water. Be careful not to use too much water at once, as this can wash away the soil or disturb the planting. If any seeds get exposed, they need to be covered back up. Seeds planted under a frame, whether in a hotbed or a cold frame, don't need to be covered as deeply as they do in the open ground. Usually, just enough soil to fully cover them is sufficient—this is especially true for small seeds, which should be spread out in sections and covered with a light layer of fine soil or clean sand, then pressed down firmly with a board. Larger seeds can be planted in rows, with trenches about a quarter-inch deep, and then the soil can be drawn over them and pressed down.

Plants that make a rather high growth, even in the hotbed, like tomatoes, should not be planted25 in front of lower growing things, but should be in the rear or extend entirely across the bed; tomatoes, for instance, are apt to overtop such plants as peppers, which grow quite slowly in the hotbed. Endive, parsley, lettuce and onions, all are plants which do not assert themselves very strongly at first and should not be crowded for room or sunshine.

Plants that grow quite tall, even in a hotbed, like tomatoes, shouldn’t be planted25 in front of shorter plants but should be placed in the back or spread out across the bed; for example, tomatoes can easily overshadow slower-growing plants like peppers in the hotbed. Endive, parsley, lettuce, and onions are all plants that don’t take up much space or compete for sunlight at first and shouldn’t be crowded.

When all the planting is in and the soil watered, if necessary, newspapers should be spread over the soil and the bed closed and germination awaited. If the sun is very hot it may be necessary to raise the sash before the plants appear, but where this is done care must be taken that the papers are not disturbed by the wind, as if blown about the soil will dry out and check or kill germination.

When all the planting is done and the soil is watered, if needed, newspapers should be spread over the soil, and the bed should be closed while waiting for germination. If it's very sunny, you might need to lift the cover before the plants come up, but if you do this, you have to ensure that the papers don't get blown around by the wind because if they are disturbed, the soil will dry out, which can stop or kill the germination.

As soon as a plot of seeds breaks ground the little seedlings will need air and light and the paper should be removed from this portion and replaced on top of the glass, held in place with pieces of wood or anything that will prevent its blowing about; this will only be necessary until26 the plants are able to stand full sunlight, which will be as soon as they have grown their first pair of real leaves. As the young plants increase in size more and more air and sunshine should be given them and due attention to watering must be carefully observed. Lath screens to temper the sun will be necessary and will be needed to replace the sash when the plants are large enough to dispense with it during the heat of the day; these, in turn, may be replaced by wire screens if there is any danger of predatory cats, chickens or children, for it is the work of but a few moments for an entire planting to be destroyed by any one of them. Puss likes nothing better than to get into that nice warm hotbed and roll on the soft warm ground and as for Biddy!

As soon as a patch of seeds starts to grow, the little seedlings will need air and light, so the paper should be taken off this area and put back on top of the glass, secured with pieces of wood or anything that will keep it from blowing away. This will be necessary only until26 the plants can handle full sunlight, which will be once they have developed their first set of real leaves. As the young plants grow larger, they should get more air and sunshine, and careful attention to watering is essential. Slatted screens to moderate the sun will be needed and should replace the sash when the plants are big enough to go without it during the hottest parts of the day. These may be swapped for wire screens if there's a risk of roaming cats, chickens, or kids, since even a moment's distraction can destroy an entire planting thanks to any one of them. Cats love nothing more than to jump into that cozy hotbed and roll around in the soft, warm soil, and as for chickens!

It is surprising the number of things that may be started in the hotbed and transplanted into the open ground as soon as the weather permits, thus gaining at least a month's start in the garden. A great many of the vegetables that are always sown in the open ground—beets, string or lima beans, endive, lettuce—all may be started in the hotbed27 and planted out and will give one very tender and succulent vegetables to use while the main crop is maturing from open ground sowing. Once one has acquired the hotbed habit one will never have quite room enough for one will always be wanting to try something more. One of the most satisfactory pushing forward of vegetables is achieved in planting melons and cucumbers and squash on pieces of sod in the hotbed. Of course cucumbers for pickles should always be sown rather late in the open ground but fruit for slicing for the table may very profitably be started on sod and transferred to the open ground when all danger of frost is passed and so be ready a good month sooner and what is, perhaps, quite as important, escape the ravages of the striped cucumber beetle, that exasperating foe to vine culture.

It’s surprising how many things can be started in the hotbed and then moved to the open ground as soon as the weather allows, giving you at least a month's head start in the garden. Many vegetables that are typically sown directly in the ground—such as beets, string or lima beans, endive, and lettuce—can all be started in the hotbed27 and later transplanted, providing very tender and delicious vegetables to enjoy while the main crop is growing from direct sowing. Once you get into the habit of using a hotbed, you’ll find you never have quite enough space because you’ll always want to try something new. One of the most rewarding ways to boost your vegetable growth is by planting melons, cucumbers, and squash on patches of sod in the hotbed. Of course, cucumbers intended for pickles should always be sown later in the open ground, but fruit for slicing can effectively be started on sod and then moved to the open ground once the frost danger is over, allowing you to harvest a good month earlier and, just as importantly, avoiding the damage from the striped cucumber beetle, that annoying enemy of vine crops.

A cold wet spell at planting time often results in a loss of the entire planting of Lima and string beans, but if one has taken the precaution of planting a half pint of seed in the hotbed and transplanting them along about the twenty-first of May, one can wait until the first of June, if28 necessary, to plant the main crop and be assured of a successful stand of plants which will bear quite as early as if planted in unsuitable weather and soil; this is of especial moment owing to the high price of this class of seed; all varieties of seeds have advanced in price but the difference is most marked in seeds of the various legumes—peas and beans, of all varieties which command a price that makes especial care in their planting advisable.

A cold, wet spell during planting time often leads to losing the entire crop of Lima and string beans. However, if you’ve taken the precaution of planting a half pint of seeds in the hotbed and transplanting them around May 21st, you can wait until June 1st, if necessary, to plant the main crop. This way, you’ll be assured of a successful crop that’ll yield just as early as if it had been planted in unfavorable weather and soil. This is especially important given the high prices for these types of seeds. While all seed prices have gone up, the most noticeable increases are in the prices of legumes—peas and beans—of all kinds, which makes careful planting particularly important.

Cold Frames

Cold Frames

Supplement effectively the hotbed or, in mild climates, take their place. They are, to all effects and purposes a hotbed—minus the heat—and so do not require the excavation of a pit. The part above the ground is similar to that of the hotbed, being supplied with sash and given the same slant to shed water and concentrate as much sunshine as possible. For spring use it should front the south and occupy a well-drained position, but for mid-season use an east exposure is often29 desirable. If one wishes to use it to transplant things from the hotbed, then a temporary frame of boards made to bolt together may be constructed that may be taken apart and stored away when no longer required; if used for transplanting the sash should be in a position a week before it is needed so that the soil may become warm and friable, then the little plants of cabbage, cauliflower and the like may be transferred without any appreciable check in the growth and what there is will be advantageous as it will result in the formation of a mass of fibrous roots which will give them an additional chance in the struggle for life in the open. Even screens of cheese cloth will give sufficient protection in any but frosty weather and blankets may supplement these on cold days if glass is prohibitive on account of its excessive price.

Supplement effectively the hotbed or, in milder climates, use them instead. They are, for all intents and purposes, a hotbed—minus the heat—and therefore don't require digging a pit. The above-ground part is similar to that of the hotbed, equipped with a lid and angled to drain water and capture as much sunlight as possible. For spring use, it should face south and be in a well-drained spot, but for mid-season use, an east-facing position is often desirable. If you want to use it for transplanting from the hotbed, you can build a temporary frame using boards that can be bolted together, which can be taken apart and stored away when not needed. If it’s used for transplanting, the lid should be put in place a week before you'll need it so the soil can warm up and become loose, allowing you to transfer small plants like cabbage and cauliflower without significantly interrupting their growth. Any disruption will actually be beneficial because it encourages the development of a network of fibrous roots that will help them thrive in their new environment. Even a screen made of cheesecloth can provide enough protection in all but frosty conditions, and blankets can be used to supplement this on cold days if glass is too expensive.

A well-spaded bed of good soil, enriched with a little well decayed manure—that from last year's hotbed will answer, or bone meal may be used or a commercial fertilizer, for the plants will30 need food at this stage of their growth, should be prepared and the frame set on this or sunk a few inches into the ground to insure warmth and prevent the ingress of small rodents which somehow show a peculiar penchant for hotbeds and cold frames and have been known to destroy a whole planting of seeds in a single night. A little nitrate of soda scattered between the rows of cabbage and cauliflower will work wonders in the growth of these plants and is to be recommended at this stage of their growth and again when transplanted into the open ground.

A well-turned bed of good soil, enriched with a bit of well-aged manure—last year’s hotbed will work, or you can use bone meal or a commercial fertilizer—because the plants will30 need nutrients at this stage of growth. The frame should be set on this or sunk a few inches into the ground to ensure warmth and keep small rodents out, as they have a strange tendency to go after hotbeds and cold frames and can wipe out an entire planting of seeds overnight. A little nitrate of soda sprinkled between the rows of cabbage and cauliflower will significantly boost these plants' growth and is recommended at this stage and again when transplanting them into the open ground.

Other forms of plant protection are found in the frameless beds protected by lath screens; these are used mainly during the summer months and are especially adapted for growing pansies from seed to be transferred to cold frames in the fall and grown on until time to plant out in permanent beds in spring; for growing violets in like manner and also for starting cabbage seed to be held over winter in cold frames for early spring planting.

Other methods of plant protection can be found in the open beds shielded by wooden screens. These are primarily used during the summer and are particularly suited for growing pansies from seed to be moved to cold frames in the fall and nurtured until it's time to plant them in permanent beds in the spring. They're also used for growing violets in a similar way and for starting cabbage seeds to keep over the winter in cold frames for early spring planting.

The Sand Box

The Sandbox

Is used as an auxiliary to the hotbed for a nursery for those plants which are to be used in the house or conservatory during winter and must be kept in a growing, but not blooming, condition during summer and shifted from pot to pot as occasion requires. Though mainly essential in the growing of house plants it is often found of much use as a place to carry on such vegetable plants as one may desire to pot off for sale or for stockier growth, previous to setting in the open ground. The sand box consists of any shallow box of sufficient size to hold a considerable number of two to four inch pots. It should not, preferably, be over three feet wide but may be of any desired length. Five inches is a good depth. It should be elevated on some kind of support, at a convenient height to work at when sitting on a stool or box. When used for growing house plants it is usually placed in a rather shady spot on the east side of the house, but if used for vegetables it may be given a more sunny, exposed32 position; it should be filled with clean sand into which the pots are plunged to their rims and the sand is kept constantly wet. The pots should be turned around in the sand every day or two to prevent the roots, which escape through the hole in the bottom of the pot, growing in the sand; to prevent this also place a piece of broken crock or glass over the drainage hole. In potting off plants from the hotbed use a small thumb-pot at first and re-pot in one a size larger as soon as the roots form a network around the outside of the ball of earth: this condition may be ascertained by tapping the pot against the side of the box which will loosen the ball of earth and allow it to drop out on the hand. Plants that are to go into the ground in late May will probably not require re-potting, certainly not more than once, but this treatment makes stocky, well-rooted plants that command a better price than the untransplanted plants from the beds, though there is always an excellent market for all the products of the hotbed.

Is used as an aid to the hotbed for a nursery for those plants intended for use in the house or conservatory during winter and must be kept growing, but not blooming, during summer while being shifted from pot to pot as needed. Although mainly essential for growing house plants, it’s also useful for potting vegetable plants that one may want to sell or grow stronger before planting in the open ground. The sand box is any shallow box large enough to hold several two to four-inch pots. It should preferably not be wider than three feet but can be any length you want. A depth of five inches is good. It should be raised on some sort of support, at a comfortable height to work at when sitting on a stool or box. When used for growing house plants, it’s typically placed in a relatively shady spot on the east side of the house, but if used for vegetables, it can be placed in a sunnier, more exposed position; it should be filled with clean sand, into which the pots are sunk to their rims, and the sand should remain consistently wet. The pots should be rotated in the sand every day or two to prevent the roots that escape through the hole in the bottom of the pot from growing into the sand; to avoid this, place a piece of broken pot or glass over the drainage hole. When potting plants from the hotbed, use a small thumb pot initially and re-pot into one that’s a size larger as soon as the roots form a network around the outside of the ball of soil: this can be checked by tapping the pot against the side of the box, which will loosen the ball of soil and allow it to drop into your hand. Plants that are meant to go into the ground in late May probably won’t need re-potting, definitely not more than once, but this method creates stocky, well-rooted plants that sell for a better price than those untransplanted from the beds, although there’s always a good market for all the products of the hotbed.

Sowing Seed in Flats in the House

Sowing Seeds Indoors in Trays

Is the simplest, and least satisfactory form of advance work in the garden; it belongs in the class of being "better than nothing," but for some plants is quite as successful as a hotbed, unfortunately that particular class is not embraced in a book on vegetable gardening, but belongs particularly to flower gardening and the special sorts dedicated to the warm conservatory and window garden.

Is the simplest and least satisfying way to prepare in the garden; it falls into the category of being "better than nothing," but for some plants, it can be just as effective as a hotbed. Unfortunately, this particular category isn't covered in a book on vegetable gardening; it specifically pertains to flower gardening and the special types associated with warm conservatories and window gardens.

However, if one has not, and cannot achieve, the advantage of a hotbed then one must make the most of what is attainable and resort to flats. These may be of any shape or size, but the usual florists' flats—about fifteen inches wide and twenty long and not over five inches deep—are of a practical size for general use; narrower ones which may be set on a window sill are also useful but will not give a large number of plants. Very convenient plant boxes which simulate a miniature hotbed, being about six inches high in the back and about four in front, of the usual flat34 size and supplied with a hinged lid of glass, are sold by the florists but are easily manufactured at home and are better than the open flats as they enable one to regulate moisture, the principal trouble—owing to the dry air of the living rooms, the shallowness of the soil, in growing plants in flats.

However, if someone hasn't been able to take advantage of a hotbed, then they need to make the most of what's available and use flats instead. These can come in any shape or size, but the typical florist flats—about fifteen inches wide, twenty inches long, and no more than five inches deep—are a practical option for general use. Narrower ones that fit on a windowsill are also helpful, but they won't accommodate many plants. Very handy plant boxes that mimic a miniature hotbed are about six inches high in the back and four inches in front, made to the usual flat34 size and equipped with a hinged glass lid. Florists sell these, but they can easily be made at home and are better than open flats because they help manage moisture, which is the main challenge—due to the dry air in living rooms and the shallow soil when growing plants in flats.

Several holes for drainage should be made in the bottom of the boxes and these covered with pieces of shard or glass and the boxes filled to within a half inch of the top with a good compost consisting of fibrous loam—that shaved from the bottom of sods—leaf mould, clean white sand and a little well-rotted manure, all thoroughly mixed and free from roughage.

Several drainage holes should be made in the bottom of the boxes, covered with pieces of shard or glass, and the boxes filled to within half an inch of the top with quality compost made from fibrous loam—shaved from the bottom of sods—leaf mold, clean white sand, and a little well-rotted manure, all thoroughly mixed and free from any rough material.

The seeds should be broadcasted, if fine, drilled in if coarse, and the soil pressed down snugly over them. In the case of fine seed it is a good idea to cover with fine white sand instead of soil as this is less subject to the minute fungus which causes the deadly "damping off" so destructive to plant life and especially troublesome in growing plants in the house.

The seeds should be scattered if they are small and drilled in if they are large, with the soil pressed down firmly over them. For small seeds, it's a good idea to cover them with fine white sand instead of soil since this is less prone to the tiny fungus that causes the harmful "damping off," which is very damaging to plant life and especially problematic when growing plants indoors.

As in the planting in the hotbed, the seed plots should be carefully labeled with name and date of sowing. After planting the seeds the flats should be set in a pan of water until the surface looks dark but not wet. They should then be covered with a sheet of white paper and glass and set in a warm, sunny window until germination takes place. Then the glass should be raised sufficiently to admit air and the paper removed and placed between the box and the window or a width of cheese cloth may be interposed between the glass and the box to temper the sunlight until the little plants have acquired their first pair of true leaves when they will be able to endure more heat and air which should be steadily increased until on mild days the window may be opened that they may benefit by full sunshine and air. As soon as the little plants are an inch high, transplant into other flats, setting an inch or more apart each way, and grow on as before or until they again crowd each other, when they may be transferred to small two or three inch pots and the sand box until time to go into the ground.

As with planting in the hotbed, the seed trays should be clearly labeled with the name and date of sowing. After planting the seeds, the trays should be placed in a pan of water until the surface looks dark but not soggy. They should then be covered with a sheet of white paper and glass, and placed in a warm, sunny window until they germinate. Once germination occurs, raise the glass slightly to let in air, remove the paper, and place it between the box and the window, or use a layer of cheesecloth between the glass and the box to soften the sunlight until the small plants have developed their first true leaves. At that point, they can handle more heat and air, which should be gradually increased until, on mild days, the window can be opened to allow full sunlight and air. As soon as the small plants reach an inch in height, transplant them into other trays, spacing them an inch or more apart in all directions, and continue to care for them as before. When they start to crowd each other again, they can be moved to small two or three-inch pots and placed in the sand box until it’s time to plant them in the ground.

1 Or a trench as deep as the completed pit and as narrow as can be handled may be dug to outline a pit of the required dimensions, and filled with grout, well tamped down; when this has had time to harden sufficiently, the earth may be removed from the center and the cement given a finishing coat, and the wall brought to the required height above ground by the aid of a frame of boards.

1 You can dig a trench as deep as the finished pit and as narrow as you can manage to outline a pit of the required size. Fill it with grout and compact it well; once it has hardened enough, you can remove the earth from the center, apply a finishing coat of cement, and build the wall up to the desired height above ground using a frame made of boards.


CHAPTER III
PLANTING SEEDS IN THE GROUND

Is important for it is just the form that most of the garden sowing will take. The sowing of seed in hotbeds and flats in the house is of much interest and importance, but the garden, for the most part, will go directly into the open ground, and upon the care and judgment with which the planting is done will depend the success of the season's work.

It is important because it's the main way most garden planting will happen. Sowing seeds in hotbeds and trays indoors is interesting and significant, but most of the planting will go straight into the open ground. The success of the season's work will depend on the care and judgment used during the planting process.

The ground should be in as good condition for sowing as possible—neither too dry nor too wet. It should, and this is of much importance, be warm. The best of seed will not germinate if sown in wet, cold soil, especially is this true of peas and beans, failures with these being almost invariably due to too much haste in planting or unfavorable weather immediately following. It is no unusual thing in a cold, late spring for these37 legumes to require repeated replanting and with the enormously advanced price of all kinds of seeds it will not pay to take too long chances by undue haste in planting. Usually it is quite safe to plant nearly all of the garden truck by the tenth of May at the north but the weather for the recent seasons has been unusual and much loss was occasioned by adhering too closely to an established schedule; so, if the season promises to be in any way, except for earliness, abnormal, it is best to go slowly and not trust all one's seed to an initial planting but to hold a little in reserve to replant unfilled areas. Cutworms, too, have caused much devastation the past few seasons—usually these are troublesome to transplanted things, mainly cabbage, peppers and tomatoes, but last year they destroyed beans and other plants impartially, causing much loss.

The ground should be in the best possible condition for planting—not too dry and not too wet. It should also be warm, which is really important. Even the best seeds won't sprout if planted in cold, damp soil, especially peas and beans. Failures with these crops usually happen because of rushing to plant or bad weather right after. In a cold, late spring, it’s common for these legumes to need to be replanted multiple times, and with the high prices of all kinds of seeds, it doesn't make sense to take unnecessary risks by planting too soon. Generally, it's safe to plant almost everything in the garden by May 10th up north, but the weather has been unpredictable lately, and sticking too rigidly to a schedule has led to losses. So, if the season seems like it might be unusual, except for being earlier than normal, it’s smarter to take your time and not use all your seeds in the first planting. Keep some in reserve for replanting empty spots. Cutworms have also caused a lot of damage in the past few seasons—typically, they're a problem for transplanted crops like cabbage, peppers, and tomatoes, but last year they also wiped out beans and other plants without discrimination, resulting in significant losses.

In planting a seed drill attached to a hand cultivator will be of great assistance as seed may be drilled in rows or dropped in hills at different distances apart so rapidly that the entire garden may be planted in little more time than it takes38 to do an hundred foot row by hand, and the drill will do it better, opening up the rows, sowing the seed and covering all in one operation. If, however, one is not possessed of this convenient implement one can do very well without by removing one hoe of the hand cultivator, or by reversing both hoes and bringing the points together and opening a drill to receive the seed and covering it with the hoe or rake, or it may even be opened with a trowel, which though laborious, is a very effectual way.

Using a seed drill attached to a hand cultivator will be really helpful because it allows you to plant seeds in rows or drop them in hills at varying distances quickly. This way, you can plant the entire garden in just a bit more time than it takes to plant a hundred-foot row by hand, and the drill does a better job, opening up the rows, sowing the seeds, and covering everything in one go. However, if you don't have this handy tool, you can still manage without it by removing one hoe from the hand cultivator or by flipping both hoes around to bring the points together, creating a drill to hold the seed and covering it with the hoe or rake. You could also use a trowel to make the hole, which, although labor-intensive, is quite effective.

The soil must always be firmed above the seed after sowing, either by means of a flat piece of board, with a handle on one surface or, in the case of large seeds by tramping the rows with the feet; this firming of the soil is most important, it brings the soil close about the seed so that the first little root—a very tiny, delicate little root, feeling its way about in search of nourishment can come at once into contact with the warm soil and obtain the food and moisture so critically needed at this juncture of its little life. The firming of the soil conserves the moisture, preventing39 the entrance of dry, hot air, and to obtain this further the ground after being tramped down should be gone over lightly with rake or trowel and a dust-mulch produced. In fact, all through one's gardening processes one must keep the dust-mulch in evidence for it means conservation of moisture and fertility and freedom from weeds.

The soil should always be pressed down over the seed after planting, either with a flat board that has a handle on one side or, for larger seeds, by stepping on the rows with your feet. This pressing is essential; it pushes the soil close to the seed, allowing the first tiny, delicate root to quickly access the warm soil to get the nutrients and moisture it desperately needs at this stage of its life. Firming the soil helps to retain moisture, preventing dry, hot air from getting in. To further aid this, after pressing down the soil, it should be lightly raked or smoothed with a trowel to create a dust mulch. In fact, throughout your gardening, it's important to maintain this dust mulch because it helps conserve moisture, enhance fertility, and reduce weeds.

Seeds of different sizes, hardness and germination qualities, require different treatment; fine seeds may be sown in shallow drills, scattering seeds whose germinary power is known to be low or questionable quite thickly in the drills; beets are usually sown quite freely, while radishes—nearly every seed of which may be trusted to grow—may be scattered at about the distance they are wanted to stand in the rows; beans, too, may be dropped at about the distance they will require—six inches or more apart for limas, and as these seeds are sensitive to cold and dampness it is a wise precaution to set them on edge, eye down, in the drills. Seeds that germinate slowly, like peas, are hastened considerably by40 being soaked over night in warm water, and many seeds that require considerable time to start are hastened if warm water be poured into the trenches before the soil is filled in; this is especially beneficial in very dry soil where germination might otherwise be delayed until after a rain.

Seeds of various sizes, hardness, and germination qualities need different handling; small seeds can be sown in shallow grooves, while seeds with known low or questionable germination should be scattered thickly in those grooves. Beets are typically sown quite generously, whereas radishes—almost every seed of which can be counted on to grow—can be scattered at the spacing they are meant to have in the rows. Beans, too, can be dropped at their required distance—about six inches or more apart for limas. Since these seeds are sensitive to cold and moisture, it's advisable to place them on their sides, with the eye facing down, in the grooves. Seeds that take a while to germinate, like peas, can be significantly sped up by being soaked overnight in warm water. Additionally, many seeds that need extra time to sprout can be accelerated by pouring warm water into the trenches before filling in the soil; this is particularly helpful in very dry soil, where germination might otherwise be postponed until after it rains.

Beds
An organized layout of garden beds

It is not necessary that new seed be purchased every spring; if one has seed of his own saving so that its age is known one can use it with confidence. Seed purchased of the seedsman is more or less problematical, but is usually supposed to be of the previous season's crop, especially is this true of those seedsmen who produce their own seed on farms located in different sections of the country, and whose seeds are usually very reliable. However there are many seedsmen, or jobbers, who purchase the bulk of their seeds in the open market and cannot guarantee the quality in any way. It is always a great mistake to purchase cheap seed; it is better to buy seed of a reputable seedsman who puts his name and reputation back of it, though the price may be considerably41 higher than one would pay for the same seed of the local store or seedsman.

It's not necessary to buy new seeds every spring; if you have your own seeds saved and their age is known, you can use them with confidence. Seeds bought from seed dealers can be uncertain, but they are usually considered to be from the previous season's crop, especially when sourced from dealers who grow their own seeds on farms in various parts of the country, which are typically very reliable. However, many seed dealers or middlemen buy most of their seeds from the open market and cannot guarantee their quality at all. It's always a big mistake to buy cheap seeds; it's better to purchase seeds from a reputable dealer who stands behind their product, even if the price is significantly higher than what you'd pay at a local store or dealer.

Where one has sufficient old seed of different kinds it is a good idea to test them out during the late days of winter and so ascertain their fitness for use. The testing is a simple matter, warmth and moisture being all that is required. A long tray covered with an inch of sand kept moist may be marked off in squares and the seed it is desired to test scattered evenly over the surface, labeling or numbering each square, then a thick piece of flannel should be wet in warm water and placed snugly over all and the tray put in a warm place—back of the furnace, over a radiator or on the back of the kitchen reservoir if a fire is kept there all the time, until the seeds germinate; it will then be seen what proportion germinate and how freely one will need to sow in order to obtain a good stand of plants. If the supply of seed is large a germination test of seventy-five per cent. will justify its use but if there is only a limited supply it will be better to42 purchase fresh seed or at least sufficient to supplement the home supply. It is always worth while to save one's own seed if the vegetables have exceptionally good qualities; this insures trueness to name and often an improvement over the parent stock; it is not, however, desirable where a number of varieties of any vegetable is grown in the same garden as the seed is quite certain to be mixed and the good qualities of the parent stock to be lost.

Where you have enough old seeds of different types, it's a good idea to test them out during the late days of winter to see if they're suitable for use. The testing is straightforward; all you need is warmth and moisture. A long tray filled with an inch of moist sand can be divided into squares, and the seeds you want to test should be evenly spread over the surface, labeling or numbering each square. Then, a thick piece of flannel should be soaked in warm water and placed snugly over everything, and the tray set in a warm spot—like behind the furnace, over a radiator, or on the back of a kitchen reservoir if there's always a fire there—until the seeds germinate. You'll then see what proportion germinates and how many seeds you'll need to sow for a good stand of plants. If you have a large supply of seeds, a germination rate of seventy-five percent is enough to justify using them, but if the supply is limited, it's better to 42 buy fresh seeds or at least enough to supplement your home supply. It's always worth saving your own seeds if the vegetables have unusually good qualities; this ensures they are true to type and often an improvement over the parent stock. However, it's not advisable to do this if you grow several varieties of any vegetable in the same garden, as the seeds are likely to mix, and the valuable traits of the parent stock will be lost.

In sowing seed in the open ground cultivation should begin as soon as the seed is sown and covered. In the case of large seed which is tramped down in the rows and covered an inch or more it is not always necessary to rake over the rows for a dust-mulch, rarely if it is likely to rain immediately. Under this condition the rows will be quite distinct and as soon as the rain is over and the ground slightly dried off the scuffle-hoe may be run along the rows restoring the dust-mulch, or creating one. Where the planting is shallow it is an excellent plan to drop radish seeds at intervals along the row as these will43 appear in from three to five days, thus marking the rows so that there will be no difficulty in following them. When this is done it will not be necessary to use ground especially for planting radishes so that there will be a saving in room that may be utilized to advantage for other vegetables. Lettuce, too, may be grown to advantage by planting a short strip of seed at the end of rows of other vegetables, where full rows are not required, as this saves space in the garden and the lettuce if placed at the ends of the rows nearest the house is easily accessible and does away with the necessity of walking on the garden after it has been cultivated, a thing the careful gardener avoids.

In planting seeds directly in the ground, cultivation should start right after the seeds are sown and covered. For larger seeds that are pressed down into the rows and covered by an inch or more, it’s usually unnecessary to rake the rows for a dust mulch, especially if rain is expected soon. In this case, the rows will remain distinct, and once the rain has stopped and the ground has dried a bit, a scuffle hoe can be used along the rows to restore or create a dust mulch. When planting is shallow, it's a great idea to drop radish seeds at intervals along the row since they will sprout in about three to five days, marking the rows so it's easy to follow them. This way, there's no need to set aside ground specifically for radishes, saving space for other vegetables. Lettuce can also be beneficially grown by planting a short strip of seeds at the ends of rows of other vegetables, where full rows aren’t needed. This saves space in the garden, and having the lettuce closest to the house makes it easily accessible, eliminating the need to walk on the garden after it’s been cultivated, which careful gardeners try to avoid.

With the intensive gardening practised on the small plot where the vegetables are planted in close rows from a foot to two feet apart, the ground should be at all times in a fine tilth, free from unworked strips and trodden paths. It is of little value to cut off the weeds with the hoe or cultivator if they are to be trodden back in the ground and so given a new lease of life. The44 scuffle-hoe is a real boon to the gardener in obviating this difficulty as in using it one walks backwards, pushing the hoe from one instead of drawing it towards one as is done with the common garden hoe; this leaves a beautiful, clean tilth, absolutely free from trampled areas and nothing cut off by the hoe will take on a new lease of life over night. More real work can be accomplished by the use of the scuffle than with any other tool in the garden; it does not supplant altogether the wheel cultivator but does its work when used alternately with it; the cultivator breaking up the soil to a greater depth, and more rapidly than the scuffle, but the latter destroys far more thoroughly all weeds and reaches closer to the plants, slipping underneath the leaves and close to the stems and routing out any and all weeds lurking there. The cultivator leaves the ground in ridges and aerates it, the scuffle levels it again and produces a fine dust-mulch which will preserve the moisture until another rain calls for the use of the cultivator.

With the intensive gardening done on the small plot where vegetables are planted in tight rows just a foot to two feet apart, the soil should always be well-tilled, free of untended strips and compacted paths. It’s not helpful to cut off the weeds with a hoe or cultivator if they’re just pushed back into the ground, giving them a chance to regrow. The44 scuffle hoe is a real lifesaver for gardeners in dealing with this problem because you use it by walking backward and pushing the hoe away from you, instead of pulling it towards you like with a regular garden hoe. This leaves a beautifully tilled area that is completely free of trampled spots, and anything cut down by the hoe won’t grow back overnight. You can get much more done with the scuffle hoe than with any other tool in the garden; it doesn’t completely replace the wheel cultivator, but it works well alongside it. The cultivator breaks up the soil more deeply and faster than the scuffle, but the scuffle is much better at thoroughly eliminating weeds and gets closer to the plants, slipping under the leaves and right up to the stems to remove any weeds hiding there. The cultivator leaves the ground in ridges and aerates it, while the scuffle levels it again and creates a fine dust mulch that preserves moisture until it’s time to use the cultivator again after the next rain.

Unless the season is a very rainy one, one good45 cultivation a week, either with scuffle or cultivator, will keep the garden in excellent shape, but every rain MUST be followed by cultivation of some sort, for there is great loss of moisture if this is not done and weeds follow quickly after rain.

Unless the season is really rainy, one good45 cultivation a week, either with a hoe or a cultivator, will keep the garden in great shape. However, every rain MUST be followed by some kind of cultivation because if you don’t, you’ll lose a lot of moisture and weeds will pop up quickly after it rains.

The various weeds with which the garden is afflicted come at separate intervals—not all together, and when one has eradicated one set of weeds there is usually a brief interval before the appearance of the next detachment. But one must have them continually in mind and keep a sharp lookout for the first tiny seedlings and destroy them before they have made even one pair of true leaves. Working around individual plants with a trowel or hand weeder has this advantage that it spies out the enemy before it would attract attention if the rows were worked with hoe or cultivator. The severe thinning that such plants as beets, carrots, endive, salsify, onions and the like require clears the rows of weeds and helps materially in general cultivation. This thinning out should always be done prior to cultivating46 between the rows, then the paths are left clear and untrodden and the garden is a delight to look upon. A basket should be carried along the rows to drop the plants removed so that they may be out of the way when ready to run the cultivator. Nearly all plants which require thinning may be used in setting out fresh rows of vegetables and where there are vacant places in the rows the spaces may be filled up with plants removed from too crowded areas.

The different weeds that invade the garden show up at different times—not all at once. When you get rid of one type of weed, there’s usually a short break before the next group appears. But it's important to stay alert and look out for the first little seedlings, destroying them before they develop even one pair of true leaves. Using a trowel or hand weeder around individual plants is beneficial because it allows you to spot the weeds early before they become noticeable, unlike if you were using a hoe or cultivator. The necessary thinning of plants like beets, carrots, endive, salsify, onions, and similar ones clears the rows of weeds and helps a lot with overall cultivation. This thinning should always be done before working between the rows with a cultivator, leaving the paths clear and untouched so the garden looks beautiful. Bring along a basket to collect the removed plants so they’re out of the way when it's time to use the cultivator. Most plants that need thinning can be used to start new rows of vegetables, and the empty spots in the rows can be filled with plants taken from overcrowded areas.

The first weeds to appear in the spring are the chickweed and the malice2 that has remained over from the previous year, being a perennial and a very hardy and persistent one; these two are ploughed under and give little or no trouble if the work has been well done. The new crop does not appear until late in the season—usually in July. Purslaine comes along in June and soon after appears that particular pest of the garden—red root. All these are very easily eradicated when small but the red root is an exceedingly47 hard weed to pull once it has got a grip on the ground and it must be taken out root and all or it will come up again with not one but several stout stalks, and a more tenacious hold than ever on the soil; it is one of the weeds which are constantly eluding detection until they have gained several inches in height when they defy the hoe and cultivator and call for strenuous hand work!

The first weeds to show up in spring are chickweed and the malice2 that has survived from the previous year, being a perennial that is very tough and persistent. If the plowing is done well, these two don't cause much trouble. The new crop usually doesn't sprout until late in the season—typically in July. Purslane appears in June, and soon after comes that particular garden nuisance—red root. All of these are easy to get rid of when they're small, but the red root becomes extremely hard to pull once it's established; it has to be removed completely or it will come back with not just one but several strong stalks and an even tougher grip on the soil. It's one of those weeds that often goes unnoticed until it grows several inches tall, at which point it resists the hoe and cultivator and requires serious hand effort!

Many of the garden weeds may be utilized for feeding stock. Belgian hares are fond of the fresh green leaves of malice and pigs enjoy both that and the purslaine and as the former comes at a time when there is little green feed available for the hares it may be pulled and fed rather than turned under. Ragweed is relished by horses and they will frequently go into a patch of it and eat it in preference to good clover growing near by.

Many garden weeds can be used to feed livestock. Belgian hares like the fresh green leaves of malice, and pigs enjoy both that and purslane. Since malice typically grows when there’s not much green feed available for the hares, it can be pulled and fed to them instead of being tilled under. Horses like ragweed and often choose to eat it over the good clover nearby.

2 Common name "malice" from its bad reputation; properly, mallow (malva rotundifolia).

2 The common name "malice" comes from its negative reputation; its proper name is mallow (malva rotundifolia).


CHAPTER IV
Transplanting

Transplanting is one test of a good gardener, another is the care of the plants after they are gotten into the ground—the careful cultivation that forbids a weed to show its head above ground, or a crust to form on the soil after a rain; these two successful operations spell success in the garden—their absence failure.

Transplanting is one way to gauge a good gardener; another is how well they care for the plants once they are in the ground—the attentive cultivation that prevents weeds from popping up or a crust from forming on the soil after it rains. Mastering these two tasks is the key to success in the garden; without them, it's a recipe for failure.

For several days before the young plants in the hotbed are to be put into the ground they should be hardened by leaving the sash entirely off and by occasionally withholding water that they may be accustomed to the irregular water supply of the open ground, but the beds should be well watered the night before transplanting that the plants may absorb enough moisture to carry them through the ordeal of transplanting and that the soil may have sufficient moisture to adhere to the roots.

For several days before the young plants in the hotbed are ready to be planted in the ground, they should be adjusted to outdoor conditions by removing the covers completely and sometimes skipping watering. This helps them get used to the inconsistent water supply they'll experience outdoors. However, the beds should be well-watered the night before transplanting so that the plants absorb enough moisture to survive the transplanting process, and the soil has enough moisture to cling to the roots.

The planting lines in the garden should be drawn and the holes for those plants which are to stand some distance apart—such as tomatoes, peppers and the like, should be already dug and, where extra fertilizing is called for, the hills enriched with a good spadeful of well decayed manure and the ground all ready for the plants. In this way transplanting will go forward with the least possible delay and the plants will suffer little, if any, from the change.

The planting lines in the garden should be marked, and the holes for plants that need to be spaced out—like tomatoes, peppers, and similar ones—should already be dug. If extra fertilizing is needed, enrich the mounds with a good shovelful of well-decayed manure, making sure the soil is ready for the plants. This way, transplanting will happen with minimal delay, and the plants will experience little, if any, stress from the change.

It is not at all necessary to wait for a rainy spell as so many think desirable; the most successful planting can be done on a clear, bright day if the work is handled properly; indeed this is just the weather that gives best results, a period of rainy weather with cloudy intervals between is also favorable except for the discomfort of working in the wet but when planting time comes one must not think too much of one's personal comfort,—it is up to one to get things into the ground and growing; we can be comfortable later on when there is time for it.

It’s not necessary to wait for a rainy period, as many people believe is best; the most effective planting can be done on a clear, sunny day if the work is done correctly. In fact, this type of weather yields the best results. A stretch of rainy weather with cloudy breaks is also good, despite the discomfort of working in the wet. However, when it’s time to plant, you shouldn't focus too much on your own comfort. It’s up to you to get things in the ground and growing; we can be comfortable later when there's time for it.

A rainy spell, broken by hot, sunshiny, muggy50 days is of all times the worst for transplanting; plants wilt and die in spite of one, fairly cooked by the hot steam engendered by the rain and sunshine, and such planting weather should be avoided unless the season is late and the planting urgent. Only as many plants should be lifted at one time as can be put into the ground before they wilt. Do not try to lift plants separately but lift them in clumps, pressing the trowel well down below the roots and lifting the plants with as little disturbance as possible—never pull up the plants by the tops as one sometimes sees done; this strips off the tender, fibrous roots on which the plant depends for gathering its food. The tap root which remains has little foraging value, it serves, principally, to hold the plant in the ground while the fine, lateral roots are busy collecting food to feed the growing top; if these little feeding roots are destroyed the plant must make a new supply before top growth can be resumed.

A rainy period followed by hot, sunny, humid50 days is the worst time for transplanting. Plants wilt and die despite being somewhat cooked by the heat created by the rain and sunshine, and this kind of planting weather should be avoided unless the season is late and planting is urgent. Only lift as many plants at a time as can be put into the ground before they wilt. Don't try to lift plants individually; instead, lift them in clumps, pressing the trowel deep below the roots and raising the plants with minimal disturbance. Never pull up plants by their tops, as you sometimes see; this removes the delicate, fibrous roots the plant needs to gather nutrients. The remaining taproot has little foraging capability; it mainly keeps the plant anchored in the ground while the fine, lateral roots collect food to nourish the growing top. If these small feeding roots are damaged, the plant must generate new ones before growth can continue.

Do not attempt to separate the plants at once but carefully release each plant as it is required;51 in this way they retain their freshness and loss from wilting is minimized.

Do not try to separate the plants all at once, but gently free each plant as needed;51 this way, they stay fresh, and wilting is reduced.

Make a hole large and deep enough for the roots, setting them deeper than they were in the hotbed, and fill in part of the earth, pressing it down firmly, fill in the hole with water and when it has seeped away fill in the remainder of the earth, leaving it dry, fine and smooth about the plant. Each of these three operations may be completed for the entire row of plants before going on to the next: the plants set in the hole and the first earth drawn up, then all the holes filled with water and by the time the last hole is filled the first will be ready for final filling in with earth. This is a more efficient method than to complete one hole at a time and keeps the plants in better shape.

Make a hole that's big and deep enough for the roots, planting them deeper than they were in the hotbed. Fill in part of the soil, pressing it down firmly. Next, fill the hole with water; once it has absorbed, complete filling it in with the rest of the soil, leaving it dry, fine, and smooth around the plant. You can finish each of these three steps for the entire row of plants before moving on to the next: first, place the plants in the holes and add the initial soil, then fill all the holes with water. By the time you finish filling the last hole, the first one will be ready for the final soil filling. This method is more efficient than doing one hole at a time and keeps the plants in better condition.

When the whole planting of one variety of vegetable is completed go over them carefully, noting any wet spots that may appear on the surface and cover them with more dry earth. Remember that it is upon the integrity of the dry mulch that the success of the planting depends.52 Do not try to protect the plants in any way; if sufficient water has been placed in the hole, the earth firmed sufficiently and an efficient dry mulch provided the plant will be much better off than if protected in any way. Do not water after transplanting until the plants have become established and need it. If for any cause some of the plants show signs of wilting while the dust-mulch is still perfect a hole should be made at one side of the plant and water poured in, recovering the spot with dry earth. If it rains immediately after planting, clearing off with fair weather, the beds must be gone over with the scuffle-hoe to replace the dust-mulch as soon as it can be worked to advantage. One has only to bear in mind that the secret of successful planting is moisture at the roots and dry earth above to succeed.

When you've finished planting a specific type of vegetable, take a careful look at them, checking for any wet spots on the surface and covering them with more dry soil. Keep in mind that the success of your planting relies on the integrity of the dry mulch.52 Don’t try to protect the plants in any way; if there's enough water in the hole, the soil is compacted properly, and there's an efficient dry mulch, the plants will do much better than if they're protected. Avoid watering after transplanting until the plants are established and truly need it. If some plants start to wilt while the dust-mulch is still intact, make a hole on one side of the plant and pour in some water, then cover the spot with dry soil. If it rains right after planting and clears up, go over the beds with a scuffle hoe to restore the dust-mulch as soon as you can. Just remember that the key to successful planting is having moisture at the roots and dry soil on top.


CHAPTER V
Gardening tools

Are so important in the proper care of the garden and for the ease with which it may be worked that only the best should be considered; the best, however, need not be the most expensive, but they should be the best adapted to the work to be attempted. It is not necessary that their number be large, indeed, the number of tools really indispensable is relatively small, but definite. A good steel garden rake will be one of the first tools required and this should be of the steel variety, neither too light nor too heavy. Get a good spade with a "D" handle that fits the hand and foot. A wheelbarrow of the wooden sideboard construction will also be required; to these will be added a garden line and a hand cultivator and as this is the most expensive and important tool its selection is of much moment. There are54 three forms of wheel hoes on the market: the high single wheel, the medium wheel and the low double wheel made to straddle the rows. The double wheeled machines have the advantage of working each side of the row, close to the plants as well as between the rows and if the hoes or cultivator teeth are properly adjusted will do twice the work of a single wheel. Some of the double wheeled cultivators are readily changed into single wheels by removing one wheel. Too high a wheel is not desirable, and as the wheel is the part of the cultivator that bears most of the strain it should be of substantial construction. Most of the machines on the market have as attachments a set of plough blades, four harrow teeth and hoe. My own—a Planet Junior, two-wheel cultivator has also an attachment for creating a dust-mulch, similar to a scuffle-hoe, but this was made especially for the machine by a local blacksmith and is a very useful addition to the outfit.

Tools are so crucial for properly caring for the garden and making it easier to work that only the best should be considered. However, the best tools don't have to be the most expensive; they just need to be the ones best suited for the tasks at hand. It's not necessary to have a large number of tools; in fact, the number of truly essential tools is relatively small but specific. A good steel garden rake will be one of the first tools you'll need, and it should be made of steel, not too light or too heavy. Get a good spade with a "D" handle that fits comfortably in your hand and underfoot. You'll also need a wheelbarrow made of wooden sideboards; add to that a garden line and a hand cultivator. Since this is the most expensive and important tool, choosing the right one is very important. There are54 three types of wheel hoes available: the high single wheel, the medium wheel, and the low double wheel designed to straddle the rows. The double-wheeled machines have the advantage of working on both sides of the row, close to the plants and between the rows. If the hoes or cultivator teeth are properly adjusted, they can do twice the work of a single wheel. Some double-wheeled cultivators can easily convert into single wheels by removing one wheel. A wheel that's too high isn't ideal, and since the wheel bears most of the strain, it should be solidly built. Most machines on the market come with attachments like a set of plough blades, four harrow teeth, and a hoe. My own, a Planet Junior two-wheel cultivator, also has an attachment for creating a dust mulch, similar to a scuffle hoe, but this was specially made for the machine by a local blacksmith and is a really useful addition to the setup.

If one does not object to the extra expense a seeding attachment can be added that will minimize55 the work of planting the garden. A good machine with seeder that will plant in rows and with all the attachments can be purchased for $16.00 or the same machine which will sow in rows and also in hills 4, 6, 8, 12, or 24 inches apart can be purchased for $19.00 and is a good buy, for a good machine of this kind, if properly cared for, kept under shelter when not in use, oiled occasionally, the attachments kept sharpened and given an occasional coat of paint as required is good for twenty years at least. There are still cheaper machines on the market, single wheel implements with the usual attachments, that will do good work, for as little as $5.25 and $7.50, and two wheelers at $10.00 and one single wheel that is especially designed for wear, with an iron instead of wire wheel, built for service at $7.00.

If you don’t mind spending a little extra, you can add a seeding attachment that will reduce the effort of planting the garden. A good machine with a seeder that plants in rows, along with all the attachments, can be bought for $16.00. Alternatively, the same machine that can sow in rows or in hills spaced 4, 6, 8, 12, or 24 inches apart is available for $19.00, which is a great deal. If properly maintained—kept sheltered when not in use, oiled from time to time, and with the attachments sharpened and painted as needed—a good machine like this can last at least twenty years. There are also cheaper machines available, like single-wheel tools with the usual attachments, that do a good job for as little as $5.25 to $7.50, and two-wheelers priced at $10.00, along with a durable single-wheel model designed for longevity, featuring an iron wheel instead of a wire one, priced at $7.00.

To this assortment of tools should be added a straight edged garden hoe, or any preferred shaped edge, and a scuffle-hoe. This last is obtainable in 6, 8, 9, and 10 inch blade and costs ninety cents for the 6 inch and $1.00 for the 9 inch size; the ten inch does more rapid work56 and can be run between rows planted twelve to fifteen inches wide, clearing the entire space between in one operation so that one goes over the ground very rapidly. Useful in any one's hands it is preëminently a woman's tool, no lame and aching back accompanies its use as one does not lean over in hoeing as with the common garden hoe. If I could have but one tool to garden with I think it would be a scuffle-hoe, for no other tool will keep the garden so free from weeds. With the common garden hoe my paths through the garden are usually marked by the wreckage of plants, for use as much care as I can sooner or later I get to hoeing too vigorously and off goes a cabbage, tomato or onion. The scuffle-hoe does not seem to arouse an excess of energy; one goes along smoothly and serenely, leaving clean tilth and undepleted rows of vegetables in one's wake and looking back at the end of each row sees that it is good.

To this collection of tools, you should add a straight-edged garden hoe or any preferred shaped edge, along with a scuffle hoe. The latter is available with 6, 8, 9, and 10-inch blades, costing ninety cents for the 6-inch and $1.00 for the 9-inch size; the 10-inch version works faster. It can easily navigate between rows planted twelve to fifteen inches apart, clearing the entire space between in one go, allowing you to cover ground quickly. While it’s useful for anyone, it’s especially a woman’s tool, as it doesn’t cause the back pain associated with using a traditional garden hoe, where you often have to lean over. If I could only have one tool for gardening, I would choose a scuffle hoe, as no other tool keeps the garden so free of weeds. With a regular garden hoe, my paths through the garden often end up littered with plant remains; despite being careful, I eventually end up hoeing too vigorously and accidentally cut down a cabbage, tomato, or onion. The scuffle hoe doesn’t invite that kind of excess energy; you glide along smoothly and calmly, leaving behind clean, well-prepared rows of vegetables, looking back at the end of each row and seeing that it looks great.

A trowel—or a number of them is better—is a very necessary implement and because one is prone to mislay trowels, or leave one at the hotbed57 when going for plants it is well to have one for each place and either to attach it to a string to one's belt—if only one is possessed, or to attach a bright red cloth to the handle that it may be identified if dropped among weeds, loose earth or grass for the trowel seems to have a chameleon like nature and takes on the color of its surroundings and becomes invisible to the eye once it has left one's hand. The bright color will save many moments wasted time in looking for it and has proved its worth on more than one occasion. In purchasing a trowel selection should be made of the sort that has the blade and handle in one; this construction, if of steel, will insure a tool that will last until worn out by use, the trowel with a wooden handle has usually a flimsy blade and a handle that is not dependable.

A trowel—or better yet, a few—is an essential tool. Since it’s easy to misplace trowels or forget one at the hotbed when grabbing plants, it’s a good idea to have one for each spot. You can either tie it to a string on your belt if you only have one, or attach a bright red cloth to the handle so you can easily spot it if you drop it in weeds, loose soil, or grass. Trowels seem to blend in with their surroundings, making them nearly invisible once you let go of them. A bright color will save you a lot of time searching for it, and it’s proven helpful more than once. When buying a trowel, choose one that has the blade and handle as a single piece; if it’s made of steel, it will last until it’s worn out from use. Trowels with wooden handles usually have weak blades and unreliable handles.

A garden line and reel that may be purchased for $1.75 is a convenient thing to have when laying out lines for planting, but a very good substitute can be produced from an old broom handle and a ball of butcher's twine by sawing the handle into two eighteen inch58 lengths, boring a hole in one end of each piece and sharpening the other end, passing the ends of the cord through the hole and making a knot too large to slip through the hole, makes the line more convenient to handle than if tied around the stick, as it cannot slip in winding, or any ingenious boy with simple tools can copy the regular reel in a short time. A very simple, home made tool for marking rows equal distances apart consists of a straight pole of wood with a cross piece at one end, fifteen, eighteen or twenty-four inches on each end from the center pole and provided with triangular pieces at the ends and in the center for markers, or wooden rake teeth may be set in holes provided for them. This is drawn along the ground and makes one, two or three rows at one operation. The construction of two or three of these markers is a short job and they save a considerable amount of time in laying out the garden. The twenty-four inch marker can also be used for marking the twelve inch rows by adjusting the pegs. The hand cultivators with seeding attachments have also a marker59 which while seeding one row marks out the following one.

A garden line and reel that can be bought for $1.75 is handy for laying out planting lines, but you can easily make a great alternative using an old broom handle and a ball of butcher's twine. Just saw the handle into two eighteen-inch lengths, drill a hole in one end of each piece, and sharpen the other end. Then, thread the ends of the twine through the hole and tie a knot that’s too big to slip through. This method makes the line easier to handle than if it were just tied around the stick because it won’t slip while winding. Any crafty kid with basic tools can also create a regular reel in no time. A simple homemade tool for marking rows at equal distances consists of a straight wooden pole with a cross piece at one end, extending fifteen, eighteen, or twenty-four inches from the center pole. Attach triangular markers at the ends and in the center, or you can use wooden rake teeth fitted into holes made for them. Pull this along the ground to create one, two, or three rows in a single go. Making two or three of these markers is quick work and saves a lot of time when setting up the garden. The twenty-four inch marker can also be used for marking twelve-inch rows by adjusting the pegs. Hand cultivators with seeding attachments also have a marker that marks the next row while seeding the current one.

A watering pot and some kind of spraying apparatus for the use of insecticides will also be needed. A rubber bulb with perforated metal top and bent neck, such as is used for spraying house plants is an excellent thing to use where the use of wood alcohol is indicated. Paris green may be applied from a fine-nosed watering pot if liquid form is used or if a dry application is preferred a common mason quart can with the porcelain lining of the top removed and the latter punched full of holes makes an effective distributor when filled with dry lime or flour and Paris green or hellebore. I have never seen a hand atomizer or spray pump or powder blow gun that was a particle of use; the tyrian sprinklers, however, are practical and useful for spraying in a small way for aphis, red spider and for squash bugs. A knapsack or auto-sprayer with galvanized iron reservoir can be purchased for $6.25, with brass reservoir for $9.50 and is a good investment where there are small fruits—currants,60 gooseberries, and small trees—and is profitable for a neighborhood garden investment if one does not wish to go to the entire expense for a small garden. Something of the kind is indispensable where potatoes are grown, though for a small patch hand picking of bugs is preferable. A garden fork will be needed in the fall when the potatoes, carrots, parsnips and other root vegetables are to be dug and as wide a one as available should be purchased as the more roots one can lift at a time the more quickly the work will progress. A spading fork is very useful in the garden in loosening the earth about plants, planted a considerable distance apart, when heavy rain has beaten the earth down hard and is especially useful for cultivating about berry plants, young fruit trees and grape vines, where the use of a spade would injure the roots of the plant.

A watering can and some type of spray tool for using insecticides will also be necessary. A rubber bulb with a perforated metal top and a curved neck, like what's used for spraying houseplants, works great when you need to use wood alcohol. Paris green can be applied from a fine-nosed watering can if you’re using it in liquid form, or if you prefer a dry application, a regular mason quart can with the porcelain lining from the top removed and holes punched in it makes an effective dispenser when filled with dry lime or flour mixed with Paris green or hellebore. I’ve never found a hand atomizer, spray pump, or powder blow gun to be of any real use; however, Tyrian sprinklers are practical and handy for spraying small areas for aphids, red spider mites, and squash bugs. A knapsack or motorized sprayer with a galvanized iron reservoir can be bought for $6.25, or with a brass reservoir for $9.50, making it a worthwhile investment for those with small fruits—currants, gooseberries, and small trees—and it's beneficial for a community garden if you don’t want to spend too much on a small garden. Something like this is essential if you’re growing potatoes, although for a small patch, handpicking bugs is better. A garden fork will be needed in the fall when it’s time to dig up potatoes, carrots, parsnips, and other root vegetables, and you should get the widest one available since lifting more roots at once speeds up the work. A spading fork is really handy in the garden for loosening the soil around plants that are spaced a good distance apart, especially after heavy rain has compacted the ground, and it’s particularly useful for cultivating around berry plants, young fruit trees, and grapevines, where using a spade could damage the roots.

A manure barrel, while not a tool, is a valuable accessory of the garden and its use will notably increase the yield of certain vegetables. A large lard barrel is a good sort to use and it must be prepared by burning out the lard which will61 likely adhere to it, or it may be washed out with strong soapsuds or lye—a more tedious process. A hole large enough to receive a wooden spigot should be bored a couple of inches above the bottom of the barrel. The barrel should be placed on a firm support—a heavy wooden box answering the purpose, high enough to allow a watering pot to stand beneath the spigot; three or four inches of straw are then placed in the bottom of the barrel for drainage and should come well above the spigot hole; the barrel is then filled full of manure and water turned in until brimming full; a close cover to exclude flies completes the preparation. When the manure liquid is required it is only necessary to place the watering can in position, open the spigot and allow the liquid to run until the can is full. After drawing off a supply of liquid an equal amount of water should be returned to the barrel to keep it always full and ready for use. When first established the liquid will be very strong and it will be best to dilute it, using half water and half liquid, and liquid manure should never be used when the62 ground is dry, but always after a rain or artificial watering.

A manure barrel, while not a tool, is a valuable addition to the garden and using it will significantly boost the yield of certain vegetables. A large lard barrel works well for this, and it needs to be prepared by burning out any lard that might stick to it, or it can be washed out with strong soapy water or lye—a more time-consuming process. You should drill a hole large enough for a wooden spigot a couple of inches above the bottom of the barrel. The barrel should be placed on a sturdy support—a heavy wooden box works well, as long as it's high enough to fit a watering can underneath the spigot; then, three or four inches of straw is added to the bottom of the barrel for drainage, ensuring it covers the spigot hole. Next, fill the barrel completely with manure and pour in water until it’s full. A tight lid is needed to keep out flies to finish the setup. When you need the liquid manure, just position the watering can, open the spigot, and let the liquid flow until the can is full. After drawing some liquid, make sure to add an equal amount of water back to the barrel to keep it full and ready to use. Initially, the liquid will be quite strong, so it's best to dilute it, mixing half water with half liquid manure. Always avoid using liquid manure when the ground is dry; instead, apply it after it has rained or after watering artificially.

A barrel once filled can be used over and over again until the liquid begins to appear pale in color, when the manure should be removed from the barrel and fresh supplied. If there is only a limited demand for this fertilizer, one filling will last out the summer, but where there are a number of uses for it it will need one or more renewals. Any kind of animal manure may be used—that from the horse stable being usually the most available but use may be made of the manure from the cow stable, the sheep pen or the rabbit hutches, but not from the poultry houses as this form is too strong to be used in liquid form, though its use in dry form is excellent for many vegetables.

A barrel that has been filled can be reused repeatedly until the liquid starts to look pale. At that point, the manure should be removed from the barrel and replaced with fresh manure. If there’s only a limited need for this fertilizer, one filling will last through the summer, but if it’s used frequently, it will require one or more refills. You can use any kind of animal manure; horse manure is usually the easiest to find, but you can also use manure from cows, sheep, or rabbits. However, you should avoid using manure from poultry houses, as it's too strong for liquid use, although it works great in dry form for many vegetables.

Tomato supports are among the useful adjuncts of the garden and very good home made ones can be provided by utilizing the wire hoops that come around barrels, stapling them to four stout stakes; by their use a considerably larger63 number of plants can be grown in a given area and the care and gathering of the fruit will be far pleasanter than where the vines are allowed to lie on the ground.

Tomato supports are great additions to the garden, and you can easily make good ones by using the wire hoops that come around barrels and stapling them to four strong stakes. With these, you can grow many more plants in a given space, and taking care of them and harvesting the fruit will be much easier and more enjoyable than if the vines are left to sprawl on the ground.


CHAPTER VI
MAINTAINING AND BOOSTING SOIL FERTILITY

There is no one thing that the gardener so needs to keep always in mind of more importance than that the soil needs additional fertility; it does not matter how good it may have been originally or how good it was last year; this year it must have returned to it the food that was taken from it last year by the crop that was grown upon it. Any soil that is not virgin soil—soil that has never been used, and that sort of soil is not available in towns and villages if, indeed, it is anywhere in an old, settled country like ours—must have returned to it, year after year, an equivalent of the fertility extracted from it in growing the previous season's crop. It may be that the loss of many seasons must be made good, it may be that the soil was originally deficient in many, or only one, of the elements that make fertility;65 probably it will lack that most important element of productive soil—humus. Humus, be it understood, is that element in the soil that causes it to appear dark. What it really consists of is decayed vegetable matter and it is always found forming the top soil of virgin, or uncultivated land. It is present in large amounts in woodlands where the falling leaves and surface growth lie on the ground, year after year, and decay and form what is technically known as leaf mould. We know how admirably it is adapted to the growing of house plants, and its value is often erroneously attributed to the plant food it is supposed to contain, but its great value is not so much in its food content as its influence on the soil with which it is combined; by its presence it makes the soil retentive of moisture and this moisture in turn unlocks the chemical elements of the soil so that they become available for food. Soils that are deficient of humus, though otherwise fertile, dry out so badly in summer that unless artificially watered, they will produce little, and even where a sufficient water supply is available66 the result will fall far short of what would have been produced were the supply of humus sufficient.

There is nothing more important for a gardener to remember than that the soil needs extra nutrients. It doesn’t matter how good it was originally or how good it was last year; this year it has to regain the nutrients that the previous crop took out of it. Any soil that isn't virgin—soil that has never been used, which is hard to find in towns and villages in an old, settled country like ours—needs to have back its nutrients year after year, equal to what was taken out when growing last season's crop. It might take several seasons to restore what’s lost, and it’s possible that the soil was originally lacking in many, or just one, of the elements that promote fertility; 65 it’s likely to be missing the most crucial element of productive soil—humus. Humus, for clarity, is what gives soil its dark appearance. It consists of decayed plant matter and is always found in the top layer of virgin or uncultivated land. It's abundant in woodlands where fallen leaves and surface growth accumulate on the ground year after year, decaying into what’s technically called leaf mold. We know how well-suited it is for growing house plants, and its importance is often wrongly credited to the nutrients it supposedly holds; however, its true value lies more in how it affects the soil it’s mixed with. Its presence helps the soil retain moisture, which in turn releases the chemical elements in the soil, making them available as food. Soils that lack humus, even if they are otherwise fertile, dry out so badly in summer that without artificial watering, they produce little, and even when there's enough water, the yield will be much lower than what could have been achieved if there was enough humus. 66

Fortunately there are ways of restoring the humus to worn out soils and on the small area of the kitchen garden the process presents little if any difficulty. The most readily available source of humus is found in a liberal application of barnyard manure; this for the quickest and most satisfactory results should be well rotted, but not fired or leached—that is, it should have been saved in such a way that the rain has not washed the fertility out of it in the form of liquid manure, or lack of moisture caused it to heat and burn. The most satisfactory method of handling manure is under shelter in a cement bottom pit with a depression or well for the liquid contents to drain into; this is seldom available in the town or city garden, but an enclosed pen for the manure, where it can be kept in a compact pile and where water can be turned on often enough to prevent firing, answers very well; better still is it to draw the manure on the land as it67 is produced; this, too, is seldom practicable in the small garden, but a heavy dressing of manure can always be applied in the fall, spread evenly and allowed to lie and rot over winter and be turned under in the spring while it is wet. The rapidity of decay, and hence the availability of the plant food it contains of any vegetable matter turned under in a garden is greatly increased if it is turned under wet, dry material turned under rots very slowly and may be a detriment rather than a help to the crops that are grown over it that season. If a plant sends its roots down into a mass of dry leaves, straw or other material it has no chance to gain either moisture or nourishment and must exist on what little its surface roots can extract from the top layer of soil.

Fortunately, there are ways to restore humus to depleted soils, and in a small kitchen garden, the process is usually straightforward. The easiest source of humus comes from a generous application of barnyard manure; for the best and quickest results, it should be well-rotted but not overheated or leached—that is, it should be kept in a way that rain hasn’t washed out its nutrients as liquid manure, or that it hasn’t dried out and burned up. The best way to manage manure is in a sheltered, concrete-bottom pit that has a dip or well for the liquid to drain into; this setup is rarely found in town or city gardens. However, an enclosed pen for the manure, where it can be kept in a compact pile and where you can water it often enough to prevent it from overheating, works well. Even better is to apply the manure directly onto the land as it's produced; this is also seldom possible in a small garden, but you can always add a generous layer of manure in the fall, spread it evenly, and let it decompose over the winter to be turned into the soil in the spring while it's still moist. The speed of decay—and thus the availability of the plant nutrients in any vegetable matter buried in the garden—is greatly enhanced if it is turned under when wet. Dry material, when buried, decomposes slowly and can actually hinder rather than help the crops grown above it that season. If a plant's roots penetrate a mass of dry leaves, straw, or other material, it won't be able to find sufficient moisture or nutrients and will have to rely on whatever little its surface roots can draw from the top layer of soil.

In spading manure into a small strip of land or a bed I usually allow at least one large wheelbarrow to a square yard and this proportion should be observed for the whole garden. Practically about twenty tons of manure per acre will be required for good results, market gardeners often use far more, or a large, two horse load68 for a strip of land fifty feet square. If the land is light and sandy the manure should be well rotted but on clay or heavy tenacious soil fresh manure gives better results as it breaks apart the particles of the soil, by the expansion caused by heating, and adds sand, which is also a mechanical disintegrant, permanent in effect.

When spreading manure on a small section of land or a garden bed, I typically use at least one large wheelbarrow per square yard, and this ratio should be maintained throughout the entire garden. Generally, you'll need about twenty tons of manure per acre for good results; market gardeners often apply much more, like a large two-horse load for a section of land fifty feet square. If the soil is light and sandy, the manure should be well-rotted, but for clay or heavy soil, fresh manure works better as it breaks up the soil particles through expansion from heating, and adds sand, which also helps to break things down and has a lasting impact. 68

There is another way in which humus can be immediately supplied and that is by applications of woods earth or marsh earth-muck, directly to the soil. Where a supply of either form of humus is available it pays well to employ it. For a number of years I made a practice of keeping track of available sources of humus, noting as I drove about the country where new land was being broken up and especially where marsh land was being ditched and drained; then in the spring I would engage the owner to haul me as many loads as I required, but as the time passed it became necessary to go farther and farther afield until the cost of hauling became prohibitive.

There’s another way to quickly add humus to the soil, and that’s by using wood soil or marsh muck directly. If you can get either type of humus, it’s worth using. For several years, I kept track of available humus sources while driving around the countryside, especially paying attention to areas where new land was being cleared and where marshland was being drained. Then in the spring, I would ask the landowner to haul as many loads as I needed. However, over time, it became necessary to travel farther and farther for it until the hauling costs became too high.

There has been considerable discussion of late69 in agricultural papers as to the value of raw muck when applied to the land. Muck in its unsubdued state is more of a fuel-peat than a fertilizer; it needs to be subdued by lying out over winter so that the frost may disintegrate it and make it available for plant food, but I have found that it may be made immediately available in its raw state by burying or covering it with a layer of soil to exclude the air and retain moisture; in this form it gradually changes to humus and plants grown in it do exceedingly well. Among interesting experiments conducted to test its use was this conclusive one: deep holes were dug in beds that were to be planted to bedding plants—cannas, salvias and the like; these holes were filled with the raw muck and covered with the soil of the garden and into this the plants were set and the usual culture followed; the results were surprising; salvias, that ordinarily made a growth of about thirty inches reached the astonishing height of nearly five feet and were a mass of blooms; still more astonishing results were discovered in clearing the beds in70 the fall when it was found that the muck had practically disappeared, the plants having literally consumed it. Left on the surface of the soil the muck would have dried into a hard, intractable mass, fit only for fuel.

There has been a lot of recent discussion in agricultural journals about the value of raw muck when applied to the land. Muck in its natural state is more like fuel-peat than fertilizer; it needs to be treated by sitting out over the winter so that the frost can break it down and make it available as plant food. However, I’ve found that it can be made usable right away by burying or covering it with a layer of soil to block the air and keep moisture in. In this condition, it gradually transforms into humus, and plants grown in it thrive. Among the interesting experiments conducted to test its effectiveness was this decisive one: deep holes were dug in beds that were meant to be planted with bedding plants—cannas, salvias, and the like. These holes were filled with raw muck and covered with garden soil, and the plants were then planted into this mix, following usual care practices. The results were surprising; salvias that usually grow to about thirty inches reached an incredible height of nearly five feet and were covered in blooms. Even more astonishing results were revealed when clearing the beds in the fall, as it was found that the muck had nearly vanished, with the plants having essentially absorbed it. If left on the surface of the soil, the muck would have dried out into a hard, unmanageable mass, only suitable for fuel.

If one had a supply of raw muck available and wished to apply it to the garden it could be handled by following the plough and shovelling the muck into the open furrow; the next furrow turned would cover it. It would be of much benefit and would be turned to the surface again in the following spring ploughing. This should not be expected to take the place of barnyard manure, as it would lack some elements contained in that but it could be combined with such commercial fertilizers as the condition of the soil might suggest—lime, for instance, might be indicated by the sourness of the soil. If sorrel is plentiful on the ground it is a pretty good indication that lime is in order, but one need not depend upon its presence for data as these may be quickly attained by the use of blue litmus paper which may be obtained of any druggist. Its use is simple; if the soil is very wet, simply pressing a strip71 of litmus paper down into it and examining it in an hour's time will indicate, according as it retains its color or turns pink—the acid reaction—the presence of acidity in the soil, or a cupful of the soil may be mixed with water to a thin paste and the paper inserted with the same diagnosis.

If you have some raw muck available and want to use it in the garden, you can do so by following the plow and shoveling the muck into the open furrow; the next furrow turned will cover it. This will be very beneficial and will bring it back to the surface during spring plowing. However, it shouldn't be expected to replace barnyard manure since it lacks some nutrients found in that, but it can be mixed with commercial fertilizers as needed based on the soil condition—like lime, for example, if the soil seems sour. If you see a lot of sorrel growing, it usually means lime is needed, but you don't have to rely solely on that clue. You can quickly check the soil’s acidity with blue litmus paper, which you can get from any drugstore. It’s easy to use; if the soil is very wet, just press a strip of litmus paper into it and check back in an hour. If it keeps its color, the soil is neutral; if it turns pink, it indicates acidity. Alternatively, you can mix a cup of soil with water to make a thin paste and dip the paper in it for the same test.

Lime is more in the form of a stimulant or indirect fertilizer than a real plant-food; it is in a medical sense an alterative, changing the nature of the soil. It not only sweetens, but mechanically, it binds loose soil, but flocculates or opens up tenacious clayey soils, affording freer passage of air and water and lessening the tendency to wash. It should be applied, on light, sandy soils at the rate of about five hundred pounds per acre or twenty-five pounds to every fifty square feet of garden plot; ten times this amount can be used on a heavy clay soil, but liming of the soil is not necessary every year, about once in five being desirable, so that considered as an expense it is nearly negligible. Slaked lime is best, and wood ashes, which contain about thirty-four per cent. of lime, are valuable aids in building up the fertility of the soil. They should not, however, be72 mixed with the manure or applied at the same time as they tend to release the ammonia contained in the manure and as ammonia spells nitrate—the most costly of all our commercial fertilizers—the ashes should rather be broadcasted over the ground after the manure is turned in and then mixed with the soil by dragging and harrowing.

Lime acts more as a stimulant or indirect fertilizer than a true plant food; in a medical sense, it’s an alterative that changes the soil's properties. It not only sweetens the soil but also binds loose soil together, and helps to break up hard, clayey soils, allowing air and water to pass through more easily and reducing the risk of washing away. It should be applied to light, sandy soils at about five hundred pounds per acre or twenty-five pounds for every fifty square feet of garden space. You can use up to ten times that amount on heavy clay soils, but you don’t need to lime the soil every year; doing it about once every five years is ideal, so it’s a fairly minor expense. Slaked lime is the best option, and wood ashes, which contain about thirty-four percent lime, are helpful in improving soil fertility. However, they shouldn't be mixed with manure or applied at the same time, as they can release the ammonia in the manure, and since ammonia converts to nitrate—the most expensive type of commercial fertilizer—it’s better to spread the ashes over the ground after the manure has been mixed in, and then work them into the soil using dragging and harrowing.

There are fourteen different chemical elements that are necessary for plant growth—carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulphur, chlorine, silicon, calcium, iron, potassium, sodium, magnesium and manganese; the first four are derived directly or indirectly from the air, the remainder from the soil. Virgin soil contains all these soil-derived elements in available form and in sufficient quantities for plant growth, and it has the power to absorb the elements which are derived from the air, but our short sighted methods of soil cultivation, or robbery, deplete the soil of some of its elements faster than it can convert them into available food for the plants. Liberal applications of manure replace the loss more quickly and economically than any other73 treatment and if this is supplemented with such chemical elements as the soil may seem to be particularly in need of the fertility of the soil will be assured.

There are fourteen essential chemical elements for plant growth—carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, sulfur, chlorine, silicon, calcium, iron, potassium, sodium, magnesium, and manganese. The first four come directly or indirectly from the air, while the others come from the soil. Untouched soil contains all these elements in usable forms and in enough amounts for plant growth, and it can absorb the air-derived elements. However, our short-sighted farming practices deplete the soil of some elements faster than it can replenish them as food for the plants. Generous applications of manure can quickly and cost-effectively replace this loss more than any other treatment. If this is combined with the necessary chemical elements that the soil might lack, the soil’s fertility will be secured.73

The most economical and practical treatment of the soil would be through the analysis of the soil by a soil chemist; this can readily be done by sending a sample of the soil to your state agricultural college which will analyze and advise as to its requirements, or a sample can be given to your county agent who will attend to it and advise you. In this way one works intelligently and wastes neither time nor money in experiments with no definite aim.

The most cost-effective and practical way to treat the soil is by having a soil chemist analyze it. You can easily do this by sending a soil sample to your state agricultural college, which will analyze it and give you advice on what it needs. Alternatively, you can give a sample to your county agent, who will handle it and provide guidance. This approach allows you to work intelligently and avoid wasting time and money on aimless experiments.

Not all of the fourteen different chemical elements required for plant food need to be artificially supplied; there are but three important elements which we need to consider in this connection—nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash and only one of these may be lacking; a soil analysis will indicate which one. Nitrogen is the most expensive of the three; it is available, commercially, in three forms—organic nitrogen, ammonia and nitrates. The organic nitrogen is74 commonly and most economically derived from tankage and dried blood—by-products of slaughter-houses—dried fish, and refuse from fish canneries and cottonseed meal; they contain, approximately—in dried blood, ten to fifteen per cent.; tankage, seven to nine; dried fish, seven to eight; cottonseed meal, six to seven per cent. These decay rapidly when added to the soil and are particularly valuable when applied to light soils, where nitrates or ammonia leach too rapidly and should not be applied until the crops are up and growing. They make available during their processes of fermentation the phosphoric acid and potash already present in the soil. Sulphate of ammonia, containing about twenty per cent. of nitrogen is a valuable chemical form in which to secure nitrogen as it does not leach from the soil as nitrate of soda does and so can be made available by the plant without loss.

Not all fourteen different chemical elements needed for plant nutrition have to be artificially added; we mainly need to focus on three important elements—nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash—and usually only one of these might be missing; a soil analysis will show which one it is. Nitrogen is the most costly of the three and is available commercially in three forms—organic nitrogen, ammonia, and nitrates. Organic nitrogen is74 primarily and most affordably sourced from tankage, dried blood (by-products of slaughterhouses), dried fish, leftover materials from fish canneries, and cottonseed meal. They contain roughly—dried blood, ten to fifteen percent; tankage, seven to nine percent; dried fish, seven to eight percent; and cottonseed meal, six to seven percent. These materials break down quickly when added to the soil and are especially useful when applied to light soils, where nitrates or ammonia can wash away too quickly and should not be added until the crops are established and growing. During their decay process, they also release the phosphoric acid and potash that are already in the soil. Sulphate of ammonia, which has about twenty percent nitrogen, is a valuable chemical form for obtaining nitrogen since it doesn’t wash away from the soil like nitrate of soda does, allowing plants to access it without waste.

Phosphoric acid is found commercially in the form of superphosphates; these come from phosphate rocks and are first ground, then treated with sulphuric acid. Bone is rich in phosphoric acid and is a very excellent form in which to supply75 this element to the garden, as it is obtained in several forms—raw bone, coarsely ground, fine ground and bone meal. One may by applying two or more grades secure the fertility of the garden for several years as raw bone decays slowly and will give results for a period of four years while bone meal is immediately available. Potash is most economically supplied by applications of wood ashes. But it must be borne in mind that the use of commercial fertilizers is not intended to replace that of barnyard manure, but rather to supplement it until the soil has regained what it has lost by poor management. Commercial fertilizers will of themselves produce a crop, but it is at the expense of the after-fertility of the land, just as the application of the whip will spur a jaded horse to one more final effort. Liberal applications of manure, leaf mould or muck and bone meal will bring any land that has soil at all, up to a satisfactory condition of fertility in a very few years.

Phosphoric acid is commonly found in the form of superphosphates, which are made from phosphate rocks that are first ground and then treated with sulfuric acid. Bone, which is high in phosphoric acid, is an excellent way to provide this element to the garden. It comes in several forms: raw bone, coarsely ground, finely ground, and bone meal. By using two or more types, you can ensure the fertility of the garden for several years since raw bone breaks down slowly and can benefit the soil for up to four years, while bone meal is readily available. The most cost-effective way to supply potash is through wood ashes. However, it's important to remember that commercial fertilizers are not meant to replace barnyard manure but to supplement it until the soil recovers from mismanagement. While commercial fertilizers can yield a crop, they do so at the cost of the land's future fertility, similar to how a whip can push a tired horse for one last effort. Generous applications of manure, leaf mold, muck, and bone meal can restore any land with soil to a good level of fertility in just a few years.

Nor is it necessary to go far afield for the humus for so small a piece of land as a kitchen garden for the material for the finest kind of76 mould lies right at hand in every bit of outdoors. What nature does in a field and woods she will do in one's dooryard if one will only watch her methods and co-operate with her. In the woods, for instance, she shakes down the ripe leaves from the trees, cuts with frost and age the undergrowth and sends the wind to drift them into piles where she waters and compacts them until in process of time they lose their identity as leaves and plants and become a fine, black mould, fine and warm to the touch and blended with a clean, sharp, white sand, or silicate. To imitate her methods successfully we have only to collect the dead leaves in the fall instead of wastefully burning them, pile them in a heap in some convenient place; surround them with a frame to keep them from being distributed about the premises by fowls or wind and to the nucleus thus formed add any waste matter—animal or vegetable—that will decay, about the place—the weeds from the garden, the wastings from the house and laundry. It is amazing, once one has started to conserve fertility, how much one can find to add to this compost heap; I recall that one spring,77 from a well-tended compost heap and one horse stable, I had hauled on to the garden ten large, two-horse loads of fertilizer, and put the garden in excellent shape, and not only this,—it had kept the premises tidy as nothing else would have done. The gatherings of the summer and fall will, by spring, have rotted down into available form and the action of the soil, sun and rain will complete the process.

You don’t need to look far for the right compost for a small space like a kitchen garden since the best kind of soil can be found right outside your door. Nature does what she can in fields and woods, and she will do the same in your yard if you observe her techniques and work with her. For example, in the woods, she drops ripe leaves from the trees, uses frost and time to break down the underbrush, and lets the wind gather them into piles. She then waters and compacts them until they eventually lose their form as leaves and plants and transform into rich, dark soil, fine and warm to the touch, mixed with clean, sharp white sand or silicate. To successfully mimic her methods, all we need to do is collect dead leaves in the fall instead of burning them, pile them in a convenient spot, and surround the heap with a frame to prevent chickens or the wind from scattering them. To this pile, we can add any waste materials—animal or vegetable—that will decompose, such as weeds from the garden or scraps from the kitchen and laundry. It’s surprising how much you can find to contribute to this compost heap once you start to focus on conserving fertility. I remember one spring, from a well-maintained compost heap and one horse stable, I was able to bring ten large loads of fertilizer to the garden, making it look fantastic. Plus, it helped keep the area looking neat better than anything else would. The materials gathered during the summer and fall will break down into usable form by spring, and the work of the soil, sun, and rain will finish the job.

The growing of pet stock on a place adds so greatly to the upkeep of the land that it constitutes an object in itself. Poultry is an abundant source of manure which may be composted in barrels with alternate layers of soil, of lime or of any absorbent material or may be piled on the compost heap and mixed with the vegetable matter. To this will be added the litter from the hen house floors which is rich in droppings and full of earth and ground up leaves and straw. But another source of manure, not enough considered, is found in the droppings from the rabbit hutches. If one raises Belgian hares, as every one who wishes to conserve meat, should, one will find that, in addition to a supply of delicious78 meat, one has also produced a valuable garden asset in the form of a highly concentrated manure; one will also find that one has practically done away with all waste from the garden as the hares will have consumed all the unusable parts of the vegetables—all such early things that run to seed, as lettuce, endive, swiss chard and the like. A large part of the weeds incident to a garden will also be consumed if pulled and offered them, thus minimizing the weed growth for the coming year, as every weed consumed means just so many less to appear the following year. It will be many years before the lesson of the home garden so insistently brought before us by the war will be lost, but we shall not have gained the full measure of its lesson if we do not realize that the critical shortage of meat is not up to the farmer and stockman altogether, but is a matter for each individual householder to adjust by producing, as far as his environment will permit, his own meat supply, by raising chickens and hares if only room for small stock is available, and pork if it is possible to find room and feed for a pig—and a pig does not require79 a great amount of room—a six by eight pen will do and a paddock, with grass and fresh water, which need not be more than two rods square, and reasonable attention to sanitation will render him a contented and unobjectionable member of the family and a very savory and profitable member, too, come butchering time. These three things should go hand in hand;—A garden to produce vegetables for the family; live stock to consume the waste from the garden and live stock to furnish fertility for the garden; these three spell fertility for the soil and prosperity for the family.

Keeping pets on a property greatly contributes to its maintenance, making it valuable in its own right. Poultry provides a plentiful source of manure that can be composted in barrels with alternating layers of soil, lime, or other absorbent materials, or it can be piled on a compost heap mixed with plant scraps. Additionally, the litter from the hen house, rich in droppings and filled with soil, chopped leaves, and straw, adds to this. Another often-overlooked source of manure comes from rabbit hutches. If you raise Belgian hares, which everyone interested in sustainable meat production should consider, you'll find that, alongside a supply of delicious meat, you also create a valuable garden resource in the form of concentrated manure. Furthermore, you'll nearly eliminate waste from the garden, as hares will eat the unusable parts of the vegetables—like early lettuces, endives, Swiss chard, and similar greens. A significant portion of garden weeds will also be consumed if you pull them and offer them to the hares, reducing future weed growth since each weed they eat means fewer to contend with next year. The lessons of home gardening that the war has urged upon us won't fade anytime soon, but we won't fully learn from them unless we understand that the critical shortage of meat doesn't solely fall on farmers and livestock producers; it’s also an issue for every individual household to manage by producing their own meat supply as much as their situation allows—raising chickens and hares if only limited space is available, and possibly even a pig, which doesn’t require much space—just a six-by-eight enclosure and a small paddock with grass and clean water will suffice. With reasonable attention to cleanliness, a pig can become a content, non-troublesome family member and a delicious, profitable addition come butchering time. These three elements should work together: a garden to grow food for the family, livestock to consume garden waste, and livestock to provide nutrients for the garden. Together, they promote soil fertility and contribute to the family’s prosperity.

Where the supply of manure is limited so that the entire garden area cannot be covered, quite as good returns may be secured by following the plough with a load of any manure available, and dropping it in the furrow that will correspond with the planting row—if for corn, every three feet of furrows, setting stakes to indicate the fertilised strips. In a small garden fertiliser may be trundled along in a wheelbarrow and shovelled in with fork or spade. This is an excellent plan in preparing ground for peas.

Where the supply of manure is limited, making it impossible to cover the entire garden area, you can still achieve good results by following the plow with whatever manure you have and dropping it into the furrow that aligns with the planting row. For corn, this would be every three feet of furrows, and you should set stakes to mark the fertilized strips. In a small garden, you can wheel the fertilizer along in a wheelbarrow and use a shovel or spade to spread it. This method works great for preparing the ground for peas.


CHAPTER VII
ASPARAGUS

Is one of the garden assets. Once established an asparagus bed is good for a lifetime, almost; certainly it is a permanent feature of the garden, showing little if any deterioration if well cared for and kept free from weeds.

Is one of the garden assets. Once established, an asparagus bed lasts a lifetime, almost; it’s definitely a permanent part of the garden, showing little to no deterioration if well cared for and kept free from weeds.

The starting of an asparagus bed is not the serious undertaking it was a few years ago, as the deep planting then thought so necessary is seldom practised now; instead it is thought sufficient to open a furrow—with the plough, if the planting is large, with the spade, if small—set the plants and fill enough earth to cover the crown of the plant, and, as growth starts, to gradually fill up the furrow until the ground is level. The ground should be of the best and heavily fertilised before planting, for asparagus is a gross81 feeder and an additional application of coarse ground bone in each hill is well worth while as it furnishes food for two or three years independently of such annual dressing as the bed may receive.

Starting an asparagus bed isn't the big deal it used to be a few years back. The deep planting that was once considered essential isn't commonly done anymore. Now, it's enough to open a furrow—using a plow for larger plantings or a spade for smaller ones—place the plants in and cover the crowns with enough soil. As the plants grow, you gradually fill in the furrow until the ground is level. The soil should be top-notch and heavily fertilized before planting because asparagus is a heavy feeder. Adding coarse ground bone to each hill is a good idea since it provides nutrients for two or three years, in addition to the annual fertilizing the bed will receive.

For garden culture where hand cultivation is to be practised, the plants may be set in hills two or three feet apart each way, leaving room to cultivate between each way for the first few years. Two year old roots are the best to use and in planting a little mound of earth should be made in each hill, the roots of the plant spread out around this so that the earth will fit in beneath, close to the under side of the crown, then the earth should be firmed about the roots, a handful of bone meal sprinkled over the soil and the remainder of the soil filled in. Asparagus beds may be set in spring or fall; good results follow either setting. The asparagus bed must be kept free of weeds and grass from the start as once allowed to become infested with foul seed and grass it is a very discouraging proposition. One of the worst weeds to combat is the young82 asparagus plants which come up every year from self-sown seed; to avoid this the tops should be cut, as soon as the berries are red, and burned. If the tops are burned on the bed the resulting ashes will be of benefit. It has been my observation for many years that the spots where the tops were burned always gave finer stalks than the rest of the bed; this suggests the application of wood ashes as a top dressing after the dressing of manure, which should be applied every spring, has been worked into the soil. A heavy covering of barnyard manure may be applied in the fall and spaded under in the spring, or it may be applied in February; if this is not feasible it is an excellent plan to spade into the space between the hills any available manure—poultry, rabbit or sheep or stable manure that is well rotted. The space between the rows, or paths, should not be broken up when this is done as, if unbroken and hard, it is easier to keep the beds clean and an application of some good herbicide may even be used to keep down weeds here. When the bed has been thoroughly spaded and83 enriched in this way in the early part of the season I have found the after care of the bed very much more successful than when all over culture was attempted.

For garden culture where hand cultivation will be practiced, the plants can be spaced two or three feet apart in each direction, leaving room to cultivate between them for the first few years. Two-year-old roots are the best to use. When planting, create a small mound of earth in each spot, spreading the roots of the plant around it so the soil fits underneath, close to the bottom of the crown. Then, firm the soil around the roots, sprinkle a handful of bone meal over it, and fill in the remaining soil. Asparagus beds can be established in spring or fall, with good results from either timing. The asparagus bed must be kept free of weeds and grass from the beginning; once it becomes infested with unwanted seeds and grass, it can be very discouraging. One of the toughest weeds to deal with is the young asparagus plants that sprout from self-sown seeds every year; to prevent this, cut the tops as soon as the berries turn red and burn them. Burning the tops on the bed will benefit the soil with the resulting ashes. Over many years, I’ve noticed that areas where the tops were burned consistently produced finer stalks than the rest of the bed, suggesting that wood ashes could be used as a top dressing after the manure is worked into the soil each spring. A generous layer of barnyard manure can be applied in the fall and tilled under in the spring or applied in February. If that’s not possible, it’s a great idea to work any available manure—like poultry, rabbit, sheep, or well-rotted stable manure—into the space between the hills. The paths should remain undisturbed, as keeping them hard makes it easier to maintain clean beds, and applying a good herbicide can help control weeds there. When the bed has been fully turned and enriched this way early in the season, I've found that aftercare is much more successful compared to trying to cultivate the entire area.

The variety to plant is largely a matter of taste—some prefer the green, some the white grasses. Lately a preference is being shown for the green. These will always be preferred by those who like a tender asparagus. The white sorts—Bonvilete and Argenteuile—are unbelievably tough as they appear in the market though beautifully white and of mammoth proportions that make them very attractive; possibly if cut, as the green grasses are, just below the level of the ground they would prove more edible. All asparagus is tough below the ground, green as well as white, and, for this reason, should not be cut much lower than the surface.

The choice of what to plant mostly comes down to personal preference—some people like green asparagus, while others prefer white. Recently, there’s been a growing preference for green. Green asparagus will always be favored by those who enjoy a tender texture. The white varieties—Bonvilete and Argenteuile—are incredibly tough when they hit the market, even though they look stunningly white and are impressively large, making them very appealing; possibly if they were cut just below the ground level like the green ones, they might be more palatable. All asparagus is tough below the surface, both green and white, so it shouldn't be cut too far below the soil.

Of the green grasses Conover's Colossal and Dreer's Eclipse are excellent sorts, and Columbian Mammoth White is a white variety that is good.

Of the green grasses, Conover's Colossal and Dreer's Eclipse are excellent types, and Columbian Mammoth White is a good white variety.

If one wishes young plants for setting one can84 obtain them very easily by cutting the tops of asparagus when the berries are nearly ripe and piling them in some convenient place where the ground is mellow and free from weeds and grass and leaving them undisturbed for a year; the seeds will germinate and produce a large quantity of thrifty young plants that later may be taken up and set where desired, and all without any care or labor further than the cutting of the tops.

If you want young plants for planting, you can84 easily get them by cutting the tops off asparagus when the berries are almost ripe and stacking them in a convenient spot where the soil is soft and free from weeds and grass. Just leave them undisturbed for a year; the seeds will sprout and produce a lot of healthy young plants that you can later dig up and plant where you want, all with minimal effort—just the initial cutting of the tops.

One may begin cutting the asparagus when the bed is two years old, though small stalks will be produced at that age. Cutting at this age should not extend over a period of two weeks and in an established bed should be limited to four. All small stalks should be cut and not allowed to grow during the cutting period as they would exhaust the plant if allowed to grow, but when the cutting period is over they should, of course, be allowed to grow.

One can start harvesting the asparagus when the bed is two years old, although the stalks will be small at that age. Harvesting during this time should not last more than two weeks and should be limited to four weeks in a well-established bed. All small stalks should be cut and not allowed to grow during the harvesting period, as they could deplete the plant if left to grow, but once the harvesting period is over, they should be allowed to grow.

Salt was formerly considered essential to successful asparagus culture and certainly does no harm, but its chief value is in keeping down weeds and this can be quite as successfully done by85 hand cultivation; this is better than to form the habit of depending on some quick, laborless road to clean beds—in the annals of gardening "There ain't no such animule."

Salt used to be seen as crucial for growing asparagus, and while it doesn't cause any harm, its main benefit is reducing weeds. This can be just as effectively achieved through manual weeding; relying on some easy, effortless method to keep the beds clean isn't a good habit to develop—in gardening, "There ain't no such thing."


CHAPTER VIII
Spring Veggies

May be classified under two heads: those that remain in the ground over winter and are ready for use as soon as the frost is out of the ground and those vegetables that, owing to the short time required to bring to maturity, are first available from the present year's planting; among the first may be cited such forms as asparagus, parsnips, salsify, parsley, kale, onions and a few others.

May can be divided into two categories: those that stay in the ground during winter and are ready to use as soon as the frost has melted, and those vegetables that, because they take a short time to grow, are available from this year's planting. Some examples of the first category include asparagus, parsnips, salsify, parsley, kale, onions, and a few others.

The latter class include such vegetables as beets, lettuce, radishes, endive and early peas, all of which may be planted as soon as the ground can be worked in spring, but for very earliest results use should be made of the hotbed, sowing the seed in February or March according to the latitude and transplanting as soon as the ground can be worked in spring. By doing this from three to six weeks' time may be gained. At the same87 time that plants from the hotbeds are transplanted seed may be sown in the open ground in adjoining rows or as a continuation of a short row of transplants, to come into use about the time the first planting is exhausted; in this way a succession may be maintained and the ground made to produce a more profitable amount of vegetables as seed may be sown where the transplanted vegetables were grown as soon as they are removed.

The latter group includes vegetables like beets, lettuce, radishes, endive, and early peas, all of which can be planted as soon as the ground is workable in spring. However, for the earliest results, it's best to use a hotbed, sowing the seeds in February or March, depending on your location, and transplanting them as soon as the ground is ready in spring. This can save you three to six weeks. At the same time the hotbed plants are being transplanted, you can sow seeds in the open ground in nearby rows or extend a short row of transplants, so they’re ready around the time the first crop is finished. This way, you can keep a continuous harvest and make the most of your garden space, as you can sow seeds where the transplanted vegetables were removed right after they're taken out.

BEETS

Beets

Which may be planted in open ground as soon as it can be worked in spring, do best on a fibrous loamy soil, but any good, warm, rich loam will grow them satisfactorily; the cleaner the ground and the more thorough the cultivation, however, the more uniform the crop which will be produced. Sow the seed in drills fifteen to twenty inches apart and about ½ inch deep, covering and tramping down the rows. It is customary to sow the seed rather freely when sown by hand, but if the seed is good rather better results follow88 sowing with a seeder, owing to the more even distribution and the lessened amount of thinning required; if vegetables of this class did not need thinning their cultivation would be robbed of its chief burden; unfortunately they do need it and quite drastic thinning at that; thinning should commence as soon as the beets are large enough to handle, leaving them standing about one inch apart. In about two weeks another thinning may be given. By this time the young beets will be large enough for greens and they may be thinned to stand two inches apart in the row; a third thinning will be final and should leave about four inches between the beets; this will allow room for full maturity and perfectly formed roots. Beets are at their best when about an inch to an inch and a quarter in diameter and this is the size which is utilized for canning; when used of this size about an inch of the top may be left on and they are served whole, dressed with butter and seasoning.

Which can be planted in open ground as soon as it's workable in spring, grow best in fibrous loamy soil, but any decent, warm, rich loam will work fine; the cleaner the ground and the more thorough the cultivation, the more uniform the crop will be. Sow the seeds in rows fifteen to twenty inches apart and about ½ inch deep, covering and pressing down the rows. It’s common to sow the seeds fairly generously by hand, but if the seeds are good, you’ll get better results by using a seeder, thanks to more even distribution and less thinning needed; if vegetables of this type didn’t require thinning, their cultivation would lose its main challenge. Unfortunately, they do need it, and quite significantly; thinning should start as soon as the beets are big enough to handle, leaving them about one inch apart. After about two weeks, you can thin them again. By this time, the young beets will be big enough for greens, and they can be spaced two inches apart in the row; a final thinning should leave about four inches between the beets; this gives them room to fully mature and develop perfectly shaped roots. Beets are best when they’re about an inch to an inch and a quarter in diameter, which is the size used for canning; when prepared at this size, leave about an inch of the top on, and they are served whole, garnished with butter and seasoning.

The old Egyptian beet has long been acknowledged as standard, but Crosby's Egyptian is a89 distinct improvement upon the old form. It is earlier, the color fine and the quality very sweet and tender. Early Model beet is a new comer with an excellent reputation and both are good selections for the home or the market garden.

The old Egyptian beet has long been recognized as the standard, but Crosby's Egyptian is a89 clear upgrade from the original. It's earlier, the color is nice, and the quality is very sweet and tender. Early Model beet is a newcomer with an excellent reputation, and both are great choices for your home or market garden.

In sowing in the hotbed it is not necessary to cover more than a fourth of an inch; scatter the seed thinly and transplant in about three to four weeks from the sowing of the seed, or when the plants and weather make the successful planting most assured; set the plants about an inch to an inch and a quarter apart and in using remove every other one; this leaves abundant room for them to develop and makes cultivating and freedom from weeds more assured.

When planting in a hotbed, you don't need to cover the seeds with more than a quarter of an inch of soil. Scatter the seeds thinly and plan to transplant them about three to four weeks after sowing, or when the plants and weather conditions are favorable for successful planting. Space the plants about one to one and a quarter inches apart, and when using them, remove every other plant. This gives them plenty of room to grow and makes it easier to cultivate and keep weeds under control.

A light application of nitrate of soda will work wonders in growing early beets; scatter the nitrate thinly along the rows and cultivate in, or the nitrate may be dissolved in water and applied from a watering can, care being taken to apply to the soil only and not to the plants. A handful of nitrate, about the usual quantity applied to a two-gallon watering-pot of water, will be90 sufficient, or a hundred pounds to the acre—this would amount to about twenty-five pounds to the ordinary garden.

A light application of sodium nitrate will do wonders for growing early beets. Spread the nitrate thinly along the rows and mix it into the soil, or you can dissolve the nitrate in water and apply it using a watering can, making sure to only apply it to the soil and not the plants. A handful of nitrate, which is the usual amount for a two-gallon watering can, will be90 enough, or about a hundred pounds per acre—this would be roughly twenty-five pounds for an average garden.

Beets may be sown for succession up to the middle of July and will mature a crop for winter use. Late sown beets are less care to cultivate owing to the fact that the season's crop of weeds is by that time pretty well under control.

Beets can be planted in succession until mid-July and will produce a crop for winter use. Beets sown later require less maintenance due to the fact that the season's weeds are mostly under control by that time.

SWISS CHARD

Swiss chard

Has been for several years much exploited by seedsmen as the one indispensable vegetable for the city garden. It is no doubt a dependable source of greens, making a rapid growth of succulent leaves and is one of the showy, effective things in the garden that gives an air of abundance and successful gardening unsurpassed by any other vegetable, but, in my opinion, its merit ends right there and if it were not for its value in furnishing green food in the greatest quantity in the least time I should not give it space in the garden; the midrib, so much recommended for cooking like asparagus, has an unpleasant, earthy91 taste that, to me at least, is very disagreeable.

Has been for several years heavily promoted by seed sellers as the one essential vegetable for urban gardens. It’s definitely a reliable source of greens, quickly growing lush leaves and is one of the most eye-catching and effective plants in the garden that creates a sense of abundance and successful gardening unmatched by any other vegetable. However, in my opinion, its value stops there, and if it weren’t for its ability to provide a large amount of green food in a short time, I wouldn’t bother to include it in the garden. The midrib, which is often praised for cooking like asparagus, has an unpleasant, earthy taste that, at least for me, is quite unappealing.91

Its culture, however, is so easy that it is worth while for any one who likes it to grow it. It can be planted in the open ground as soon as the ground can be worked in the spring, or sown in the hotbed and transplanted, thus gaining three weeks or more; sow in drill, scattering the seed thinly and thin out the plants to stand six inches apart in the rows. A light dressing of nitrate of soda will hasten the growth and render the leaves more tender and succulent. This plant does not need to have successive sowings made as by cutting down to the ground it will make a new growth, and the outside leaves may be gathered, the same as is done with spinach, and so produce a continuous growth of tender, crisp leaves.

Its culture is so simple that anyone who enjoys it should try to grow it. You can plant it directly in the ground as soon as it can be worked in the spring, or start it in a hotbed and then transplant it, giving you a head start of three weeks or more. Sow in rows, scattering the seeds thinly, and thin out the plants to be about six inches apart in the rows. A light application of nitrate of soda will speed up growth and make the leaves more tender and juicy. This plant doesn't require successive sowings because if you cut it back to the ground, it will regrow. You can harvest the outer leaves, just like you do with spinach, allowing for a continuous supply of tender, crisp leaves.

There are two varieties of the chard, the Giant Lucullus and the Silver Beet; the latter variety being more delicate in flavor, having less of the earthy taste. A novel variety—a cross between the Swiss Chard and the table beet—is now offered by Luther Burbank which combines with92 the usual chard qualities, much beauty of foliage, the leaves being gorgeous in pink, yellow, green and white and it would certainly add to the joy of gardening to have so beautiful a thing to tend, for this reason and because the bunnies must have food, I am growing it in my garden this year.

There are two types of chard: the Giant Lucullus and the Silver Beet. The Silver Beet is more delicate in flavor and has a milder taste. A new variety—a cross between Swiss Chard and table beet—has been introduced by Luther Burbank. This variety offers all the usual chard qualities along with stunning foliage, featuring gorgeous leaves in pink, yellow, green, and white. It would definitely enhance the joy of gardening to tend to such a beautiful plant. Plus, since the bunnies need food, I’m growing it in my garden this year.

CHINESE CABBAGE

Napa cabbage

Though not a spring vegetable it is so similar in some respects to Swiss Chard that it may well be a companion vegetable. It much resembles the Romaine or Coss lettuce in its lush, upright leaves. It should not, however, be planted until about the first of July as early plantings run quickly to seed and do not develop the fine big leaves of the type. It may be planted in short rows and transplanted to about nine inches apart when large enough to handle. Nitrate is again indicated for this quick-growing, succulent plant and as soon as the leaves have attained considerable size they should be confined by tying with bast or strips of soft cloth, to prevent their falling93 apart rather than to blanch them. The outer leaves may be gathered as they mature, leaving the inner leaves to grow and be gathered later. It is eaten raw or cooked like cabbage, being more delicate in flavor and without the objectionable cabbage odor when cooking. The large, fleshy midribs, stripped off the leaf, may be eaten raw with salt like celery or cooked like asparagus. When tied up the plant much resembles a very large, handsome stalk of celery, but with big, broad leaves instead of the feathery fronds of the latter plant.

Though it's not a spring vegetable, it's so similar in some ways to Swiss Chard that it could definitely be considered a companion vegetable. It closely resembles Romaine or Coss lettuce with its lush, upright leaves. However, it should only be planted around the beginning of July, as earlier plantings tend to flower quickly and won’t develop the large, fine leaves we want. It can be planted in short rows and transplanted around nine inches apart when it’s big enough to handle. Nitrate is again recommended for this quick-growing, juicy plant, and once the leaves have grown significantly, they should be tied with bast or soft cloth strips to prevent them from falling apart instead of to blanch them. The outer leaves can be picked as they mature, allowing the inner leaves to grow and be harvested later. It can be eaten raw or cooked like cabbage, having a more delicate flavor and lacking the unpleasant cabbage smell when cooked. The large, fleshy midribs can be eaten raw with salt like celery or cooked like asparagus. When tied up, the plant resembles a very large, attractive stalk of celery, but with big, broad leaves instead of the feathery fronds typical of celery. 93

ENDIVE

Endive

Classes with the foregoing vegetables, requiring practically the same treatment. It should be started in the hotbed for early use, transplanting to the open ground when the weather is favorable. As it does not make very rapid growth at first it may as well remain under the favorable guardianship of the warm hotbed until the middle of May, when it should be transplanted in rows, setting the plants six inches or94 more apart. When the plants are about two-thirds grown they must be drawn together and tied for blanching, without which they are unfit to use; this must be done when the plants are perfectly dry—in the middle of a bright, sunny forenoon, being the best time for the work, otherwise they will rot as they are very sensitive to moisture and prone to decay—as a Japanese friend said of chrysanthemum seed;—"They are very corruptible."

Classes with the mentioned vegetables require basically the same care. Start them in a hotbed for early use, and then transplant them to open ground when the weather is good. Since they don’t grow very quickly at first, it’s best to keep them in the warm hotbed until mid-May, when you should transplant them in rows, spacing the plants six inches apart or more. When the plants are about two-thirds grown, you need to gather them together and tie them up for blanching; without this, they aren’t suitable for use. This should be done when the plants are completely dry—in the middle of a bright, sunny morning, which is the best time for the task; otherwise, they can rot since they are very sensitive to moisture and prone to decay—as a Japanese friend referred to chrysanthemum seeds; "They are very corruptible."

They are a most acceptable addition to salads and combine acceptably with lettuce having a tangy bitterness very piquant, but it is as a garnish that they excel; the fringed and curled fronds, pure white or tinged with green in the less well-blanched specimens, are beautiful indeed and they may well be grown for this alone.

They make a great addition to salads and pair well with lettuce, offering a tangy bitterness that's quite flavorful. However, they really shine as a garnish; the fringed and curled leaves, which are pure white or slightly green in the less-blanched ones, are truly beautiful and could easily be grown just for their appearance.

Covering with boards is sometimes resorted to instead of tying, two boards being laid along either side of the row to form a cap. It takes about three weeks to properly blanch endive and the plants should be used as soon as ready. If desired plants may be taken up in the fall and95 planted in pots or boxes and placed in a light warm cellar or an upstairs window for winter use. As the endive makes a mass of fibrous roots it can be lifted without in any way checking its growth.

Covering with boards is sometimes used instead of tying, with two boards placed on either side of the row to create a cap. It takes about three weeks to properly blanch endive, and the plants should be used as soon as they're ready. If desired, plants can be uprooted in the fall and95 transferred to pots or boxes and set in a light, warm cellar or an upstairs window for winter use. Since endive develops a mass of fibrous roots, it can be lifted without disrupting its growth.

The Giant Fringed Endive is one of the best kinds. The Self-blanching Endive is not a satisfactory sort as it lacks the beautiful color of the blanched sort and is more prone to run to seed; either sort when running up can be cut and fed to the rabbits and so turned to good account, in fact I consider it worth planting for this purpose alone. The Staghorn Endive is an excellent sort for spring growing as, started in the hotbed and transplanted, it does not run to seed—a fault most other varieties are addicted to; this sort may be planted for early salads and the Giant Fringed later for fall and winter. Like all plants which depend upon rapid growth for crispness and flavor an application of nitrate is beneficial to endive and mellow, rich soil should be selected for its growth.

The Giant Fringed Endive is one of the best types available. The Self-blanching Endive isn’t a great choice because it doesn’t have the nice color of the blanched variety and is more likely to bolt; either type that bolts can be cut and fed to rabbits, making it useful. Honestly, I think it's worth planting just for that reason. The Staghorn Endive is a fantastic option for spring growing because, when started in a hotbed and then transplanted, it doesn’t bolt—a problem that many other varieties have. You can plant this type for early salads and the Giant Fringed later for fall and winter. Like all plants that rely on quick growth for crispness and flavor, applying nitrate helps endive, and rich, well-drained soil is ideal for its growth.

LETTUCE

Lettuce

For the very earliest use plant seed in hotbed and transplant to open ground about the middle of May, setting the plants about a foot apart if head lettuce is desired and, of course, no one who is acquainted with the superior excellence of head lettuce over the leaf variety will care to grow the latter. There are so many excellent varieties of lettuce on the market that one hesitates to recommend any special sort but some are more reliable headers than others. One of the surest headers and an excellent sort to plant in summer as it is more resistant of heat than most sorts, is the Improved Hanson; this variety makes a large, globe-shaped head, so compact that the inner leaves are beautifully blanched and the quality is excellent. For those who like a brown-leaved lettuce and in my opinion this sort excels in flavor all others, the old May King is one of the best and should always find a place in the garden whatever other varieties are grown. It is not as large as lettuce and permits of closer97 planting than Hanson or All Season—another most excellent head lettuce—a sure header and slow to run to seed; it makes an immense head—almost as large as a Flat Dutch Cabbage, with beautifully blanched inner leaves and a fine, buttery flavor.

For the earliest use, plant seeds in a hotbed and then transplant them to open ground around mid-May, spacing the plants about a foot apart if you want head lettuce. Obviously, anyone familiar with the superior quality of head lettuce over the leaf variety wouldn't want to grow the latter. There are so many great types of lettuce available that it’s hard to recommend a specific one, but some are definitely more reliable for heading than others. One of the most dependable heading varieties that's great for summer planting, as it's more heat-resistant than most, is the Improved Hanson. This type produces a large, globe-shaped head that is so compact that the inner leaves are beautifully blanched, and the taste is excellent. For those who prefer a brown-leaved lettuce, which in my opinion has the best flavor, the old May King is one of the top choices and should always be included in the garden, no matter what other varieties you’re growing. It’s not as large as some other lettuces, allowing for closer planting than Hanson or All Season—another great head lettuce. It’s a sure header and doesn't bolt easily; it produces an enormous head, almost as big as a Flat Dutch Cabbage, with beautifully blanched inner leaves and a rich, buttery flavor.

Ordered
Rewarding proof of your own effort and hard work

Of the loose-leaved lettuce the Grand Rapids Forcing Lettuce is the best known. This is a good sort to grow in the hotbed and may be allowed to remain after the other vegetables are removed, resetting to stand a few inches apart. The leaves are upright and loose, beautifully green and curled and the flavor crisp and delicious. It may be grown to use while the other sorts are heading.

Of the loose-leaf lettuces, the Grand Rapids Forcing Lettuce is the most well-known. This is a great variety to grow in a hotbed and can stay in the ground even after other vegetables are harvested, being spaced a few inches apart. The leaves are upright and loose, a lovely green, and curled, with a crisp and tasty flavor. It can be grown to use while waiting for other varieties to head.

Romaine or Coss Lettuce is the sort served in the big hotels as Romaine salad. It requires transplanting either from the hotbed to the open ground or from the seed row in the open ground to another row. It should stand about four inches apart in the row as the growth is upright, rather than spreading, and when of sufficient size the leaves must be tied together to blanch.98 It is very crisp and delicious lettuce when quickly grown by the aid of much fertilizer, good culture and moisture, but lacking these is rather tough and bitter. Nitrates may be used to advantage, applied along the rows after the plants are transplanted.

Romaine or Coss Lettuce is the type commonly served in upscale hotels as Romaine salad. It needs to be transplanted either from a hotbed to the open ground or from the seed row in the ground to another row. It should be spaced about four inches apart in the row since it grows upright rather than spreading out. When the leaves are large enough, they should be tied together to blanch.98 It’s very crisp and tasty lettuce when grown quickly with plenty of fertilizer, proper care, and moisture, but without these, it can be quite tough and bitter. Nitrates can be beneficial if applied along the rows after the plants have been transplanted.

All lettuce is at best in spring and early summer. It is very difficult to grow good lettuce in hot weather. If a width of cheese cloth is stretched over the row and the soil kept moist much better results can be secured. Leaf lettuce is more easily managed in mid-summer than head lettuce and unless one can give special attention this is a better sort to sow for succession.

All lettuce is at its best in spring and early summer. It's really hard to grow good lettuce in hot weather. If you stretch a width of cheesecloth over the row and keep the soil moist, you can get much better results. Leaf lettuce is easier to manage in mid-summer than head lettuce, and unless you can give it special attention, this is a better type to plant for succession.

ONIONS

Onions

Are an all-the-year-round vegetable and belong to each season according to how they are handled. For green onions, early in spring, the White Potato, or Multiplier, Onions are deservedly popular; these are usually raised from sets planted in drills where they are to form a permanent bed and cultivated during summer; they99 form a clump of tender shoots which are ready for use in May. If, however, the bed is neglected and allowed to form sod or weeds the onions deteriorate and become tough and woody; their principal merit consists in their earliness. For first class bunching onions, however, onions with bottoms, one should sow seed in August in a fine, clean seed bed that has been heavily manured, scattering the seed thinly in drills one foot or fifteen inches apart and thin the plants to stand two inches apart in the rows. Onions are quite hardy and will usually winter without protection but in severe climates a light covering of straw or of evergreen boughs will be beneficial; this practice gives very fine green onions early in the spring.

Onions are a vegetable that can be grown year-round and are associated with each season based on how they're cultivated. In early spring, the White Potato, or Multiplier, Onions are quite popular; they are typically grown from sets planted in rows where a permanent bed will be established and cared for during the summer. They99 develop a cluster of tender shoots that are ready to use by May. However, if the bed is neglected and allowed to become overrun with grass or weeds, the onions will suffer and turn tough and woody; their main advantage is their early harvest. For top-quality bunching onions with bulbs, it's best to sow seeds in August in a well-prepared seed bed that has been richly manured. Scatter the seeds thinly in rows one foot or fifteen inches apart and thin the plants to stand two inches apart within the rows. Onions are generally quite hardy and can usually survive the winter without any cover, but in harsher climates, a light layer of straw or evergreen branches can be helpful; this method produces excellent green onions early in the spring.

Another practice, very satisfactory for the home garden, consists in planting in early spring the old onions placed in storage for winter use; usually these will have begun to grow by March and are useless for cooking, but if pulled apart and each shoot planted out in good garden soil they will start at once into growth and in a few100 weeks' time produce a delicious green onion, sweet and of the utmost tenderness. I have found it a good thing to spade the flower beds intended for the growing of annuals and bedding plants early in the season and plant the onions in these, thus saving room in the garden and getting a greater use of the flower beds.

Another great method for your home garden is to plant old onions that you stored for winter in early spring. By March, they’ll usually start sprouting and won’t be good for cooking anymore. But if you separate them and plant each shoot in good garden soil, they’ll quickly start growing and within a few100 weeks, you'll have delicious green onions that are sweet and super tender. I’ve found it useful to prepare the flower beds for annuals and bedding plants early in the season and plant the onions there, which saves space in the garden and makes better use of the flower beds.

Unlike many vegetables the onion can be grown year after year on the same ground, providing it is well fertilized each year with barnyard manure, so that the humus content of the soil is not depleted. Clean tilth is essential, so that as little hand work as possible may be required for onions tops are exceedingly tender and injury to them checks the growth of the bulbs. The garden overalls adopted by many women for working is a distinct advantage in the onion bed. For onion sets sow seed in drills early in spring; gather the sets when ripe and store in a dry place till spring; slight freezing will not injure them but they must be protected from thawing and freezing.

Unlike many vegetables, onions can be grown year after year in the same soil, as long as it is fertilized each year with barnyard manure to maintain the humus content in the ground. It's important to have clean soil, so that minimal handwork is needed because onion tops are very delicate and any damage to them slows down bulb growth. The garden overalls that many women wear while working provide a clear advantage in the onion patch. To grow onion sets, sow seeds in rows early in the spring; collect the sets when they are ripe and store them in a dry place until spring; slight freezing won't harm them, but they must be kept safe from thawing and freezing.

But for winter onions of notable size and quality101 the New Onion Culture should be adopted:—This consists in sowing the seed in the hotbed in early spring and transplanting to the open ground when the weather is suitable. Set the tiny plants an inch apart in the rows, thin when big enough to use as green onions, removing every other one leaving them standing two inches apart, thin again to stand four inches apart and grow on until fall. If seed of Prizetaker or Ailsa Craig are used onions quite the equal of the fancy Spanish onions sold in the fruit stores will be produced. The soil must be more than ordinarily rich; besides the spring dressing given the garden before ploughing the space selected for the onions should have well-rotted manure trenched in at the rate of a wheelbarrow load to every square yard: in trenching lay back a spade's depth of soil across the end of the onion bed; fill this space with manure, trench a second row, throwing the soil on top of the manure, fill the fresh trench with manure and continue till the whole bed has been worked over. Rake the bed until the surface is perfectly fine and smooth and sow the102 seeds in drills fifteen inches apart or set the plants as directed.

But for winter onions that are notable for their size and quality101, you should adopt the New Onion Culture: This involves sowing seeds in a hotbed in early spring and then transplanting them to the open ground when the weather is suitable. Space the tiny plants an inch apart in the rows. Thin them out when they're big enough to use as green onions by removing every other one, leaving them two inches apart. Thin them again to stand four inches apart and let them grow until fall. If you use seeds from Prizetaker or Ailsa Craig, you’ll produce onions that are just as good as the fancy Spanish onions sold in fruit stores. The soil needs to be richer than usual; in addition to the spring dressing given to the garden before plowing, the area set aside for the onions should have well-rotted manure dug in at the rate of a wheelbarrow load for every square yard. In trenching, push back a spade’s depth of soil at the end of the onion bed, fill this space with manure, trench a second row, covering the manure with the soil, then fill the new trench with manure and continue this process until the whole bed is prepared. Rake the bed until the surface is perfectly fine and smooth, and sow the102 seeds in drills fifteen inches apart or set the plants as directed.

Onions are occasionally attacked by root lice which if not at once exterminated will quickly destroy the plants; the lice work on the roots of the onion and the first evidence of their presence is a sickly yellowing of the tops; if an onion is pulled up and examined the presence of the tiny white lice will at once be evident: the remedy is salt and the method of applying is to open a shallow trench beside the rows and scatter salt quite plentifully along it, filling in the earth again; one application will exterminate the lice. Attacks of root lice are by no means common, but the fact that they do occur and are very deadly should make one watchful for the first sign of discoloration in the tops.

Onions can sometimes be infested by root lice, which, if not dealt with immediately, can quickly ruin the plants. The lice target the roots of the onion, and the first sign of their presence is a sickly yellowing of the tops. If you pull up an onion and check, you'll notice the tiny white lice right away. The solution is salt; you should open a shallow trench next to the rows and sprinkle a good amount of salt along it, then cover it back up with soil. One treatment will eliminate the lice. While root lice infestations aren't very common, their potential to cause serious damage means you should keep an eye out for any early signs of discoloration in the tops.

When the onion tops show signs of ripening they should be broken down; this is sometimes done by rolling a barrel over them. A light home-made roller may be easily constructed by taking a length of nine inch stove pipe, fitting a103 piece of wood in each end with a hole through the center to admit a bar of wood or iron which should be attached at the ends to a handle adjusted so as to allow the cylinder to roll; this being light can be rolled over the bed, leveling two or more rows at a time according to the length of the cylinder; it can be quickly constructed of waste material about the place and any piece of wood of suitable length—a couple of lathes, even, will answer, will do for handles. It is a good idea when it is found necessary to employ help in cultivating the garden to have a few little jobs like this on hand in case rain interferes with the work; in this way neither the time of the help nor the money of the employer is wasted and I have found that it gives far better satisfaction to the help if there is something of the kind for him to do so that he need not lose his day's or forenoon's work. Sharpening tools is another job that it pays to remember in the odd moments. A memorandum of things that can be done when it rains, tacked up in a conspicuous place in the104 work room, toolhouse or barn is a very useful reminder and avoids an awkward delay while one tries to think of something to do.

When the onion tops start to ripen, they should be knocked down; this is sometimes done by rolling a barrel over them. A simple homemade roller can be easily made by taking a piece of nine-inch stove pipe, fitting a piece of wood into each end with a hole in the center for a bar of wood or iron that should be attached at the ends to a handle that allows the cylinder to roll. This lightweight roller can be rolled over the bed, leveling two or more rows at a time depending on the length of the cylinder. It can be quickly built using scrap materials lying around and any piece of wood of suitable length—a couple of lathes will work for handles. It’s a good idea to have a few small tasks available when help is needed for gardening in case rain interrupts the work; this way, neither the helper's time nor the employer's money goes to waste. I’ve found it gives helpers much better satisfaction if there’s something for them to do so they don’t lose a day’s or morning’s earnings. Sharpening tools is another task that’s worth remembering during downtimes. Having a list of tasks that can be done when it rains, posted in a visible spot in the workroom, tool shed, or barn, is a very handy reminder and prevents awkward delays while figuring out what to do.

If possible onions should be dug on a warm, bright day and allowed to lie on the ground until dry and clean; they should then be stored in a dry, airy loft or on a scaffolding. On the hay in a barn is a good place for onions and they can be left there until freezing weather, for the shorter time they are in a warm house the better they will keep. If the temperature drops suddenly a little hay can be thrown over them. Slight freezing does not injure onions, but repeated freezing and thawing does. An upstairs room is better for storing than a cellar unless the latter is unusually dry and not too warm. Onions will, usually, keep in perfect condition until the middle of February or the first of March, when they will begin to grow and should be sorted out, and the sound ones given a cool, dry place and sold or used as quickly as possible and the remainder saved for planting in the open ground.

If possible, onions should be harvested on a warm, sunny day and left on the ground until they’re dry and clean. After that, they should be stored in a dry, airy loft or on racks. A barn's hayloft is a good spot for onions, and they can stay there until the weather turns freezing. The less time they spend in a warm house, the better they’ll keep. If the temperature suddenly drops, you can throw a bit of hay over them. A light freeze won't harm onions, but repeated freezing and thawing will. An upstairs room is preferable for storage compared to a basement unless the basement is unusually dry and not too warm. Onions usually keep in great condition until mid-February or early March, at which point they’ll start to sprout. You should sort the good ones out and give them a cool, dry place to be sold or used as soon as possible, while the rest can be saved for planting outside.

PARSLEY

PARSLEY

So universally used for garnishing and for flavoring soups and salads is of very slow germination and for that reason is more successfully grown when started in hotbeds and transplanted into the open ground in May. The ancients held that parsley should never be sown as they claimed that the seed had to make a journey to Hades and remain six weeks; when sown in the open ground it seems to bear out that theory, so slow is its appearance above ground. In the hotbed it requires about three weeks. England, too, has its superstition of the parsley, believing like the ancients, that it should be planted, not sown, that it must make the long journey to the infernal regions and return and that there the devil takes his tithe of it, for proof of which they point to the fact that a small part only of the seed comes up. A better explanation would be found, I think, in the quality of the seed, the home grown seed coming up quite as well as other seed, the boughten seed sometimes proving unsatisfactory.

So widely used for garnishing and flavoring soups and salads, parsley has a very slow germination process. For that reason, it's more successfully grown when started in hotbeds and then transplanted into the open ground in May. The ancients believed that parsley should never be sown, claiming that the seed needed to make a journey to Hades and stay there for six weeks; when sown in the open ground, it seems to support that theory because its growth is so slow. In a hotbed, it takes about three weeks to appear. England also has its superstition about parsley, sharing the ancient belief that it should be planted, not sown, as it must travel to the underworld and back, with the devil taking his cut, which is evidenced by the fact that only a small portion of the seeds actually sprout. A better explanation might be found in the quality of the seed, as homegrown seeds tend to grow just as well as other seeds, while store-bought seeds can sometimes be disappointing.

The Greeks held the plant in great respect. A crown made of dried and withered leaves was given to the victors in their games. A crown together with a bunch of laurel was dedicated to the god of banquets while all the guests at these feasts wore crowns of parsley under the impression that the herb created quiet and promoted appetite. The Romans also decked themselves in like manner upon similar occasions because they believed that the plant had the power to absorb the fumes of wine and thus prevent drunkenness.

The Greeks greatly respected the plant. A crown made of dried and withered leaves was given to the winners in their competitions. A crown along with a bunch of laurel was offered to the god of feasts, while all the guests at these gatherings wore crowns of parsley, thinking that the herb calmed them and increased their appetite. The Romans also adorned themselves similarly on such occasions because they believed the plant could absorb the fumes of wine and help prevent drunkenness.

It was parsley that Hercules selected for the making of his first garland of victory. Greek gardens were bordered with parsley and rue, giving rise to the saying, "Oh, we are only at the parsley and rue." As these ancients used the plant in their rejoicing and merrymaking, so, too, it was brought into use in their funeral decorations. Sprigs of the herb were strewn over their dead. According to old folk lore parsley should be sown on Good Friday.

It was parsley that Hercules chose for his first victory garland. Greek gardens were lined with parsley and rue, leading to the saying, "Oh, we are only at the parsley and rue." Just as these ancients used the plant in their celebrations and festivities, it was also used in their funeral arrangements. Sprigs of the herb were scattered over the deceased. According to old folklore, parsley should be planted on Good Friday.

Parsley is a biennial plant, making a fine clump107 of edible leaves the first year which in mild winters or protected positions survives the winter and starts into growth the following spring. It soon, however, runs to seed and is of no further value except to produce seed. If, however, one wants a small supply of parsley without the annual trouble of sowing and transplanting a small bed of it may be allowed to go to seed and self-sow, when it becomes, practically, a perennial but does not attain the fine quality that the specially grown plant does. A single row through the garden will furnish parsley for an entire neighborhood as the older leaves are gathered as needed and the crown allowed to produce new leaves; this should be done whether the leaves are needed or not as the quality of the new growth will be finer in every way, for leaving the old leaves to mature checks the growth of the crown leaves. Nine inches at least should be allowed between the plants and twelve is better, though when the tiny plants are first transplanted it may seem a long and lonely distance between them, but the plants soon fill up the space.

Parsley is a biennial plant that produces a nice cluster of edible leaves in the first year. In mild winters or protected spots, it can survive the winter and start growing again in the spring. However, it quickly goes to seed and loses its value, except for producing seeds. If you want a small supply of parsley without having to sow and transplant every year, you can let a small patch go to seed and self-sow, making it effectively a perennial, although it won’t have the same quality as the specially cultivated plants. A single row in the garden can provide parsley for the whole neighborhood, as the older leaves are picked as needed while allowing the crown to grow new leaves. This should be done whether you need the leaves or not, because the new growth will be of better quality; letting the old leaves mature affects the growth of the crown leaves. You should leave at least nine inches between plants, with twelve inches being better. It might seem like a long distance when the small plants are first transplanted, but they will quickly fill the space.

Very little cultivation is needed between the plants when once they attain full size; the plants are so dense and spreading that they effectually choke out the younger weed growth, but the space between rows should be kept clean.

Very little care is needed between the plants once they reach full size; the plants are so thick and spread out that they effectively choke out the younger weeds, but the space between the rows should be kept clean.

Of the varieties to plant, only the fine moss curled should be selected. The Champion Moss Curled is a standard sort and one of the best, rich green in color and so crumpled and curled as to have the appearance of moss. Nearly all florists or seedsmen have their own especial brand of seed and one can select those which promise the best product. If desired bunches of the parsley may be lifted in the fall and potted or planted in window-boxes for winter use. They make a most attractive plant for the window and a pot of parsley, one of well-blanched endive and one of red celestial peppers make a most cheerful window decoration for the kitchen or dining-room, as well as furnishing crisp decorative material for the table.

Of the different types to plant, only the fine curled moss should be chosen. The Champion Moss Curled is a standard type and one of the best, a rich green color and so crumpled and curled that it looks like moss. Almost all florists or seed suppliers have their own special brand of seed, and you can pick those that promise the best results. If you want, you can lift bunches of parsley in the fall and pot them or plant them in window boxes for winter use. They make a really attractive plant for the window, and a pot of parsley, one of well-blanched endive, and one of red celestial peppers create a cheerful window decoration for the kitchen or dining room, while also providing fresh decorative material for the table.

PARSNIPS

PARSNIPS

May be classed among the early spring vegetables as they are planted as early as the ground can be worked in spring and are likewise ready for use as soon as the frost is out of the ground so that they may be dug; like all root vegetables they require rich, deeply dug or ploughed land. Not less than twelve inches in depth is required for successful cultivation; with shallow cultivation crooked and many branched roots are produced which are unsalable and of little value for home consumption. The long, smooth, beautifully white roots—two inches or more at the crown, are only produced in well-prepared soil.

May be classified among the early spring vegetables since they can be planted as soon as the ground is workable in spring and are ready for use as soon as the frost has melted. Like all root vegetables, they need rich, deeply dug or plowed soil. A depth of at least twelve inches is necessary for successful cultivation; shallow cultivation leads to crooked and branching roots that aren't marketable and are of little value for home use. The long, smooth, beautiful white roots—two inches or more at the top—are only produced in well-prepared soil.

Parsnips are planted directly in the open ground as soon as the ground can be worked in spring, sowing the seed in drills an inch and a quarter deep, covering and tramping down the rows if the weather is dry. They should be thinned to stand from four to six inches apart in the row that the roots may make perfect development. The rows should be eighteen inches110 apart and the ground kept loose and clean throughout the growing season.

Parsnips are planted directly in the ground as soon as the soil is workable in spring. Sow the seeds in rows about an inch and a quarter deep, covering and pressing down the rows if the weather is dry. They should be thinned to stand four to six inches apart in the row to ensure the roots develop properly. The rows should be eighteen inches apart, and the soil should be kept loose and free of weeds throughout the growing season.

The usual practice is to let the parsnips remain in the ground over winter, taking up and storing in boxes of slightly moist earth or sand, in the cellar, a supply for winter use. The parsnip is improved in quality by a touch of frost but must be dug before growth starts in the spring.

The common approach is to leave the parsnips in the ground throughout the winter, then take them up and store them in boxes of slightly moist soil or sand in the cellar for winter use. The quality of the parsnip gets better with a bit of frost, but it should be dug up before the growth begins in the spring.

Parsnips are eaten quite readily by Belgian hares and imperfect or small roots may be sorted out and fed to them, avoiding any loss in grading.

Parsnips are easily eaten by Belgian hares, and any imperfect or small roots can be sorted out and given to them, preventing any loss in grading.

PEAS

PEAS

Of the very earliest kinds, and that is distinctly the smooth peas, should be gotten into the ground very early in spring. Most of the early sorts will stand considerable cold, but the wrinkled sorts are tender and should not be planted until the weather and soil are warm and reasonably dry. More failures in growing peas come from planting in cold, wet soil, in a mistaken hurry to get early peas than from any other cause.

Of the very earliest types, especially the smooth peas, you should plant them in the ground early in spring. Most early varieties can tolerate quite a bit of cold, but the wrinkled types are sensitive and shouldn't be planted until the weather and soil are warm and fairly dry. More failures in growing peas happen from planting in cold, wet soil due to the rush to get early peas than from any other reason.

Ground for peas should be very rich; it is not sufficient that the garden plot has been well manured before ploughing;—the strip allotted to the growing of peas should have additional fertilizer trenched in, especially is this necessary in growing the wrinkled sorts and especially the dwarf peas, such as Nott's Excelsior and the like. These dwarf peas cannot bear a big crop on their abbreviated tops unless forced to production by heavy feeding, but as the wrinkled, medium early and mid-season peas are the most delicious of all in quality, the extra care required is well repaid. Another object in heavy fertilizing is that by this means a succession of peas may be grown on the same ground. Personally I prefer peas that require support to the very dwarf sorts; in the first place you have more vine for the production of pods. You cannot, with the best intentions, get as big a crop from one foot of vine as you can from three, all things being equal. Again, the labor of gathering pods from upright growing vines where the pods are easily seen and reached is far less than from the112 prostrate vines which must be lifted or looked under in search of pods. Wire netting furnishes a better support than brush and where the gardener is a woman is much pleasanter to work about. Brush has an unpleasant habit of catching on the clothing and twisting around, often to the injury of the vine, but the netting gives a firm support, to which the vine readily attaches itself.

Ground for peas should be very rich; it’s not enough for the garden plot to be well manured before plowing—the area designated for growing peas should have additional fertilizer worked into it, especially when growing wrinkled varieties and particularly dwarf peas like Nott's Excelsior and similar types. These dwarf peas can’t produce a large yield on their short stems unless they receive a lot of nutrients, but since the wrinkled, medium early, and mid-season peas are the tastiest of all, the extra effort is worth it. Another benefit of heavy fertilizing is that it allows for successive crops of peas to be grown in the same area. Personally, I prefer peas that need support over the very dwarf kinds; firstly, you get more vine for pod production. You can’t achieve as large a crop from one foot of vine as you can from three, given the same conditions. Also, it’s much easier to gather pods from upright vines where they are easy to see and reach, compared to prostrate vines that have to be lifted or searched under for pods. Wire netting provides better support than brush and is generally more pleasant to work with, especially for women gardeners. Brush has a bad habit of catching on clothing and twisting around, which can harm the vine, whereas netting provides a solid support that the vine easily attaches to.

In the home garden the best way to plant peas is in double rows a foot apart, making the trench about three inches deep and dropping the peas as evenly as possible. Early sown peas do not require as deep planting as the wrinkled sorts which may be planted four or five inches deep to avoid blight. As the wrinkled sorts are very tender they should not go into the ground before corn planting time and not then unless the nights and soil are warm.

In the home garden, the best way to plant peas is in double rows about a foot apart, creating a trench around three inches deep and spreading the peas out evenly. Peas sown early don’t need to be planted as deep as the wrinkled varieties, which can be planted four to five inches deep to prevent blight. Since the wrinkled varieties are quite sensitive, they shouldn’t be planted until corn planting time, and only if the nights and soil are warm.

An excellent arrangement for a succession of peas in the home garden is to prepare the rows by trenching in manure and then make two furrows a foot apart and in one furrow plant the113 earliest peas and in the other a second early pea, stretching a four or five foot width of wire netting between the rows; this extends the bearing season a couple of weeks. When all the pods have formed on the earliest varieties of vines a second furrow may be opened beside it and a wrinkled sort of medium earliness be planted; these will be ready to climb about the time the first vines are turning yellow when they may be pulled up, leaving their place for the new vines. This system of succession of planting may be repeated on the other side of the netting, thus giving four sowings of peas to one strip of netting and a succession of peas for several weeks.

A great way to set up a series of pea plantings in your home garden is to prepare the rows by mixing in some manure, then make two furrows a foot apart. In one furrow, plant the113 earliest peas, and in the other, plant a second early variety. Stretch a four to five-foot wide wire netting between the rows; this will extend the harvest season by a couple of weeks. Once all the pods have formed on the earliest pea vines, you can open a second furrow next to it and plant a medium early variety that has wrinkled seeds. These will be ready to climb around the same time the first vines start to yellow, at which point you can pull them up and make space for the new plants. You can repeat this planting system on the other side of the netting, allowing you to have four sowings of peas in one strip of netting and a steady supply of peas for several weeks.

The germination of the seed may be hastened by soaking the seed over night in warm water and when sowing unsoaked seed, in dry weather, germination is hastened by pouring hot water into the trench before covering the seed.

The seed can sprout faster by soaking it overnight in warm water. If you plant dry seeds during dry weather, you can speed up germination by pouring hot water into the trench before covering the seeds.

The experienced gardener will have his pet variety of peas but the amateur will be somewhat afield in selection so I would suggest as a desirable early sort the Gradus or Prosperity Pea, a114 delicious sort of the tall kind that has much to recommend it. American Wonder is another extra early pea of a wrinkled sort that appeals to those who prefer a dwarf pea, being but a foot in height and compares in general excellence with Nott's Excelsior. On the same trellis with Gradus may be planted the Senator Pea; this is a number one pea in every respect—quality, quantity and appearance; following these one may plant more Senators and the Telephone; these will give a succession of peas for several weeks.

The experienced gardener will have their favorite type of peas, but the novice might struggle with their choices. I recommend the Gradus or Prosperity Pea as a great early option. It's a delicious variety of the tall type that has a lot to offer. American Wonder is another very early pea with a wrinkled texture that appeals to those who like shorter plants, growing only about a foot tall and matching Nott's Excelsior in overall quality. Alongside the Gradus, you can plant the Senator Pea; it’s outstanding in every way—taste, yield, and appearance. After those, you can plant more Senators and the Telephone variety; these will provide a continuous supply of peas for several weeks.

So many enemies conspire against the pea that close watch must be kept from the planting of the seed until the plants are well above the ground. Usually the chief depredation comes from moles which run along underneath the seed and destroy it; poisoned bait placed in the trench along with the seed often destroys the moles before much damage is done. A mole trap set at each end of the row or at the point where the mole enters the run will often prove effective.115 A very successful home made trap consists of a large can or crock—a lard can is good, sunk in the ground and a trap consisting of a long, endless box with about a third of the bottom sawed apart and pivoted on nails driven through the side, so that anything entering at one end will drop through the swinging trap into the can beneath, which should be kept full of water; this arrangement will catch more moles than any steel trap with which I am familiar, and as the presence of the moles in the garden threatens other vegetables as well as the peas it will be time well spent to prepare one or more of these traps for use when occasion arises; the making of these traps may well be put on the list of rainy day tasks.

So many enemies are out to get the pea that you need to keep a close eye on them from the moment you plant the seed until the plants are well above the ground. Usually, the biggest threat comes from moles that tunnel just below the seed and destroy it; using poisoned bait in the trench with the seed often takes out the moles before they can cause much damage. Setting a mole trap at each end of the row or where the mole enters the tunnel can often be effective.115 A very effective homemade trap consists of a large can or crock—a lard can works well—buried in the ground and a trap made from a long, endless box with about a third of the bottom cut apart and hinged on nails driven through the side. This way, anything that enters from one end will drop through the swinging trap into the can beneath, which should be filled with water. This setup will catch more moles than any steel trap I know of, and since moles in the garden threaten other vegetables as well as the peas, it’s worth your time to prepare one or more of these traps when needed; making these traps can easily be added to your list of things to do on a rainy day.

Cutworms sometimes take the peas as fast as they appear above the ground; poisoned bait along the rows before the peas break the ground will dispose of this enemy. Blackbirds often destroy a planting of peas before their presence is suspected and English sparrows have been116 known to do much damage, so if one would enjoy fresh, home grown peas one must exercise due vigilance.

Cutworms can eat the peas as soon as they show up above the ground; using poisoned bait along the rows before the peas come up will take care of this pest. Blackbirds often ruin a pea planting before anyone even notices, and English sparrows have been known to cause a lot of damage as well. So, if you want to enjoy fresh, homegrown peas, you need to stay alert.

The use of Mulford and other cultures for inoculating peas is growing in practice among the most progressive gardeners and is a very wise precaution to take; especially is it desirable in intensive culture suggested by growing two crops of peas on the same strip of land. Peas, like all legumes, are nitrogen feeders and gatherers and the use of the culture supplies the young plant, at the start, with nitrogen and puts it in shape to begin the accumulation of nitrogen from the air by its own efforts. The nitrogen gathered from the air is stored up on the roots in the form of nodules or bunches, and it is for this reason that the growing of all legumes is so beneficial to the soil. If when the first planting of peas is matured and gathered the vines are cut or broken off close to the ground, instead of being pulled up, root and all, this supply of nitrogen will remain in the soil and be available for the succeeding crop.

The use of Mulford and other cultures to inoculate peas is becoming more common among the most progressive gardeners, and it's a smart precaution to take; it's particularly useful in intensive farming, where two crops of peas are grown on the same piece of land. Peas, like all legumes, depend on and gather nitrogen, and using this culture gives the young plant a boost of nitrogen at the start, enabling it to start collecting nitrogen from the air on its own. The nitrogen collected from the air is stored in the roots as nodules or clusters, which is why growing legumes is so beneficial for the soil. If, after the first crop of peas is harvested, the vines are cut or broken off close to the ground instead of being completely pulled up, this nitrogen supply will stay in the soil and be ready for the next crop.

The inoculating of the seed is very simple: the small bottles, which, by the way, cost but twenty-five cents for garden size, are only one-fourth full; simply fill up the bottle with water and moisten the seed before planting; this is all, and the same bottle will supply inoculating material for the beans which also being legumes respond favorably to the treatment.

Inoculating the seed is really easy: the small bottles, which only cost twenty-five cents for the garden size, are filled just one-fourth of the way. Just top off the bottle with water and moisten the seed before planting; that's it. The same bottle can also provide inoculating material for beans, which, being legumes, respond well to this treatment.

RADISHES

RADISHES

A few radishes may be grown in the hotbed for very early use, but the main planting should be in the open ground. It is hardly worth while to devote any definite part of the garden to radishes as room can be found for them among the other vegetables. An excellent way to grow them is to drop seeds at intervals along the rows of beets, carrots, parsnips and salsify. All these seeds are slow in germinating and by dropping in occasional radish seeds which germinate in from three to five days the rows will be marked so that they may be kept cultivated without waiting for the plants to appear and indicate the rows.118 A surprising amount of radishes will be grown in this way, without any special labor and loss of ground; and they will be out of the way before the ground is needed for the permanent occupant of the row.

You can grow a few radishes in the hotbed for early use, but the main planting should be done in open ground. It’s really not worth dedicating a specific area of the garden just for radishes since there’s usually room for them among other vegetables. A great method is to sprinkle seeds at intervals along the rows of beets, carrots, parsnips, and salsify. All these seeds take time to germinate, so by adding radish seeds that sprout in about three to five days, you’ll have clear rows that can be tended to without waiting for the other plants to show up. 118 You’ll end up growing a surprising amount of radishes this way, without any special effort or taking up extra space; plus, they’ll be ready to harvest before you need the area for the main plants in the row.

The turnip rooted sorts are the most quickly and easily grown, the Twenty Day as its name indicates being ready for use in twenty days and the French Breakfast and Improved Breakfast Radish being ready in twenty-five; both of these are very tender, crisp and mild sorts and beautiful in appearance, white at the base and scarlet above, making a beautiful appearance when prepared for the breakfast table with a bit of the green top for contrast. For those who prefer a white radish the Icicle Radish is a fine sort, crisp and tender and does not grow coarse or pithy until quite large.

The turnip-rooted varieties are the quickest and easiest to grow. The Twenty Day, as its name suggests, is ready to eat in just twenty days, while the French Breakfast and Improved Breakfast Radish are ready in twenty-five days. Both of these are very tender, crisp, mild, and visually appealing, with white at the base and scarlet on top, making a lovely presentation on the breakfast table, especially with a bit of the green tops for contrast. For those who prefer a white radish, the Icicle Radish is a great option; it's crisp and tender and doesn’t get coarse or pithy until it’s quite large.

If one wishes to devote a definite space to radishes and maintain a succession of plants it will be a good plan to drop a seed in the ground for each radish pulled; in this way there will be a constant supply of young, crisp radishes all summer.

If you want to dedicate a specific area to radishes and keep planting them regularly, it's a smart idea to drop a seed in the ground for every radish you pull. This way, you'll have a steady supply of fresh, crunchy radishes all summer long.

Where only a few are desired it is a good plan to plant a short space of the rows devoted to other vegetables to radishes and lettuce and perhaps a few plants of endive and parsley next to the path and near the house so that they may be easily got at without walking on the newly cultivated ground.

Where only a few are wanted, it’s a good idea to plant a small section of the rows meant for other vegetables with radishes and lettuce, and maybe a few endive and parsley plants next to the path and close to the house so that they can be easily reached without stepping on the freshly cultivated ground.

SALSIFY

Salsify

Is another plant that is started very early in the spring and eaten as soon as the frost is out of the ground. It is one of the most useful and delicious of this class of plants and is not nearly as much cultivated as it should be. Sliced and cooked tender it makes, when combined with milk, seasoning and cracker crumbs, a most acceptable substitute for oyster soup or, cooked, mashed and mixed with a little flour and seasoning and butter, dipped in egg and bread crumbs, it makes delicious little cakes when fried. Its culture is simple, any good, light fertile soil producing a good crop, but to produce clean, smooth roots it should be deeply dug and well cultivated.120 Sow the seed in shallow drills early in the season; thin to stand six inches apart in the row. It is hardy and may remain in the ground all winter, but a supply for winter use should be dug at the approach of cold weather and stored in boxes of sand or earth in the root cellar. As soon as the frost is out of the ground in spring and before growth starts they must be dug. If it is desired to grow seed the plants should be set out again, or may be left where they are if the ground is not needed for other vegetables, and cultivated the same as seedling plants.

It’s another plant that gets started very early in the spring and can be eaten as soon as the frost is gone. It’s one of the most useful and tasty in this category of plants and isn’t grown nearly as much as it should be. When sliced and cooked until tender, combined with milk, seasoning, and cracker crumbs, it makes a great substitute for oyster soup. Alternatively, when it's cooked, mashed, and mixed with a bit of flour, seasoning, and butter, then dipped in egg and breadcrumbs, it can be turned into delicious little cakes when fried. Growing it is easy; any light, fertile soil will yield a good crop, but to get clean, smooth roots, it should be deeply dug and well-tended.120 Sow the seeds in shallow rows early in the season and thin them to stand six inches apart. It’s hardy and can stay in the ground all winter, but you should dig up some for winter use as cold weather approaches and store them in boxes of sand or soil in the root cellar. As soon as the frost is gone in the spring and before new growth starts, they must be dug up. If you want to produce seeds, the plants should be re-planted, or they can just be left where they are if you don't need the space for other vegetables, and treated like seedling plants.

SPINACH

SPINACH

The most important of the vegetables grown for greens, should be sown in the open ground as early as the ground can be worked if wanted for early spring and summer use. For fall and winter use sow in September. For a succession sow every two weeks. Sow in drills one foot apart and one inch deep, in soil as fertile as one can compass; the soil cannot be too rich for spinach, as upon the rapidity of its growth depends121 the tenderness and succulence of its leaves; in poor soil, especially if allowed to suffer for water, the leaves will be tough and ill-flavored. Light applications of nitrate of soda have a magic effect on spinach and should be applied lightly every two weeks.

The most important vegetables grown for greens should be planted directly in the ground as soon as the soil can be worked if you want them for early spring and summer use. For fall and winter use, plant in September. To have a continuous supply, sow every two weeks. Plant in rows a foot apart and one inch deep, in the most fertile soil you can get; the soil can't be too rich for spinach, as the speed of its growth affects the tenderness and juiciness of its leaves. In poor soil, especially if they don't get enough water, the leaves will be tough and taste bad. Light applications of nitrate of soda have a remarkable effect on spinach and should be applied lightly every two weeks.

The Round Seeded Savoy is a standard sort, with thick, fleshy leaves, curled and crinkled; the New Zealand is a good sort for summer as it withstands heat well and is slow to run to seed. In gathering the spinach the entire top may be cut off a bit above the crown; this induces a new, quick, tender growth of leaves.

The Round Seeded Savoy is a standard type, featuring thick, fleshy leaves that are curled and crinkled. The New Zealand variety is great for summer since it handles heat well and doesn’t bolt quickly. When harvesting spinach, you can cut the entire top just above the crown; this encourages new, quick growth of tender leaves.

In planting for spring and winter use the beds should be covered with straw at the approach of cold weather. Spinach often self-sows and gives a volunteer crop the following spring. When the spinach begins to send up seed stalks it may be cut and fed to the rabbits and so waste that would otherwise ensue may be avoided.

In preparing for spring and winter planting, the beds should be covered with straw as colder weather approaches. Spinach often self-sows, providing a volunteer crop the following spring. When the spinach starts to send up seed stalks, it can be cut and fed to the rabbits, preventing waste that would otherwise occur.


CHAPTER IX
Mid-Season Veggies

BEANS

Beans

Being somewhat tender, should not be planted until the ground is warm in spring. Corn-planting time will do for the field and navy bean, but the white podded string bean and the lima bean should not go into the ground until all danger of frost is past and the ground is in growing condition. At the present advanced cost of seed—fifty-five cents a pound for the string and lima sorts with postage added by some dealers, it will not do to take any chances by being in too much of a hurry to get seed into the ground; neither will it pay to buy seed of any but reliable dealers. There has never been a time when so much importance attaches to choosing one's seed merchant wisely. Cheap seed never pays, for the time lost in replanting seed123 of poor germination, or, worse still, that comes untrue to name, giving one inferior or mongrel vegetables, offsets, many times, the amount saved in money.

Being somewhat delicate, seeds shouldn’t be planted until the ground is warm in spring. The ideal time for planting corn, field beans, and navy beans works, but the white-podded string beans and lima beans shouldn’t go into the ground until there’s no danger of frost and the soil is ready for growing. With the current high cost of seeds—fifty-five cents a pound for the string and lima varieties, plus shipping from some sellers—it’s not wise to rush getting seeds in the ground; it also doesn’t make sense to buy seeds from anyone but reputable dealers. There’s never been a time when choosing your seed supplier wisely is so crucial. Cheap seeds never yield savings, as the time wasted replanting seeds with poor germination—or, worse, those that don’t match their name and produce inferior or mixed vegetables—often outweighs any money saved.

String beans are the first form in which this favorite vegetable appears on the table and a very delicious and attractive dish they make when such white wax or golden wax as Wardwell's Kidney, Davis's Kidney Wax, Improved Golden Wax are selected; well grown plants of these varieties, well laden with their long, wax-like pods are a joy to the gardener; and if the pods are gathered as fast as they mature, and this may be done as soon as they whiten, up to the time they are fully grown, when they will still be sweet and tender, the bushes will continue to bear heavily until cut down by the frost; this should always be done whether the beans are wanted for use or not; they can be canned, sold, or given away or fed to the pig—anything rather than to check the vines' bearing. If one wishes to save seed for the next year's planting, and this is worth while when such high prices prevail, it will be well to set aside124 a row, or portion of a row, for seed, allowing the first pods to ripen as this establishes the early bearing characteristic of the plant.

String beans are the first way this beloved vegetable shows up on the table, and they make a really tasty and appealing dish when you choose varieties like Wardwell's Kidney, Davis's Kidney Wax, or Improved Golden Wax. Well-grown plants of these types, heavy with their long, waxy pods, are a joy for gardeners. If you pick the pods as soon as they lighten in color, up until they are fully grown, they will still be sweet and tender. The bushes will keep producing heavily until the frost takes them out. This should always be done, whether you need the beans or not. They can be canned, sold, given away, or fed to pigs—anything is better than letting the vines stop producing. If you want to save seeds for next year's planting, which is worthwhile with such high prices, it’s a good idea to set aside a row or part of a row for seeds, letting the first pods ripen to establish the plant’s early bearing characteristic.

In planting beans good soil should be chosen, but beans do not need rich soil as many other garden vegetables do. It is said that beans will grow on soil that will not grow anything else; this is rather an extreme statement, but it is a fact that they will thrive where more exacting plants will languish; this is accounted for by the fact that the bean is a legume and so empowered to draw an important part of its nourishment from the air in the form of nitrates, which it stores in little pockets or nodules on its roots and so has a larder of its own to draw on.

When planting beans, it's important to choose good soil, but beans don't require rich soil like many other garden vegetables. It's said that beans can grow in soil that won't support anything else; while that might sound extreme, it's true that they can thrive where pickier plants struggle. This is because beans are legumes, which means they can take in a significant part of their nutrients from the air as nitrates. They store these nitrates in small pockets or nodules on their roots, giving them their own food supply.

Open a drill a couple of inches deep and drop the beans at regular intervals two or three inches apart, or they may be planted three or four in hills, six inches apart; cover and tramp down the rows and draw the rake lightly over them. Except for the distance at which they are planted, all beans require practically the same treatment; they should never be cultivated when wet or gathered125 or handled in any way; the rule should be to give them a wide berth in wet weather; working among them when wet is the cause of the disfiguring rust that makes them unsalable and in bad cases uneatable. Wardwell's and Davis's Kidney Wax are as free from rust as any of the white podded varieties and are the best selections the amateur gardener can make.

Open a drill a couple of inches deep and drop the beans at regular intervals, two or three inches apart, or you can plant three or four in hills, six inches apart. Cover them and press down the rows, then lightly rake over them. Apart from the planting distance, all beans generally need the same care; they should never be cultivated when wet or collected or handled in any way. The rule is to avoid them in wet weather; working among them when they're wet can cause the disfiguring rust that makes them unsellable and, in severe cases, inedible. Wardwell's and Davis's Kidney Wax are as resistant to rust as any of the white-podded varieties and are the best choices for the amateur gardener.125

For those who like a green podded bean the Stringless Green Pod is a fine variety and very popular with gardeners. Giant Stringless, Green Pod and Longfellow make up a trio of beans hard to beat.

For those who enjoy green podded beans, the Stringless Green Pod is a great variety and quite popular among gardeners. Giant Stringless, Green Pod, and Longfellow form a trio of beans that's hard to beat.

Boston pea bean or navy bean is the best selection for baked beans; these should be allowed to ripen their pods until quite dry. The usual method of harvesting is to wait until all the beans are ripe in late summer and harvest by pulling the vines and piling in heaps until dry; this is not an economical way, however, nor specially adapted to the small home garden; a better way is to gather the pods as fast as they ripen, storing them in a dry, airy place until ready to shell126 easily; if this is done many more beans will be produced and there will be no loss from the earlier beans shelling out on the ground as they will when the vines are left for the entire crop to ripen. Usually it will be necessary to go over the vines about four times but the result will be a much greater quantity of beans and all in the finest possible condition; when left until all are ripe it will be found that there is a considerable amount of mouldy or injured beans.

Boston pea beans or navy beans are the best choice for baked beans; allow the pods to ripen until they're completely dry. The typical harvesting method involves waiting until all the beans are ripe in late summer, then pulling the vines and piling them in heaps until they dry. However, this isn’t a cost-effective approach, nor is it particularly suited for a small home garden. A better method is to collect the pods as they ripen, storing them in a dry, airy place until you're ready to shell them easily. If you do this, you'll end up with many more beans, and you won’t lose the earlier beans that drop to the ground when you leave the vines for the whole crop to ripen. Usually, you’ll need to go over the vines about four times, but the result will be a lot more beans, all in the best possible condition. When you wait for all the beans to be ripe, you’ll find that there are quite a few mouldy or damaged beans.

Lima beans require somewhat different treatment from the string or navy bean; to begin with they require a much richer soil and the ground should be well manured and a supplementary dressing of hen manure, rabbit droppings or ashes about the plants when well established will be of much benefit; they require more room in the row than the string beans, not less than eight or nine inches with the rows two feet apart; the beans should be planted about two inches deep, setting the seed with the eyes downward and covering and tramping the rows. Rather late planting is advisable for limas than127 for string beans and for very early beans a few may be started in the hotbed and transplanted in the open ground about the twentieth of May at the north—add or subtract a week for each hundred miles north or south. The bean, having no tap root and a broad spread of lateral roots, is one of the easiest plants to transplant and by starting a hundred plants in the hotbed a much earlier crop will be obtained; that will be filling up the time while the open air planting is coming forward.

Lima beans need a bit different care compared to string or navy beans. First, they need richer soil, and the ground should be well-fertilized. Adding some chicken manure, rabbit droppings, or ashes around the plants once they're established will be very helpful. They need more space in the row than string beans—at least eight or nine inches apart, with the rows two feet apart. Plant the beans about two inches deep, placing the seeds with the eyes facing down, and then cover and pack the rows down. It's better to plant limas a bit later than string beans, and for very early beans, you can start a few in a hotbed and transplant them outdoors around May 20th in the north—adjust by a week for every hundred miles north or south. Since the bean has no taproot and a wide spread of lateral roots, it’s one of the easiest plants to transplant. By starting a hundred plants in the hotbed, you can get an earlier crop that will fill the time while the outdoor planting grows.

Another very important advantage in starting seed in the hotbed is the larger per cent. of plants obtained; if good seed is used every one may be depended upon to grow. The hotbed also affords protection from the enemies that destroy the lima, one of the most destructive being hens, and it will be wise to assure Biddy's absence from the garden until the beans are showing their first leaves as the succulent looking white seeds that first break through the ground have an irresistible attraction for her and she will walk along the rows, nipping off every pod as it appears;128 this seems to be due to curiosity as she does not eat, but drops them on the ground; I have seen whole plantings of lima beans destroyed in this way. English sparrows also are known to destroy the tops. String beans do not offer the temptation that the limas do so are seldom molested.

Another big advantage of starting seeds in a hotbed is that you get a higher percentage of plants. If you use good seeds, you can expect every one to grow. The hotbed also provides protection from pests that can harm the lima beans, with hens being one of the most destructive. It's best to keep Biddy away from the garden until the beans show their first leaves, because the tempting white seeds that first emerge from the ground attract her. She will walk along the rows, picking off every pod as it appears; this seems to be out of curiosity since she doesn’t eat them but just drops them on the ground. I’ve seen entire plantings of lima beans wiped out this way. English sparrows are also known to damage the tops. String beans aren’t as attractive to them as limas, so they usually get left alone.

For the home garden the bush limas are to be preferred as they take less room and are easier to handle. The Improved Fordhook Bush Lima is one of the best varieties if not the best. The New Wonder Bush Lima is highly recommended. Beans may be planted every two weeks for succession up to August. Dry limas that remain on the vines in fall may be used for cooking in winter. Limas are not injured by light frosts as much as the other varieties of beans; the pods cuddling under the thick foliage are protected and one can frequently gather a mess after the frost has cut everything else in the garden; the thick pods, too, are a protection to the beans inside.

For home gardens, bush limas are preferred because they take up less space and are easier to manage. The Improved Fordhook Bush Lima is one of the best, if not the best, varieties available. The New Wonder Bush Lima is also highly recommended. Beans can be planted every two weeks for continuous harvests until August. Dry limas that remain on the vines in the fall can be used for cooking in the winter. Limas are less affected by light frosts than other varieties of beans; the pods tucked under the dense foliage are protected, and you can often harvest some after a frost has destroyed everything else in the garden. The thick pods also protect the beans inside.

If it is desired to grow pole limas set the poles129 four feet apart each way and plant five or six beans to each hill and thin to three when the plants are up; when the plants have reached the top of the pole pinch out the top; add a spadeful of well-rotted manure to each hill before planting, mixing it thoroughly with the soil. Carpenteria is about the best of the pole limas and Early Leviathan Lima is another good sort. Wire netting may be used in place of poles and will be found more convenient and economical. Treating the beans with farmogerm, Mulford or other culture is advisable.

If you want to grow pole lima beans, set the poles129 four feet apart in every direction and plant five or six beans in each spot, thinning them to three once they’ve sprouted. When the plants reach the top of the pole, pinch off the tops. Before planting, add a spadeful of well-rotted manure to each spot and mix it thoroughly with the soil. Carpenteria is one of the best pole limas, and Early Leviathan Lima is another good variety. You can use wire netting instead of poles, which may be more convenient and cost-effective. It's a good idea to treat the beans with farmogerm, Mulford, or another culture.

CABBAGE

Cabbage

For early cabbage sow seed in the hotbed or in flats in the house and transplant to the open ground in May. Cabbage are not injured by light frosts and can go into the ground earlier than most other garden stuff; usually the early sorts are selected for first planting but the late and winter sorts will, if started in heat, do about as well as the early; it is largely a matter of handling. The Late Flat Dutch is an excellent130 sort for the first planting as it is a very sure header, giving large, flat heads of the best quality. In twelve years' experience in growing this variety I have never found a diseased plant nor, except in a year of very exceptional weather, a soft head. They keep well over winter and are altogether a very satisfactory all round cabbage.

For early cabbage, sow seeds in a hotbed or in trays indoors and transplant them outside in May. Cabbages can handle light frosts and can be planted earlier than most other garden crops; usually, the early varieties are chosen for the first planting, but the late and winter varieties, if started in warmth, will perform nearly as well as the early ones; it mostly comes down to how they're managed. The Late Flat Dutch is an excellent choice for the first planting because it reliably produces large, flat heads of the best quality. In twelve years of growing this variety, I’ve never encountered a diseased plant, nor, except during an exceptionally unusual year, a soft head. They store well through the winter and are an overall very satisfying variety of cabbage.

In transplanting the plants from the hotbed to the open ground all but the upper pair of leaves should be removed and these may have the upper half clipped; this gives the roots a chance to establish themselves before they are called upon to support top growth. Set the plants about two feet apart each way, or the rows two feet apart and the plants twenty inches; the nearer distance is tenable if one raises rabbits as the lower leaves may be removed and fed to them, thus giving the plants more room; they should close up the gaps between them when fully grown as this shades the ground and conserves moisture—an important feature in a dry season. The ground should be kept well cultivated and free from weeds as long as work can be carried on131 among them and when the cultivator can no longer be used the scuffle-hoe can be introduced under and between them without injury to the leaves. In hoeing or cultivating draw the earth up towards the plants.

When you move the plants from the hotbed to the open ground, remove all but the top pair of leaves, and you can trim the upper half of those leaves. This allows the roots to establish themselves before they have to support new growth. Space the plants about two feet apart in every direction, or keep the rows two feet apart with the plants set twenty inches apart. You can plant them closer if you're raising rabbits, as you can take off the lower leaves and feed them to the rabbits, giving the plants more space. They will fill in the gaps when fully grown, which helps shade the ground and retain moisture—essential in a dry season. Keep the ground well-cultivated and free from weeds for as long as possible, and when you can no longer use the cultivator, a scuffle hoe can be used under and between the plants without damaging the leaves. When hoeing or cultivating, pull the soil up towards the plants.

When the heads are filled out and hard and it is not desired to gather them they may be kept from splitting by pulling the roots loose on one side and bending them over.

When the heads are fully developed and firm, and you don't want to harvest them yet, you can prevent them from splitting by loosening the roots on one side and bending them over.

The principal enemy of the cabbage is the white butterfly and its offspring—the green caterpillar. There are many ways of combating this pest; the most effectual way, early in the season is dusting with Paris green mixed with flour. A convenient way to apply is to take a quart Mason jar, take the lid, remove the porcelain lining and punch the top full of holes, fill the can with flour mixed with one teaspoon of fresh Paris green and sift over the plants while wet with dew at the first appearance of the pest; this should not be used after the heads have formed; after this sprinkling with salt and working it in between the loose leaves of the head is132 often effectual. Dusting with dry earth sometimes has a deterrent effect on the worms.

The main enemy of cabbage is the white butterfly and its larvae—the green caterpillar. There are several ways to tackle this pest; the most effective method early in the season is to dust with Paris green mixed with flour. A handy way to apply it is to take a quart Mason jar, remove the lid, take out the porcelain lining, and punch holes in the top. Fill the jar with flour mixed with one teaspoon of fresh Paris green and sprinkle it over the plants while they are still wet with dew at the first sign of the pest; this should not be used after the heads have formed. After this, sprinkling with salt and working it between the loose leaves of the head is132often effective. Dusting with dry earth can sometimes deter the worms.

The grey aphis is another most troublesome pest; this comes so insidiously that the plants are well infested before their presence is suspected. Spraying with kerosene emulsion is sometimes effectual if the heads are not too far advanced. Spraying with zenoleum—a tablespoonful to two quarts of water—will kill every louse it touches and by its odor discourage any intending arrivals, but this should not be used where the heads are at all advanced, though a hard rain would rid the plants of the odor of both zenoleum and kerosene. Soapsuds, especially whale oil and nicotine, are suggested and hand picking of worms is not without its value. Spraying with hot water 140° is effectual and safe and cleanses and stimulates the plants.

The gray aphid is another pesky pest; it appears so stealthily that the plants are heavily infested before anyone even notices. Spraying with kerosene emulsion can be effective if the flowers aren't too far along. Using zenoleum—a tablespoon per two quarts of water—will kill every bug it touches and its scent will deter any new arrivals, but it shouldn't be used if the flowers are at all advanced, although a heavy rain would wash away the scent of both zenoleum and kerosene. Soapsuds, especially those made from whale oil and nicotine, are recommended, and hand-picking worms can also be helpful. Spraying with hot water at 140° is effective and safe, and it cleans and invigorates the plants.

Cut worms are very destructive to cabbage when first set out; their depredations may be guarded against by enclosing the stem of the plant in a band of stiff paper when planting; this133 should go into the ground an inch and extend up the stem two or three inches. Strewing poisoned bait along the intended rows for a night or two is suggested but this is a dangerous practice where there is poultry at liberty; baiting after the plants are set is often successful, too, but the best safeguard is to have a good supply of surplus plants in the hotbed. The rows should be looked over the first thing in the morning after planting to discover what plants have been cut and wherever a plant is missing the worm should be looked for, and when found killed; this is really the most satisfactory way of eradicating the pest. The worm never goes more than two or three inches from the plant and will be found somewhere just below the surface of the ground, usually under some bit of roughage that makes a little hollow. If there is a piece of sod or clover-land near the garden the cut worms will usually begin their work from that side and if a planting of cabbage is made a few days in advance of other plants this will serve as a trap for the worms and134 hunting and killing them for a few days will make the planting safe for the tomatoes, eggplants, and peppers.

Cutworms are very harmful to cabbage when it's first planted; you can protect against their damage by wrapping the base of the plant in a band of stiff paper during planting. This should be buried an inch into the soil and extend two or three inches up the stem. Sprinkling poisoned bait along the planned rows for a night or two is an option, but it's risky if there are free-range chickens around. Baiting after the plants are in place can also work well, but the best prevention is to have extra plants ready in the hotbed. It's essential to check the rows first thing in the morning after planting to see which plants have been cut. Wherever a plant is missing, look for the worm and kill it; this is really the most effective way to get rid of the pest. The worm typically stays within two or three inches of the plant and can be found just below the surface of the ground, often hiding under some debris that creates a little hollow. If there's a patch of sod or clover near the garden, cutworms will usually start from that area. If you plant cabbage a few days before other crops, it can act as a trap for the worms, and spending a few days hunting and killing them will help keep your tomatoes, eggplants, and peppers safe.

A little nitrate of soda sprinkled around the plants is a great incentive to growth.

A bit of soda nitrate sprinkled around the plants really helps them grow.

For winter cabbage sow seed in the open ground in May and transplant into permanent rows as soon as large enough, giving the plants more room than early cabbage. Late Flat Dutch, Wakefield, Danish Roundhead and Dutch Winter or Hollander are all good sorts which will prove good keepers and sellers.

For winter cabbage, sow seeds in the open ground in May and transplant them into permanent rows as soon as they're big enough, giving the plants more space than you would for early cabbage. Late Flat Dutch, Wakefield, Danish Roundhead, and Dutch Winter or Hollander are all good varieties that will be great for storage and selling.

If in setting out plants of winter cabbage it is found that there are more plants than are needed, they may be allowed to remain where they are and given a little protection, such as boards, cornstalks or evergreens, and can be used for setting out the following spring.

If you find that you have more winter cabbage plants than you need when planting them, you can just leave them where they are and give them some protection, like boards, cornstalks, or evergreens, and you can use them for planting next spring.

CAULIFLOWER

CAULIFLOWER

Require the same general treatment as cabbage. They are set somewhat closer in the rows and cultivated the same as cabbage; however, for the best135 results it is desirable to transplant the cauliflower from the hotbed into cold frames as soon as they have their second pair of leaves, setting three inches apart each way and as soon as they resume growth giving a light application of nitrate of soda, then transplant when the weather is favorable. Cauliflower are quite hardy and not injured by early fall frosts, making steady growth until severe cold weather and many heads that have failed to fill during the fall will fill out finely in November.

Require the same general treatment as cabbage. They are planted a bit closer in the rows and cared for just like cabbage; however, for the best135 results, it's a good idea to transplant the cauliflower from the hotbed into cold frames as soon as they develop their second pair of leaves, spacing them three inches apart in all directions. Once they start growing again, you should apply a light dose of nitrate of soda, and then transplant them when the weather is suitable. Cauliflowers are quite resilient and can handle early fall frosts, continuing to grow steadily until the severe cold sets in. Many heads that didn't fill out during the fall will do so nicely in November.

As soon as the curd, or head, forms and has made a little size the leaves must be drawn over it and tied to exclude rain and light; this must be done when the plants are perfectly dry and the weather clear, a sunny day about noon is the best time for the work. If tied up when wet or damp the heads will rot. If not tied up growth will start in the heads, they will turn purple and green and be unfit for food. It is upon the successful tying up of the cauliflower that its successful culture depends; like the cabbage it requires a rich, well fertilized soil and136 applications of nitrate of soda once a week during the growing season will hasten the development of the head; wood ashes, too, are beneficial.

As soon as the curd, or head, forms and has grown a bit, the leaves need to be pulled over it and tied down to keep out rain and light. This should be done when the plants are completely dry and the weather is clear; a sunny day around noon is the best time for this task. If you tie them up when they’re wet or damp, the heads will rot. If they aren’t tied up, growth will start in the heads, causing them to turn purple and green, making them unfit for food. The successful tying up of the cauliflower is crucial for its successful growth; like cabbage, it needs rich, well-fertilized soil, and applying nitrate of soda once a week during the growing season will speed up the head's development; wood ashes are also helpful.

The insect enemies of the cauliflower are those of the cabbage, but they molest it in a somewhat lesser degree. The remedies to be employed are the same.

The insect pests that affect cauliflower are the same as those that affect cabbage, but they tend to cause slightly less damage. The solutions to address them are the same.

There are two important varieties of cauliflower—the Snowball and the Dry Weather. The former is a poor cropper in dry seasons unless artificial irrigation can be supplied. The Dry Weather Cauliflower, on the other hand, seems to be at its best in a dry season and will give fine heads when the other fails. As one can not forecast what the rainfall of any given season will be it is well to be provided against any contingency by planting both varieties of cauliflower; by this forethought one will be assured of a crop whatever the weather and the snowballs that failed to head during August and September may come on in October and November and give a late crop for pickling.

There are two main types of cauliflower—the Snowball and the Dry Weather. The Snowball has a low yield in dry seasons unless it receives artificial irrigation. In contrast, the Dry Weather Cauliflower thrives in dry seasons and produces great heads when the Snowball fails. Since you can't predict the rainfall for any given season, it's wise to plant both varieties to guard against any surprises. This way, you'll be guaranteed a crop regardless of the weather, and the Snowballs that didn’t produce heads in August and September might still come through in October and November, offering a late harvest for pickling.

In the majority of gardens cauliflowers are137 grown exclusively for pickling; this is a mistake for there is no vegetable more delicate and toothsome than this; it outclasses cabbage and when fried in batter or breaded with egg and cracker crumbs, it affords a most excellent substitute for meat, indeed, it is really more acceptable when no meat dish accompanies it; for this reason—its desirability as a table vegetable—special pains should be taken to produce early heads, by starting in hotbeds, transplanting into cold frames, fertilizing with nitrate and giving special attention to thorough cultivation throughout its growing period. If water can be supplied, a thorough drenching of the roots once or twice a week, followed by a cultivation the following morning to restore the dust-mulch, will be of much benefit.

In most gardens, cauliflowers are137 grown only for pickling, which is a mistake because no vegetable is more delicate and delicious than this one. It surpasses cabbage, and when fried in batter or coated with egg and cracker crumbs, it makes an excellent substitute for meat. In fact, it's often more enjoyable when there's no meat dish alongside it. Because of its appeal as a vegetable, extra effort should be made to grow early heads by starting in hotbeds, transplanting into cold frames, fertilizing with nitrate, and paying special attention to thorough cultivation throughout its growth period. If water can be provided, thoroughly soaking the roots once or twice a week, followed by cultivation the next morning to restore the dust-mulch, will be very beneficial.

The green cabbage worm is sometimes very troublesome on the heads and leaves of cauliflowers and one should watch for the presence of the white cabbage butterfly as this will indicate whether one may expect an attack of caterpillars. If once the worms have become established spraying with hot water of from 130° to 140° will exterminate138 all with which it comes in contact, as worms are far more sensitive to hot water than are the plants which they infect.

The green cabbage worm can be quite a nuisance on the heads and leaves of cauliflowers, so it's important to keep an eye out for the white cabbage butterfly, as its presence indicates a potential caterpillar infestation. Once the worms have settled in, spraying them with hot water at 130° to 140° will kill all the worms it touches since they are much more sensitive to hot water than the plants they infect.138

CORN

CORN

Is one of the most profitable of the garden's offerings; there is, practically, no loss connected with it; a delicious vegetable for the table in its green state, fresh from the stalk; it is equally welcome when it appears sweet and toothsome from the can in winter or, conserved in a dried state, is soaked and cooked the same as fresh corn. There is no waste in the unused corn that remains ungathered on the stalks for it may be saved for seed another year or fed to the poultry, while the stalks, cut and cured, make excellent feed for cow, horse or rabbits. Cut while green and made into ensilage it is the best substitute for green feed in winter for any animal that eats green food. Much green feed for stock may be secured from the corn patch in summer by removing all the side shoots that do not bear ears and feeding them to the pigs or rabbits. This139 is of benefit to the corn as it allows all the strength of the plant to go into the ears instead of being wasted in growing useless foliage.

Is one of the most profitable offerings from the garden; there’s basically no loss associated with it. It’s a delicious vegetable for the table when fresh and green, picked straight from the stalk. It’s just as welcome in winter when it comes from the can, sweet and tasty, or when it’s dried, soaked, and cooked like fresh corn. There's no waste with the corn left unharvested on the stalks since it can be saved for seeds the next year or fed to the poultry. The stalks, when cut and cured, make great feed for cows, horses, or rabbits. When cut while still green and made into silage, it’s the best substitute for fresh feed in winter for any animals that eat green food. You can get a lot of green feed for livestock in the summer by removing all the side shoots that don’t bear ears and feeding them to the pigs or rabbits. This139 benefits the corn because it allows all the plant's energy to go into the ears instead of being wasted on growing unnecessary foliage.

Corn is a gross feeder and requires a deep, mellow, fertile soil, well enriched with barnyard manure. Clover sod well manured and ploughed will give the maximum amount of corn, but any good soil if fertilized will produce good corn.

Corn is a heavy feeder and needs deep, soft, fertile soil that’s well enriched with barnyard manure. Clover sod that has been well manured and plowed will yield the highest amount of corn, but any decent soil that’s fertilized will produce good corn.

Corn is somewhat tender and should not be planted until the ground is warm, but in the small home garden where a small amount of seed is required a little risk may be run by planting early in May and replanting if an early frost catches the crop. It is not, as a general thing, the spring frost that does the most damage, especially with field corn, it is the late frost that catches the corn still in the milk that does the damage, so that anything that pushes the crop along to maturity before danger of fall frost is of moment. This is one reason why heavy fertilizing is so important,—it speeds up the maturing of the corn and gets it beyond the danger line in time.

Corn is a bit delicate and shouldn’t be planted until the soil is warm, but in a small home garden where only a little seed is needed, it's worth the risk to plant early in May and replant if an unexpected frost hits. Generally, it's not the spring frost that causes the most harm, especially with field corn; it’s the late frost that affects corn still in the milk stage that causes major damage. Therefore, anything that helps the crop mature before the risk of fall frost is significant. This is why heavy fertilizing is so crucial—it speeds up the corn's maturation and helps it get past the danger zone in time.

Sweet corn may be planted in drills or in hills,140 but I prefer the hill method. Even in a small patch that can be worked but one way with a horse or cultivator—there is always a hoe to take care of the space between the hills.

Sweet corn can be planted in rows or in clumps,140 but I prefer the clump method. Even in a small area that can only be worked one way with a horse or cultivator, there's always a hoe to manage the space between the clumps.

The rows should be three feet apart and the corn in hills three feet apart, or if planted in rows make the rows four feet apart and the corn twelve inches apart. Drop several kernels in each hill and thin to three plants to a hill when the corn is up and danger of frost is passed. One pound of seed will plant a hundred hills or from one hundred and fifty to two hundred feet of row. If hard frost threatens just as the corn is coming through the ground, throwing earth over it with a hoe will often afford sufficient protection to save it.

The rows should be three feet apart, and the corn in hills three feet apart. If planted in rows, make the rows four feet apart and the corn twelve inches apart. Drop several kernels in each hill and thin to three plants per hill once the corn has sprouted and the danger of frost has passed. One pound of seed will plant a hundred hills or about one hundred fifty to two hundred feet of row. If a hard frost threatens just as the corn is starting to come up, using a hoe to cover it with soil can often provide enough protection to save it.

In a small garden patch it is not much work to stick a mark of some kind in the center of each hill and if this is done cultivation can commence at once and a hard crust be prevented from forming; this will hasten the germination of the seed and insure the elimination of weeds at the start.

In a small garden patch, it doesn't take much effort to put a marker of some kind in the center of each mound. If you do this, you can start cultivating right away and prevent a hard crust from forming; this will speed up seed germination and help get rid of weeds from the beginning.

There are many varieties of sweet corn advertised,141 each seedsman having his own favorite specialty, but there are really but two that one need take into consideration—the old, reliable Stowell's Evergreen and the new Bantam Evergreen—a cross between that exceptionally sweet corn, the Golden Bantam, and Stowell's Evergreen, and combining the great qualities of both parents, the delicious sweetness and tenderness and earliness of Bantam with the more generous size and more tender skin of the Evergreen. Plant these two varieties and have the best to be obtained in sweet corn. One planting of Evergreen will give big generous ears of late corn, while for succession the Bantam may be planted every two weeks up to July.

There are many types of sweet corn advertised,141 with each seed seller having their own favorite, but there are really just two you need to consider—the classic Stowell's Evergreen and the newer Bantam Evergreen. This new variety is a cross between the exceptionally sweet Golden Bantam and Stowell's Evergreen, combining the best traits of both: the delicious sweetness and tenderness of Bantam along with the larger size and tender skin of Evergreen. If you plant these two varieties, you'll get the best sweet corn available. A single planting of Evergreen will produce large, generous ears of late corn, while for a continuous harvest, you can plant Bantam every two weeks up until July.

When the corn is a couple of feet high it will be well to go through the patch and remove all suckers or barren stalks so as to conserve all the food and moisture for the production of ears.

When the corn is a couple of feet high, it's a good idea to go through the patch and remove all suckers or non-productive stalks to save all the food and moisture for growing ears.

In addition to barnyard manure, wood ashes is an important fertilizer for corn, supplying the potash so essential to its growth; this may be put in the hill at the time the corn is planted or may142 be scattered about the plants after they are up and hoed into the soil; it should not be applied in connection with manure as it has a tendency to release the ammonia content of the manure, but should be applied independently. Droppings from the poultry house may be used in the growing of the corn crop, placing about a teacupful in a hill, but not in contact with the seed. Several barrels of dry droppings should be saved during the winter for just this extra fertilizing in the kitchen garden.3

Besides barnyard manure, wood ashes are an important fertilizer for corn, providing the potash that's essential for its growth. You can add them to the soil when planting the corn or scatter them around the plants after they’ve sprouted and worked into the soil. They shouldn't be used with manure since they can release the ammonia in the manure; instead, apply them separately. Poultry droppings can also be used for growing corn, adding about a teacupful in each hill, but not in direct contact with the seed. It's a good idea to save several barrels of dry droppings over the winter for extra fertilizing in the kitchen garden.1423

Corn is very easily transplanted so that where there is a failure of the corn to germinate in some hills and an over supply in others, the extra plants may be lifted carefully with the spade or trowel and slipped into holes prepared for them where wanted. Last season I had an interesting experience transplanting an entire row of corn, over a foot high. A row of okra had been planted across the garden but failed to appear on schedule time and was finally given up and corn planted in its place; the corn came up and had made several inches of top when to my surprise the okra appeared. It was evident that the two robust plants could not occupy successfully the same ground and I did not wish to sacrifice either, so an equal number of hills were prepared in another part of the garden, fertilized with poultry droppings and ashes and the hills of corn, then over a foot high, lifted, one hill at a time, on a spade and carried and slipped into their holes, and not a plant seemed aware that anything had happened to it; certainly there was no check to the growth, but, by144 lifting on the spade with plenty of soil adhering, the roots were not disturbed in the least.

Corn is really easy to transplant, so if some spots fail to germinate while others have an abundance, you can carefully lift the extra plants with a spade or trowel and move them to where they're needed. Last season, I had an interesting experience transplanting an entire row of corn that was over a foot tall. A row of okra was planted across the garden but didn’t come up as expected, so I gave up on it and planted corn instead. The corn grew several inches before, to my surprise, the okra finally emerged. It was clear that the two strong plants couldn’t thrive in the same spot, and I didn't want to lose either, so I prepared an equal number of hills in another area of the garden, fertilized with poultry droppings and ashes. I carefully lifted each hill of corn, which was then over a foot tall, one at a time with a spade and moved them to their new holes. Not a single plant seemed to notice anything had changed; there was definitely no halt in growth. By lifting with the spade while keeping plenty of soil around the roots, they weren’t disturbed at all.

Corn has so few enemies that it is scarcely worth while to consider them, the principal one being earworm—a small worm that eats out the tip of the ear; they can be poisoned by dropping Paris green in the axils of the leaves when the plants are young.

Corn has so few enemies that it's hardly worth considering them, with the main one being the earworm—a small worm that eats the tip of the ear. They can be eliminated by spreading Paris green in the leaf axils when the plants are young.

CUCUMBERS

Cucumbers

For slicing for the table should be planted as soon as the ground is warm or a few seed may be planted on pieces of inverted sod, or in pots or paper bands in the hotbed and transplanted into the open ground about corn-planting time or when the danger of frost is past; this will give several weeks' start on outdoor planting and will also make the plants practically immune from attacks of the striped beetle. Beetles will of course appear, but by the time of their arrival the plants will have attained sufficient size to withstand their attacks, particularly will this be the case if protected with dry earth, sifted over the145 leaves to roughen them or the application of tobacco tea or tobacco stems or leaves about the plants.

For slicing, you should plant as soon as the ground warms up, or you can plant a few seeds on pieces of turned sod, or in pots or paper bands in the hotbed, and then transplant them into the open ground around the time you plant corn or after the risk of frost has passed. This will give the plants several weeks' head start compared to outdoor planting and will make them nearly immune to striped beetle attacks. Beetles may still show up, but by the time they do, the plants will be large enough to withstand their attacks, especially if you protect them with dry soil, spread over the leaves to roughen them up, or by using tobacco tea or placing tobacco stems or leaves around the plants.

Pieces of sod, about four inches square, should be cut and placed earth-side up close together in the warmest part of the hotbed and several seeds planted on each piece and the whole covered with a fourth of an inch of earth. When ready to transplant lift the pieces on to a flat board or carrier and slip into a hole prepared for them with as little disturbance as possible and press the soil firmly about them so that the air will not get underneath and dry the roots.

Pieces of sod, roughly four inches square, should be cut and laid grass-side up, placed closely together in the warmest section of the hotbed. Plant several seeds on each piece and cover everything with a quarter of an inch of soil. When you're ready to transplant, lift the pieces onto a flat board or carrier and slide them into a prepared hole, minimizing disturbance as much as you can. Firmly pack the soil around them to prevent air from getting underneath and drying out the roots.

There is not too much room for vine vegetables of any sort in the small kitchen garden and if desired the early cucumbers for table use may be grown on netting. The Japanese cucumber is a climbing sort especially addicted to this manner of growth, bears fine, large fruit of most excellent quality and the position on the wire, away from the soil and damp ground, produces a most attractive fruit, free from the yellow blanching that is present on the cucumbers grown on the146 ground. Last year among a number of these Japanese plants there occurred one or two plants of a snow white cucumber that I found very superior in crispness and flavor to the green fruit. Owing to early frost I was not able to secure seed of this interloper. Mr. Burbank's cucumber seed did not produce a single white seed. This is not, however, a climbing sort, but all vines which have tendrils can be grown on netting. Squash even will grow, bear and seem to enjoy the experience.

There isn’t much space for climbing vegetables of any kind in the small kitchen garden, but if you want to, you can grow early cucumbers for eating on netting. The Japanese cucumber is a climbing variety that thrives this way, produces large, high-quality fruit, and being on the wire, away from the soil and damp ground, results in very appealing fruit that's free from the yellowing that often happens with ground-grown cucumbers.146 Last year, among several of these Japanese plants, I found one or two snow white cucumbers that were much crisper and tastier than the green ones. Unfortunately, due to early frost, I couldn't get seeds from this unusual find. Mr. Burbank's cucumber seeds didn’t yield a single white cucumber. However, this isn’t a climbing variety, but all vines with tendrils can be grown on netting. Even squash will grow, produce fruit, and seem to enjoy the process.

Cucumbers when grown for the table should be gathered as soon as of slicing size, whether wanted or not, as allowing the fruit to ripen on the vine stops production; this is especially imperative in the case of pickles which must be removed as soon as of sufficient size to use. The small pickles of an inch and a quarter or less should be gathered first and larger pickles left until the latter part of the season as gathering the cucumbers while very small increases the vine's productiveness and there will always be enough overlooked to supply the larger sort of pickles.

Cucumbers grown for eating should be picked as soon as they reach slicing size, whether needed or not, because letting them ripen on the vine stops further production. This is especially important for pickles, which should be harvested as soon as they are big enough to use. Small pickles, about an inch and a quarter or smaller, should be harvested first, while larger ones can be left until later in the season. Picking cucumbers when they are very small boosts the vine's productivity, and there will always be enough that are missed to provide for the larger pickles.

Cucumbers for pickling should not be sown before June and may be planted at any time after that up to mid-July. Plant in hills from four to six feet apart spading in a spadeful of manure in each hill; thin out to three or four plants in a hill when danger of bugs is past; spray with Bordeaux Arsenate of Lead three ounces to a gallon of water, when in danger of beetles or blight; the combination of lead and Bordeaux mixture covers both emergencies.

Cucumbers for pickling shouldn’t be planted before June and can be sown anytime after that until mid-July. Plant them in hills spaced four to six feet apart, adding a shovelful of manure to each hill; once the risk of bugs is gone, thin to three or four plants per hill. Spray with Bordeaux mixture and Arsenate of Lead at three ounces per gallon of water when you’re at risk of beetles or blight; the mix of lead and Bordeaux takes care of both problems.

Keep the ground well cultivated as long as the vines will allow; pinch off the ends of all the vines when about a foot long to induce branching; when the plants begin to bloom notice the presence or absence of bees. Some years the curcubita family fails signally in setting fruit and this is usually caused by lack of pollenization by the bees. On a small patch one may substitute cross-pollenization by carrying pollen from one blossom to another with a camel's hair brush or by shaking the blossoms against each other, but a preventative measure would be to raise a colony or two of bees. Sometimes the presence of some148 plant especially attractive to bees will lure them away from the melons, cucumbers and like plants. Two years ago the presence of a patch of vetch proved so attractive to the bees that it was not until late in the season that the flowers of a nearby patch of winter squash and citron received sufficient attention to set any fruit. The air was resonant with the hum of bees, but not one was to be seen on the vines.

Keep the ground well-tilled as long as the vines allow; pinch off the ends of all the vines when they are about a foot long to encourage branching; when the plants start to bloom, pay attention to whether or not bees are around. Some years, the cucurbit family struggles to set fruit, usually due to a lack of pollination from bees. In a small area, you can manually pollinate by transferring pollen from one blossom to another with a camel's hair brush or by shaking the blossoms together, but a better solution would be to keep one or two colonies of bees. Sometimes, having a plant that particularly attracts bees can draw them away from melons, cucumbers, and similar plants. Two years ago, a patch of vetch attracted so many bees that it wasn't until late in the season that flowers from a nearby patch of winter squash and citron got enough attention to set any fruit. The air was filled with the buzz of bees, but not one was seen on the vines.

There are any number of good cucumbers to choose from for general crop. Early Fortune has proved a favorite in my garden. It is a good bearer and quality and appearance are all that could be asked. The Davis Perfect, Arlington White Spine, and Westerfield's Chicago Pickle are all satisfactory sorts to grow.

There are plenty of great cucumbers to pick from for general gardening. Early Fortune has become a favorite in my garden. It produces well, and its quality and appearance are top-notch. The Davis Perfect, Arlington White Spine, and Westerfield's Chicago Pickle are all excellent varieties to grow.

EGGPLANTS

Eggplants

Are very tender when small, so they should be started in the warmest part of the hotbed, or in a warm, sunny window in flats. When they have grown their first pair of true leaves they should be transplanted—if at all crowded, into149 other flats or other rows in the hotbed, setting them two inches apart each way and grown on, given sufficient water and occasional cultivation, but not sufficient to disturb the roots, until time to plant out in the open ground; this should not be done until the nights and soil are warm as a check at this time will mean a late setting of fruit.

Are very delicate when they’re small, so you should start them in the warmest part of the hotbed or in a warm, sunny window in flats. Once they’ve grown their first pair of true leaves, they should be transplanted—if they’re crowded—into149 other flats or other rows in the hotbed, spacing them two inches apart in every direction. Keep them growing with enough water and occasional care, but don’t disturb the roots too much, until it’s time to plant them outside. This shouldn’t be done until the nights and soil are warm, as an early check in growth will result in a late fruit harvest.

Eggplants are considered one of the difficult things to grow; personally I have seldom lost a plant except at the hands, or mouth rather, of cutworms, but I have frequently gotten an unsatisfactory setting of fruit. However, one must have certain standards to adhere to in their culture, the first of which is heat in all the early stages of their growth, the second, rich soil, with occasional supplementary dressings of nitrate of soda, and thorough cultivation.

Eggplants are considered one of the harder plants to grow; personally, I’ve rarely lost a plant except to cutworms, but I've often ended up with a disappointing amount of fruit. However, it’s important to stick to certain standards when growing them. The first is that they need heat during all the early stages of growth, the second is rich soil, with occasional extra applications of nitrate of soda, and consistent cultivation.

The plants require considerable room when mature and should not be set closer than three feet each way.

The plants need a lot of space when they're fully grown and shouldn't be planted closer than three feet apart in any direction.

The principal enemy of the eggplant is the potato beetle which is quite as partial to egg150 plants as to potatoes. Spraying with Paris green or arsenate of lead is effectual before the fruit has formed but hand picking is more satisfactory and where only a few plants are grown for family use, quite as practical. It is not the mature beetle that eats the leaves but the young beetles that hatch from the mass of yellow eggs laid on the under side of the leaves, so at the first appearance of the old bugs search should be made for the mass of eggs and these as well as the parent beetle destroyed; by this means no beetles can get a start. It is always good practice to avoid, as far as possible, the use of poisonous insecticides in the kitchen garden; while their use may do no harm on vegetables that have not set their fruit, there is always a tendency to grow careless in their use and to continue it after the safety zone has been passed.

The main enemy of the eggplant is the potato beetle, which is just as fond of eggplants as it is of potatoes. Spraying with Paris green or arsenate of lead works well before the fruit has formed, but handpicking is more effective and just as practical if you're only growing a few plants for family use. It’s not the adult beetles that eat the leaves but the young ones that hatch from the bunch of yellow eggs laid on the underside of the leaves. So, as soon as you see the adult bugs, you should look for the eggs and destroy both them and the parent beetles; this way, no beetles can get a foothold. It's always a good idea to avoid using poisonous insecticides in the kitchen garden whenever possible; while using them might not harm vegetables that haven’t set their fruit yet, there's always a risk of becoming careless and continuing to use them after it's no longer safe.

New York eggplant is the standard variety for all but the northern states; it is of the highest type, spineless and of a rich, purple color, large and borne in abundance; it is not as early as Black151 Beauty, long a favorably known sort, which is about twelve days earlier; Very Early Dwarf Purple is still earlier and Black Pekin is another good sort. In the northern states the earliest variety should be planted, but the eggplant has one remarkable characteristic—for a plant so tender in its early stages it seems, when fully grown, almost immune to cold and early frost, and I have often gathered unharmed fruit after severe frost had cut most everything else in the garden. Throwing some loose stuff—clover hay, corn fodder or weeds—over the plants on a cold night will usually save them and a spell of warm weather that usually follows the first hard frosts may bring on immature fruit to a usable size. It requires about five months from the sowing of the seed to produce usable fruit so it will readily be seen that it is important to start the seed in the hotbed, greenhouse or in the house and to take every precaution to grow them on rapidly without any check.

New York eggplant is the standard type for all but the northern states; it is top-quality, spineless, and has a rich purple color, large size, and is produced in abundance. However, it isn't as early as Black151 Beauty, which has been well-known for a long time and is about twelve days earlier. Very Early Dwarf Purple is even earlier, and Black Pekin is another good variety. In the northern states, the earliest variety should be planted, but eggplant has one remarkable feature—for a plant that is tender in its early stages, when fully grown, it seems almost immune to cold and early frost. I've often harvested unharmed fruit after severe frosts killed most other plants in the garden. Covering the plants with some loose material—like clover hay, corn fodder, or weeds—on a cold night usually protects them, and a warm spell that often follows the first hard frosts can promote immature fruit to a usable size. It takes about five months from sowing the seeds to produce usable fruit, so it's clear that starting seeds in a hotbed, greenhouse, or indoors is crucial, along with taking every precaution to ensure they grow quickly without any setbacks.

OKRA

Okra

So well and favorably known in the southern states, is practically unknown in the north, except as its acquaintance is made in the chicken gumbo of the commercial soups and a few other vegetable and meat preparations. It should, however, form a staple vegetable of the kitchen garden and, once its merits are known, would, doubtless, become as popular north as it is south. Though its use is chiefly associated with the preparation of soup it has other, equally acceptable, uses. It is an excellent addition to hash, adding both richness and flavor; added to tomatoes it imparts a fuller, richer flavor and used alone, fried, is excellent. A small amount of meat, with the addition of potatoes, okra and onion, the last two fried tender before adding the meat and potatoes, makes a most satisfying one-dish meal.

So well and favorably known in the southern states, it's practically unknown in the north, except for its appearance in chicken gumbo of commercial soups and a few other vegetable and meat dishes. It should definitely be a staple vegetable in kitchen gardens and, once people know its benefits, it would surely become as popular in the north as it is in the south. While its use is mainly tied to soup preparation, it has other equally good uses. It’s a great addition to hash, enhancing both richness and flavor; mixed with tomatoes, it gives a fuller, richer taste, and when fried on its own, it’s delicious. A small amount of meat, along with potatoes, okra, and onion (the last two fried until tender before adding the meat and potatoes), creates a very satisfying one-dish meal.

It is one of the easiest vegetables to grow, requiring the same culture as corn; making the rows three feet apart, and planting the seed in drills153 and thinning to ten inches apart in the row. Perkin's Long Pod is the best general variety and the pods should be gathered when half grown, whether needed or not, to prevent checking the production.

It’s one of the easiest vegetables to grow and needs the same care as corn: space the rows three feet apart and plant the seeds in drills153, thinning them to ten inches apart in the row. Perkin's Long Pod is the best overall variety, and you should pick the pods when they’re half grown, whether you need them or not, to keep production flowing.

PEPPERS

Peppers

Like the eggplant require much heat in starting and should be given the warmest position in the hotbed—about the central sash, towards the front—so that they may not be overtopped by other, taller growing plants, for the pepper grows but slowly for the first few weeks of its existence.

Like eggplants, peppers need a lot of heat to get started and should be placed in the warmest spot in the hotbed—around the central sash, towards the front—so they aren’t overshadowed by other taller plants, since peppers grow slowly during the first few weeks of their life.

The seed germinates slowly, taking from two to three weeks to appear; it may be sown thinly in drills, or broadcasted, covering sufficiently to conceal the seed and placing paper over the plot to prevent drying out. If started in flats in the house the plants may be transplanted into other flats when they have made one pair of true leaves; if not crowded in the hotbed they may be allowed154 to remain where they are or be transplanted into fresh rows, setting them a couple of inches apart each way.

The seed takes its time to germinate, usually about two to three weeks before it shows up. It can be sown in rows or scattered over the ground, ensuring it's covered enough to hide the seed. To keep the soil from drying out, you can place paper over the area. If you start the seeds in containers indoors, you can move the plants to other containers once they have one set of true leaves. If they aren’t crowded in the hotbed, you can either leave them where they are or move them into new rows, spacing them a couple of inches apart.

They should not be planted out in the open ground until the soil and nights are warm as a check at this time will mean late fruiting and failure to ripen. Make the rows from twenty-four to thirty inches apart and set the plants eighteen inches apart in the row. Before planting spade a forkful of old manure or henhouse droppings into each hill for the pepper is a heavy feeder and requires good soil.

They shouldn't be planted in the open ground until the soil and nights are warm because waiting too long will result in late fruiting and failure to ripen. Space the rows twenty-four to thirty inches apart and place the plants eighteen inches apart in the row. Before planting, mix a forkful of aged manure or chicken droppings into each spot because peppers are heavy feeders and need good soil.

Protect the plants on cold nights if frost threatens and keep the ground well cultivated.

Protect the plants on cold nights if there's a risk of frost and make sure to keep the ground well-cultivated.

If the peppers are to be grown in the north such varieties as mature their fruits early should be selected. Crimson Giant is about the earliest; the plants are large and bear abundantly. The Upright New Sweet Pepper is also early, a good bearer and its habit of fruiting—holding the fruit erect instead of drooping—makes it very easy to gather; it is a medium-size pepper, just right for stuffing for mangoes and a desirable size to155 pickle for winter use in salads; if the top and bottom are removed it leaves a broad ring which is very lovely when filled with salad and garnished with parsley and well-blanched endive; the parts removed may be used as pickles or added to mixed or chopped pickles.

If you're planning to grow peppers in the north, you should choose varieties that ripen their fruits early. Crimson Giant is one of the earliest; the plants are big and produce lots of peppers. The Upright New Sweet Pepper also matures early, is a reliable producer, and its unique way of growing—keeping the fruit upright instead of hanging down—makes it really easy to harvest. It's a medium-sized pepper, perfect for stuffing for mangoes and a great size to pickle for winter salads. When you cut off the top and bottom, it leaves a wide ring that's beautiful when filled with salad and garnished with parsley and well-blanched endive. The pieces you cut off can be used as pickles or added to mixed or chopped pickles.

Magnum Dulce is an excellent sort for baking when stuffed with meat or force-meat or fried. Pimento is a new salad pepper very attractive in shape and form but does not do so well in the north as some of the older sorts; however, some seasons it can be successfully grown and a few plants set out will be well worth taking pains with. In the warmer sections and in favorable seasons at the north one can grow the fiery Tabasco Pepper from which the Tabasco sauce of commerce is made and so prepare one's supply of this expensive relish; it requires early planting and great attention to heat and sunshine to succeed.

Magnum Dulce is a great option for baking when stuffed with meat or meat alternatives, or when fried. Pimento is a new salad pepper that looks really appealing but doesn’t thrive as well in the north compared to some older varieties; however, in some seasons, it can be successfully grown, and a few plants are definitely worth the effort. In warmer areas and during favorable seasons up north, you can grow the spicy Tabasco Pepper, which is used to make the commercial Tabasco sauce, allowing you to prepare your own supply of this pricey condiment. It needs to be planted early and requires a lot of heat and sunshine to thrive.

The little Celestial Peppers are so very attractive when grown in pots that florists offer them along with other greenhouse stuff; they can156 just as well be grown in one's own hotbed or house and make welcome gifts to the young housekeeper or the city dweller who does not have the advantage of a country garden to furnish condiments and relishes. The little plants can be grown in pots from the start or small plants in the garden can be taken up and potted and will hold their tiny scarlet fruit all winter, producing more as the first is removed. For the sunny kitchen or dining room window nothing is prettier or more ornamental than a window box filled with these little red peppers, parsley and endive.

The small Celestial Peppers look really appealing when grown in pots, so florists sell them along with other greenhouse plants. They can156 also be easily grown in your own hotbed or home and make great gifts for new housekeepers or city dwellers who don’t have the luxury of a country garden for fresh spices and toppings. These little plants can be started in pots, or you can take small plants from the garden, pot them up, and they'll keep their tiny red fruit all winter, producing more as you pick the first ones. For a sunny kitchen or dining room window, there's nothing prettier or more decorative than a window box filled with these little red peppers, parsley, and endive.

Cayenne peppers can be grown for the making of pepper vinegar; the seeds are used for this, being separated from the husk when dry and put into quart bottles filled with white wine vinegar; in a few weeks the vinegar will be ready for use. The hulls may be saved and put in cans of mixed pickles, a few hulls adding a piquant hotness; they may also be added to pickled onions and to cauliflower.

Cayenne peppers can be grown to make pepper vinegar. The seeds are separated from the husk when dry and placed in quart bottles filled with white wine vinegar. After a few weeks, the vinegar will be ready to use. The husks can be saved and added to jars of mixed pickles, as a few husks provide a spicy kick; they can also be added to pickled onions and cauliflower.

As peppers are extremely sensitive to frost every effort should be made to bring them along157 rapidly so that they may mature their fruit in season; light application of nitrate will assist and the use of poultry droppings in preparing the bed will be of use; in dry weather a wetting with water from the laundry will do much good. If it is possible to pipe or carry water with hose to the garden a shallow trench may be made along the pepper rows and water turned in as required. Protecting with papers or other covering on frosty nights may save a crop but the covering should not rest on the plants as the frost will likely strike through; hay or corn fodder would be likely to give better protection.

Since peppers are highly sensitive to frost, every effort should be made to help them grow quickly157 so they can mature their fruit in season. Using a light application of nitrate will help, and incorporating poultry droppings into the soil will be beneficial. During dry weather, watering with laundry water will be very helpful. If it's possible to pipe or carry water with a hose to the garden, you can dig a shallow trench along the pepper rows and water as needed. Covering the plants with paper or other materials on frosty nights can help save the crop, but make sure the covering doesn’t touch the plants, as frost could get through. Using hay or corn fodder might offer better protection.

TOMATOES

TOMATOES

Are one of the most important vegetables of the home garden not alone as a summer vegetable, but also as an important part of the winter cuisine, more tomatoes being canned for winter use than all other vegetables.

Are one of the most important vegetables in the home garden, not just as a summer vegetable, but also as a key ingredient in winter cooking, with more tomatoes being canned for winter use than any other vegetable.

Tomatoes require no expert care to grow; they are one of the easiest managed of vegetables, but they do require heat for starting if they are to158 be got to bearing in season to give a bountiful crop before frost. It takes about four months from the time the seed is sown to produce a crop of the main crop tomato. Some of the very early sorts will come into bearing early in July; unfortunately, however, these very early varieties lack the full, delicious flavor of the later fruit. The tomatoes should not be set in the open ground until all danger of frost is over; they should be given rich soil and a spadeful of manure added to the hill in which they are planted. If the plants are allowed to lie on the ground make the hills four feet apart each way, but if they are to be staked or trained on a trellis three feet will give sufficient room; both methods of culture have advantages; the latter keeps the fruit up off the ground, makes pickling easy and perhaps produces more perfect fruit; less room is required for growing the same number of plants than would be required for the former method. The first method has this advantage,—the plants suffer least in a dry season as the vines shade the ground, and prevent the excessive evaporation159 of moisture and require, accordingly, less cultivation; then the branches will root wherever they touch the soil and so draw moisture and nourishment from it; a much larger amount of fruit is produced from plants allowed to rest on the ground, and if straw is laid under the plants it will keep them from getting soiled and rotting if the season is wet.

Tomatoes don't need expert care to grow; they're one of the easiest vegetables to manage, but they do need warmth to start if you want to get a good harvest before frost hits. It takes about four months from when you plant the seeds to get a main crop of tomatoes. Some of the really early varieties will start producing by early July; unfortunately, these early types don't have the full, delicious flavor of the later ones. You shouldn't plant tomatoes in the ground until there’s no more risk of frost; they need rich soil with some manure mixed into the planting mound. If you're letting the plants sprawl on the ground, space the hills four feet apart in every direction, but if you plan to stake them or train them on a trellis, three feet will be enough space; both methods have their pros. The latter keeps the fruit off the ground, makes harvesting easier, and probably produces better-quality fruit; it also requires less space to grow the same number of plants compared to the former method. The first method has its advantage too—the plants handle dry seasons better because the vines shade the ground, reducing moisture loss and requiring less maintenance; the branches will root wherever they touch the soil, soaking up moisture and nutrients. You'll get a much larger yield from plants that rest on the ground, and if you lay straw under them, it will keep them clean and prevent them from rotting in wet weather.

Where the plants are to be staked a six foot stake should be set at each hill at the time the plant is set and the plant tied to it at intervals as it grows. Pinch off the top as soon as it reaches the top of the stake and remove all but a few of the side branches, pinching in those that remain to make a shapely plant. I think the rack system of training is preferable to the stake.

Where the plants need to be staked, a six-foot stake should be put in at each spot when the plant is planted, and the plant should be tied to it at intervals as it grows. Pinch off the top as soon as it reaches the top of the stake and remove all but a few of the side branches, pinching the ones that are left to create a nice shape. I believe the rack system of training is better than staking.

A long trellis or rack, about eighteen inches or two feet high and two feet wide, is constructed of narrow strips of wood and placed over the tomato rows, the plants growing up through the center of the frame and spreading out on top of it. This gives more bearing surface and the vines do not need to be tied to the wood; such a trellis160 can be used for several years in succession if stored away in a dry place when not in use. The wire tomato supports on the market are good but costly and quite as satisfactory ones can be made at home from the wire or wooden hoops from barrels, stapled to stout stakes sharpened at one end. About three hoops should be used and three stakes. These, too, can be stored away for future use so that the first outlay is the last for a number of years.

A long trellis or rack, about eighteen inches to two feet high and two feet wide, is made from narrow strips of wood and set over the tomato rows, with the plants growing up through the center of the frame and spreading out on top. This increases the surface area and the vines don’t need to be tied to the wood; such a trellis160 can last for several years if stored in a dry place when not in use. The wire tomato supports available in stores are good but expensive, and equally effective ones can be made at home using wire or wooden hoops from barrels, attached to sturdy stakes sharpened at one end. You should use about three hoops and three stakes. These can also be stored for future use, making the initial investment the only one needed for several years.

In setting out the plants from the hotbed select those with the stoutest stalks; it is not material whether they have grown tall or keeled over in the hotbed or not if the plant appears vigorous with a robust stem. If one has a good supply of plants to draw from one can discard all but the best.

In taking the plants out of the hotbed, choose the ones with the strongest stems; it doesn’t matter if they’ve grown tall or fallen over in the hotbed as long as the plant looks healthy with a sturdy stem. If you have plenty of plants to choose from, you can get rid of all but the best.

Produce
The reward for your hours of enjoyable work

Prepare the hills in advance by forking in a forkful of old manure; if the plants are long, make a trench two-thirds the length of the stem with a deeper hole at one end; place the root in the hole and bend the top carefully into the trench, turning the tip up straight so that it stands four161 or five inches above the ground, draw in a part of the earth and fill the trench with water, fill in the remainder of the soil, pressing snugly, make a fine dry mulch about the plant and the work is done. The long stem buried in the trench will send out roots all its length and will have a much greater root system than a plant set with just a few inches of stem in the ground; such a plant set in such a way, invariably lives and makes a strong plant, but to plant it with only the root part under the ground would only invite the loss of the plant.

Prepare the hills beforehand by mixing in a scoop of old manure. If the plants are tall, dig a trench that’s two-thirds the length of the stem, with a deeper hole at one end. Place the root in the hole and carefully bend the top into the trench, making sure the tip is upright so that it stands four161 or five inches above the ground. Add some soil around it and fill the trench with water, then cover with the remaining soil, pressing it down firmly. Create a fine dry mulch around the plant, and your work is complete. The long stem buried in the trench will develop roots along its entire length, resulting in a much larger root system compared to a plant that has only a few inches of stem underground. A plant positioned this way will inevitably thrive and grow strong, whereas planting it with just the root portion under the soil would likely lead to its demise.

The plot should be looked over the following morning to see if cut worms have cut off any of the plants during the night and to restore, if necessary, the dust-mulch.

The plot should be checked the next morning to see if cutworms have snipped any of the plants during the night and to refresh the dust mulch if needed.

Plants grown on stakes or trellises are more susceptible to frost than those grown on the ground as the soil holds the heat and it is an easy matter to cover a considerable number of plants at one time with tarpaulin or even newspapers and this should be done when there is even a slight prospect of frost. The thermometer should be162 watched in the late fall and if it is going down towards nightfall those plants which one wishes to save should be protected.

Plants grown on stakes or trellises are more vulnerable to frost than those planted in the ground because the soil retains heat. It's relatively easy to cover a large number of plants at once using tarps or even newspapers, and this should be done at the slightest chance of frost. The thermometer should be162 monitored in late fall, and if temperatures drop as evening approaches, any plants you want to save should be protected.

After the first three hard frosts there are usually two or three weeks of fine weather and it is at this time that tomatoes and other perishable garden stuff command the highest price and those who are fortunate enough to have a surplus to sell can realize a neat little sum that will more than pay for the trifling trouble involved.

After the first three hard frosts, there are usually two or three weeks of nice weather, and during this time, tomatoes and other perishable garden goods fetch the highest prices. Those who are lucky enough to have extra produce to sell can make a nice little profit that more than covers the minor effort involved.

I am often asked which is the best tomato for the home garden and have no hesitation in saying that, all things considered, there is no better tomato raised, for an all season crop, than the Dwarf, Improved Stone. There are earlier tomatoes and larger tomatoes. The Early Detroit is earlier, but not very much so, and it does not compare in size and quality with the Stone. Ponderosa is a much larger tomato but the quality is not up to the Stone nor is its freedom from cracking and irregularity to be compared to the Stone. Then the Stone is such a satisfactory plant in the way of foliage and stem, so heavy and rugged,163 the thick, crumply leaves are very distinctive and the plants always command attention even when not in fruit. The fruit is quite as large as best requirements demand and it slices beautifully for the table and canned is entirely free from that peculiar taste that characterizes the commercial tomato.

I get asked a lot about the best tomato for home gardens, and I confidently say that, considering everything, there’s no better tomato for a year-round harvest than the Dwarf, Improved Stone. Sure, there are earlier and larger tomatoes out there. The Early Detroit is earlier, but not by much, and it can't match the size and quality of the Stone. Ponderosa is a much bigger tomato, but its quality doesn’t measure up to the Stone, nor is it as resistant to cracking and irregularities. Plus, the Stone plant itself is impressive with its strong, sturdy foliage and stem; the thick, crinkly leaves make it stand out, even when it’s not bearing fruit. The fruit size meets the highest standards, slices beautifully for serving, and when canned, it lacks that strange taste often found in store-bought tomatoes.

Earliana is the earliest and the most popular sort of the extra early tomato and a few plants for early use will be worth while. There is also a new ball-shaped tomato, New Globe, that is good for slicing as it gives a number of fine slices just alike instead of the three usually obtained from a flat tomato, only one—the middle—being perfect. So if one wants a variety in the garden one may plant with entire confidence the Dwarf Stone and Vaughan's Improved New Stone and add for variety the Earliana and the New Globe.

Earliana is the earliest and most popular type of extra-early tomato, and planting a few for early use is definitely worthwhile. There’s also a new round-shaped tomato, New Globe, which is great for slicing because it provides several perfect slices, unlike the typical three from a flat tomato, where usually only the middle slice is good. So, if you want variety in your garden, you can confidently plant Dwarf Stone and Vaughan's Improved New Stone, adding Earliana and New Globe for more diversity.

SQUASH
ENGLISH MARROW

SQUASH
ENGLISH MARROW

In sections where the eggplant does not do well, or where one lacks the skill to succeed with164 it a very satisfactory substitute will be found in the English marrow; this is a bush form of the vegetable marrows and occupies about as much ground as an eggplant. The vine sorts are such rampant growers that they require a garden to themselves or at least a walled enclosure, but they are very profitable to grow as they produce enormously and the fruit is excellent fried like eggplant; few, if any, persons would be able to distinguish between them and the difference, if any, would be in favor of the marrow.

In areas where eggplants struggle to grow, or if you're not skilled at growing them, a very good alternative is the English marrow. This is a bush variety of the vegetable marrow and takes up about the same space as an eggplant. The vine varieties grow so aggressively that they need their own garden or at least a walled area, but they're really worth growing because they produce a lot, and the fruit is great when fried like eggplant. Most people wouldn’t be able to tell the difference, and if there is one, it would likely favor the marrow.

Rich warm soil is required for all the squash family and the bush varieties are no exceptions. Give in addition to the usual manuring of the garden a good forkful of manure in each hill. Space the hills four feet apart each way and plant several seeds in each hill to provide for the appetite of the squash bugs which make no exception in favor of bush varieties; when danger of bugs is past the plants should be thinned to three or four plants in a hill.

Rich, nutrient-rich soil is needed for all types of squash, and bush varieties are no exception. In addition to the regular fertilizing of the garden, add a good forkful of manure to each planting mound. Space the mounds four feet apart in all directions and plant several seeds in each mound to account for the squash bugs, which don’t discriminate against bush varieties. Once the risk of bugs has passed, thin the plants down to three or four in each mound.

To repel the squash vine borer scatter a handful165 of tobacco dust about the plants and at the first appearance of wilt in the leaves examine the stems carefully for the point where the worm found entrance and either slit the stalk sufficiently to uncover the worm or run a wire up the stalk until he is encountered and killed; then if possible, bury the wound in soil so that the branch may be saved; if, however, there is too much injury done or the wound is too high up it will be best to remove that part of the branch; at the same time the rest of the plants should be carefully examined for other signs of injury, and the ground inspected for larvæ. For yellow striped beetle and blight spray early and repeatedly with Bordeaux arsenate of lead mixture.

To get rid of the squash vine borer, scatter a handful165 of tobacco dust around the plants. When you first notice wilting leaves, carefully check the stems for the spot where the worm entered. Either slit the stalk enough to expose the worm or use a wire to reach the worm and kill it. Then, if you can, cover the wound with soil to help save the branch. If the damage is too severe or the wound is too high up, it’s best to cut off that part of the branch. At the same time, thoroughly check the rest of the plants for any other signs of damage, and inspect the ground for larvae. For yellow-striped beetles and blight, spray early and repeatedly with a Bordeaux arsenate of lead mixture.

The marrows are finer eating when only two-thirds grown. They should be peeled, sliced and covered with salt for an hour, then rinsed and drained and breaded and fried the same as eggplant, or, if preferred, may be cooked and mashed like summer squash. They are good either way.

The marrows taste better when they're only two-thirds grown. You should peel them, slice them, and cover them with salt for an hour, then rinse, drain, and bread them, frying them just like eggplant. Alternatively, they can be cooked and mashed like summer squash. They’re delicious either way.

TURNIPS

Turnips

Have an important place in the garden as they may be used as a catch crop almost any time during summer. Wherever vacancies occur in rows of early vegetables and it is inconvenient owing to lack of seed or other reasons to replant with the same vegetable, then one may have recourse to the ever useful turnip and fill in the hiatus with that. Turnips are at their best when young and tender, about three inches in diameter, and a constant succession can be assured by planting in this way or where the first crop of vegetables has been removed. For fall and winter use sowings may be made in July and August. Success frequently results from sowing among the sweet corn just before the last cultivation; with favorable weather a crop will mature before severe freezing weather and turnips are the better for a touch of frost.

Turnips hold an important place in the garden as they can be used as a catch crop almost anytime during the summer. Whenever there are gaps in rows of early vegetables and it’s inconvenient to replant the same vegetable due to lack of seeds or other reasons, you can turn to the ever-reliable turnip to fill in the gap. Turnips are at their best when they’re young and tender, around three inches in diameter, and you can ensure a steady supply by planting this way or where the first crop of vegetables has been harvested. For fall and winter use, you can sow seeds in July and August. Success often comes from sowing among the sweet corn just before the last cultivation; with favorable weather, the crop will mature before the harsh freezing weather, and turnips actually improve with a touch of frost.

Open a shallow drill with the hand plough or by dragging the corner of the hoe along the row and scatter the seed very thinly. If the planting167 is in full rows make them a foot or fifteen inches apart. As soon as the plants are large enough, thin to stand three or four inches apart; this is important as fine, smooth roots cannot be produced if crowded.

Open a shallow trench with a hand plow or by dragging the edge of the hoe along the row and scatter the seeds very lightly. If you're planting in straight rows, keep them a foot or fifteen inches apart. As soon as the plants are big enough, thin them out so they stand three or four inches apart; this is crucial because healthy, smooth roots can't develop if they're overcrowded.

The turnip maggot is the greatest enemy the turnip has and it sometimes appears in gardens that have been entirely free from it and I think is brought in the seed. It is the same little worm that works its tortuous way through and around the radish and, although I have never grown a wormy radish, still last season an entire planting of turnips were ruined by this pest, so as I was quite sure it was not previously present in the soil I am forced to the conviction that I bought and planted it together with the seed. Moral—Buy seed of reliable dealers and examine carefully for worm holes before planting.

The turnip maggot is the biggest threat to turnips, and it sometimes shows up in gardens that were previously free of it. I believe it comes in with the seed. It's the same little worm that twists and turns through radishes, and although I’ve never had a wormy radish, I lost an entire crop of turnips to this pest last season. Since I’m pretty sure it wasn’t in the soil before, I’m convinced I brought it in with the seed. Moral—Buy seeds from trustworthy sources and carefully check for wormholes before planting.

The Purple-top White Globe is a most popular market sort. Snowball is a white variety of fine appearance and early maturity and if used young is very tender and sweet. Early White Egg is another good early sort and for those who168 like a yellow turnip the Yellow Globe is a satisfactory sort. It makes a larger root than the others and is excellent both for table use and for feeding stock. It is a dependable root for feeding Belgian or other hares as it keeps well, buried in earth in a frost-proof cellar, and when gathered for winter use the tops can be piled in a cool place and fed to the bunnies. Of course this applies to all turnips which are grown for winter use.

The Purple-top White Globe is one of the most popular market varieties. Snowball is a white type with a great appearance and early maturity; when harvested young, it’s very tender and sweet. Early White Egg is another good early option, and for those who prefer a yellow turnip, the Yellow Globe is a solid choice. It produces a larger root than the others and is excellent for both table use and livestock feeding. It’s a reliable root for feeding Belgian or other hares since it stores well when buried in a frost-proof cellar. When harvested for winter use, the tops can be kept in a cool place and fed to the bunnies. This applies to all turnips grown for winter use.

The planting of turnips, radishes and cabbage should be watched closely for signs of the root maggot. The presence of a little, dark-colored fly about the plant is always cause for suspicion and when seen it will be well to take precautionary measures. As tobacco in any form is obnoxious to most insect life, the strewing of tobacco dust on the ground will usually drive these flies away and prevent the laying of eggs, but the trouble is that they may have already laid eggs before being discovered. Hot water poured around the plant in sufficient quantity to soak the soil an inch or so will often destroy the169 eggs and larvæ too. Soaking the ground with Paris green solution—a teaspoonful of the poison to a large watering pot of water is sufficient and the solution must be kept stirred to prevent its settling—will destroy the maggot, but it may also poison the turnip so is not to be recommended; also, if the worm has attacked the radish or turnip and rendered it unsightly and unfit for the table, tobacco and hot water then are the two safest and most reliable applications and the hot water over the tobacco is especially effective.

The planting of turnips, radishes, and cabbage should be monitored closely for signs of root maggot. If you notice a small, dark fly around the plant, it’s a good idea to be cautious and take preventive measures. Since tobacco in any form repels most insects, sprinkling tobacco dust on the ground usually helps keep these flies away and prevents them from laying eggs. However, the problem is that they might have already laid eggs before you noticed. Pouring hot water around the plant to soak the soil for about an inch can often kill the169 eggs and larvae as well. Soaking the ground with a Paris green solution—mixing a teaspoon of the poison in a large watering can of water is enough, and be sure to keep the solution stirred to prevent it from settling—will eliminate the maggot, but it may also poison the turnip, so it’s not recommended. Additionally, if the worm has damaged the radish or turnip, making it unappetizing and unsuitable for eating, tobacco and hot water are the two safest and most reliable treatments, with the hot water poured over the tobacco being especially effective.

Disks made from heavy tar paper are sold for the protection of cabbage and cauliflower plants and may be cheaply made at home and though a little more trouble to apply about turnips and radishes still are practical and better than losing the crop. The disks may be either round or square and should be about three inches in diameter with a hole the size of the stem in the center and a slit extending out from the hole on one side to the edge; this allows the disk to be slipped around the stem of the plant. A leather punch170 which will cut a quarter of an inch hole may be used and the slit made to the center of the disk and the hole then cut. The disk lies flat on the ground and prevents the entrance of the fly to deposit the egg and the tar paper repels.

Disks made from heavy tar paper are sold to protect cabbage and cauliflower plants, and you can easily make them at home. Although they require a bit more effort to apply around turnips and radishes, they're still practical and much better than losing your crop. The disks can be round or square, around three inches in diameter, with a hole in the center big enough for the stem and a slit extending from the hole to the edge; this allows the disk to be slipped around the plant's stem. A leather punch170 that cuts a quarter-inch hole can be used, and then you can make the slit to the center of the disk and cut the hole. The disk lies flat on the ground, preventing the fly from laying eggs, and the tar paper acts as a repellent.

3 Corn should not be planted in single rows for this reason:—when the corn blooms the pollen is carried from ear to ear, and from plant to plant. If a single row is planted broadside to the prevailing wind, the pollen is dissipated and the corn remains unfertilized and produces no ears. Three or more rows insures against this loss of pollenization. If only a limited number of hills are to be planted it will be better to plant them in blocks rather than in one or two long rows. Corn that matures at different seasons should not be planted in parallel single rows as the result would be the same as one single row—the corn not blooming at the same time. Again, corn of two different sorts should not be in adjoining, parallel rows, rather should each kind be planted in blocks to avoid hybridizing. Where it is necessary to give a long strip of land to the sweet corn it may be divided into blocks, especially if the strip extends from north to south, as the prevailing winds are quite uniformly from east or west and there is little trouble with cross pollenizing from south to north.

3 Corn shouldn't be planted in single rows for this reason: when the corn blooms, the pollen moves from ear to ear and from plant to plant. If a single row is planted facing the prevailing wind, the pollen gets blown away, leaving the corn unfertilized and unable to produce ears. Planting three or more rows helps prevent this loss of pollen. If you’re only planting a few hills, it’s better to plant them in blocks instead of one or two long rows. Corn that matures at different times shouldn’t be planted in parallel single rows because the result will be the same as a single row— the corn won’t bloom at the same time. Also, corn of two different types shouldn’t be in adjoining, parallel rows; instead, each type should be planted in blocks to avoid hybridization. If you need to dedicate a long strip of land to sweet corn, it can be divided into blocks, especially if the strip runs north to south, since the prevailing winds usually blow from east to west, minimizing the risk of cross-pollination from south to north.


CHAPTER X
Vine vegetables

CUCUMBERS

Cucumbers

For main crop or pickle cucumbers should be planted in the open ground from June until the middle of July; at this season there is less danger of damage from the striped cucumber beetle and the stink bug, both serious enemies of the vine family; but even so late in the season it will be well to take the easy precaution of strewing tobacco stems or dust on the hill about the plants.

For main crop or pickling cucumbers, it’s best to plant them in the ground from June to mid-July. During this time, there’s less risk of damage from the striped cucumber beetle and the stink bug, which are both major threats to the vine family. Still, even this late in the season, it’s a good idea to sprinkle some tobacco stems or dust around the plants as a simple precaution.

For pickles plant in hills four to six feet apart each way and keep the entire surface of the ground clean with frequent cultivation. Hoeing about the hills and running the hand cultivator with the scuffle-hoe attachment between the hills will be sufficient, but no weeds should be allowed to make a start, as once the vines have begun to172 cover the ground it will be difficult to eradicate the weeds and the vines must not be tramped on or handled unnecessarily. When the plants are a foot long pinch out the ends of the branches to induce branching and check too rampant a growth. Pull up all but three or four plants when all danger of bugs is past. Keep a close watch for root maggot, borer, and wilt. Spray with Bordeaux arsenate of lead mixture at the first appearance of wilt, and continue once a week until the fruit appears; after that it will not be safe to use the poison.

For pickles, plant in hills four to six feet apart each way and keep the entire surface of the ground clean with frequent tilling. Hoeing around the hills and using a hand cultivator with a scuffle-hoe attachment between the hills will be enough, but no weeds should be allowed to start, as once the vines have begun to172cover the ground, it will be hard to get rid of the weeds, and the vines must not be stepped on or handled unnecessarily. When the plants are a foot tall, pinch off the ends of the branches to encourage branching and control excessive growth. Remove all but three or four plants when the risk of bugs is gone. Keep a close eye out for root maggots, borers, and wilt. Spray with a Bordeaux arsenate of lead mixture at the first signs of wilt, and continue once a week until the fruit appears; after that, it will not be safe to use the pesticide.

Gather the pickles frequently—every other day if bearing well; do not allow fruit to grow large or ripen on the vines if grown for pickles as this will check production.

Gather the pickles regularly—every other day if they're doing well; don't let the fruit get big or ripen on the vines if you're growing them for pickles, as this will slow down production.

One of the best table varieties is Early Fortune—also a desirable pickling variety. Arlington, White Spine and Davis's Perfect are excellent table sorts and Chicago Pickle—a standard pickle sort—and Long Green, or Jersey Pickle and the Westerfield's Chicago Pickle are all excellent types for growing for pickles.

One of the best table varieties is Early Fortune—also a great choice for pickling. Arlington, White Spine, and Davis's Perfect are excellent table varieties, while Chicago Pickle—a classic pickling variety—and Long Green, or Jersey Pickle and Westerfield's Chicago Pickle are all top picks for growing pickles.

CITRON

Citrus fruit

Used for preserving and for sweet pickles, require the same treatment as melons and squash. Seed may be planted directly in the open ground or started on pieces of sod in the hotbed; this is preferable as the fruit sometimes fails to ripen in a short season and unless fully ripened on the vine the preserves have a watery taste, no matter how carefully prepared. Citron make about the same length of vine as the watermelon so should be planted from five to six feet apart, and when the vines are a foot in length the tips should be pinched off to induce branching and check too straying a habit. Keep cultivated, remembering that the dust-mulch is the best garden insurance and spray with Bordeaux mixture against blight and use tobacco dust liberally as a preventive measure against the yellow striped beetle and the squash bug.

Used for preserving and making sweet pickles, these require the same treatment as melons and squash. Seeds can be planted directly in the soil or started on pieces of sod in a hotbed; the latter is preferable since the fruit sometimes doesn't ripen in a short season. If the fruit isn't fully ripened on the vine, the preserves can taste watery, no matter how carefully they're prepared. Citron vines grow to about the same length as watermelon vines, so they should be planted five to six feet apart. When the vines are a foot long, pinch off the tips to encourage branching and prevent them from sprawling too much. Keep the area cultivated, as a dust mulch is the best garden insurance, and spray with Bordeaux mixture to prevent blight. Use tobacco dust generously as a preventive measure against the yellow striped beetle and the squash bug.

MUSK MELONS

Musk melons

In securing seed for growing musk melons one should take into consideration the climate and174 the length of the growing season. Certain varieties of melon require certain climatic conditions and will not give satisfaction if these are lacking. Melons that are adapted to the climate of Colorado—like the Rocky Ford, the Honey Dew and the like seldom do well in the east and middle west where early frosts are apt to find the fruit still immature, but there are many other excellent varieties well adapted to these sections. The Extra Early Hackensack, the Osage, the Irondequoit and others can be grown with satisfaction and all are especially fine and large.

When securing seeds for growing musk melons, you should consider the climate and the length of the growing season. Some melon varieties need specific climatic conditions and won’t thrive if those conditions aren’t met. Melons that thrive in Colorado—like the Rocky Ford and Honey Dew—often don’t do well in the East and Midwest, where early frosts can catch the fruit still unripe. However, there are many other excellent varieties that are well-suited to these regions. The Extra Early Hackensack, Osage, Irondequoit, and others can be grown successfully, and all of them are especially large and high quality.

As a general thing I think a large melon, sweetness and flavor being equal, preferable. One of the sweetest melons with which I am acquainted is the old Cassaba; this is the largest musk melon grown—a perfect specimen being from twelve to fifteen inches in length and as much as one wishes to carry up from the garden, but the delicate green flesh is melted sugar, nothing less, with a flavor all its own.

As a general rule, I think a large melon is better, assuming sweetness and flavor are the same. One of the sweetest melons I know of is the old Cassaba; it's the largest musk melon grown—a perfect one is about twelve to fifteen inches long and as much as you can carry from the garden. The delicate green flesh is like melted sugar, nothing less, with a unique flavor all its own.

For an early crop of melons one should start the seed in the hotbed on squares of sod, using175 plenty of seed so that one will have an assured stand, and transplant when all danger of frost is past. If one only grows a few hills it will well repay one for the extra trouble to cover the hills with shallow boxes, covered with wire netting or mosquito netting. The boxes should not be more than four inches high and about twelve inches square, or thereabouts; if removed as soon as danger of bugs is past and stored in a dry place they will last for a number of years. Empty biscuit boxes sawed in two make good frames or strips of three inch lumber can quickly be converted into frames by any one handy with hammer and saw.

To get an early crop of melons, you should start the seeds in a hotbed on pieces of sod, using175 plenty of seeds to ensure a good stand, and transplant when the risk of frost is gone. If you're only planting a few hills, it's worth the extra effort to cover them with shallow boxes that have wire netting or mosquito netting. The boxes shouldn’t be more than four inches high and about twelve inches square, or something similar; if you take them off as soon as the bug threat is over and store them in a dry place, they can last for several years. Empty biscuit boxes cut in half work well as frames, or strips of three-inch lumber can be easily turned into frames by anyone who knows how to use a hammer and saw.

Dry weather is one of the serious drawbacks to melon culture as the drought usually comes just as the fruit is setting. Sinking tin cans, with holes punched in the sides near the bottom, to the top in the soil in the middle of the hill and keeping them filled with water will be of much assistance in bringing the fruit on to maturity. Occasionally too much rain interferes with the ripening of the fruit; in such cases the empty can176 will act as a drain pipe by accumulating water from the surface soil. The glass plant protectors used in early spring are helpful in concentrating the little sunshine cloudy weather affords and where these are not available old window glass may be used to afford protection from rain and wind for a few days. This should be supported on the north side by a frame or stout stakes, their lower edge resting on the ground.

Dry weather is one of the major challenges for growing melons since drought usually hits just when the fruit is starting to develop. Sinking tin cans, with holes punched in the sides near the bottom, into the ground in the middle of the hill and keeping them filled with water will really help the fruit reach maturity. Sometimes too much rain can disrupt the ripening of the fruit; in those cases, the empty can176 will act as a drainage pipe by collecting water from the topsoil. The glass plant protectors used in early spring are helpful for capturing the little sunlight that cloudy weather provides, and if those aren’t available, old window glass can be used to shield against rain and wind for a few days. This should be supported on the north side by a frame or strong stakes, with the lower edge resting on the ground.

The best soil for melons is a warm, sandy soil well enriched with barnyard manure and a supplementary shovelful should be placed in each hill. Make the hills about six feet apart each way, and thin out to three plants to a hill. If desired such small sorts as Rocky Ford, Paul Rose, Hoodoo and the like may be grown on netting; they will not, perhaps, bear as freely, but the fruit will be more perfect than when grown on the ground, and there is this advantage that the fruit drops when perfectly ripe so that there is no uncertainty about gathering it. Where there is only a small garden spot available the growing of melons, cucumbers and the177 like on netting is a distinct advantage; the cultivation then becomes as simple as that of a row of peas and can be continued throughout the season; gathering the fruit is much simplified as there are no vines to be trampled on and if water is needed it can be quickly applied along the row. Melons grown on netting are easily protected from early frost, but it is difficult to cover any considerable area on the ground.

The best soil for melons is warm and sandy, well enriched with barnyard manure, and you should add a shovelful to each hill. Space the hills about six feet apart in every direction and thin to three plants per hill. If you want, you can grow smaller varieties like Rocky Ford, Paul Rose, and Hoodoo on netting. They might not produce as many fruits, but the fruits will be more perfect than if grown on the ground. One advantage is that the fruit drops when perfectly ripe, so there's no guessing when to pick it. If you have a small garden, growing melons, cucumbers, and similar plants on netting is a big advantage; it makes care as easy as tending a row of peas and can be done throughout the season. Harvesting becomes much simpler since there are no vines to step on, and if they need water, you can easily apply it along the row. Melons grown on netting are also easier to protect from early frost, while it’s tough to cover a large area on the ground.

WATERMELONS

WATERMELONS

Require the same treatment as musk-melons except that it is all right that they should be started in the open ground, spacing the hills from eight to ten feet apart each way; giving a spadeful of manure in each hill. Spray with Bordeaux arsenate of lead mixture once or twice, using a much weaker dilution than for other vines. Pinch out the ends of the vines. Keep cultivated and free from weeds. Avoid stepping on the vines or handling them unnecessarily.

Require the same treatment as musk melons, except it's fine to start them in the open ground, spacing the hills eight to ten feet apart in each direction, and adding a spadeful of manure to each hill. Spray with a Bordeaux arsenate of lead mixture once or twice, using a much weaker dilution than for other vines. Pinch off the ends of the vines. Keep them cultivated and weed-free. Avoid stepping on the vines or handling them unnecessarily.

Cole's Early, Kleckley Sweet and the new melon—Tom Watson—are all good sorts of much178 sweetness and crispness of flesh. The first is well adapted to the northern states, the Kleckley a few days later than Cole's Early. A few Winter Watermelons will extend the season long into the winter as this variety may be gathered at the approach of cold weather and stored in a cool, frost-proof cellar and will retain its delicious flavor and sweetness for weeks. Unlike the other melons mentioned, which are oblong and green, and very tender of rind, the Winter is round, nearly white-skinned and of a hardness approaching the citron. The flesh, however, is red and very firm. It must not be concluded that the Winter is a late season melon, for it is one of the earliest, continuing to bear until frost cuts the vines, so that it may be grown for a single melon crop if desired.

Cole's Early, Kleckley Sweet, and the new melon—Tom Watson—are all great varieties with a lot of sweetness and crisp flesh. The first one is well-suited for the northern states, while the Kleckley ripens a few days later than Cole's Early. A few Winter Watermelons can extend the season well into winter since this variety can be harvested as the weather gets colder and stored in a cool, frost-proof cellar, where it will keep its delicious flavor and sweetness for weeks. Unlike the other melons mentioned, which are oblong, green, and have very tender rinds, the Winter is round, nearly white-skinned, and has a toughness that's close to a citron. However, its flesh is red and very firm. It shouldn't be assumed that the Winter is a late-season melon; in fact, it is one of the earliest, continuing to produce until frost kills the vines, so it can be grown for a single melon crop if desired.

SQUASH

SQUASH

Winter squash are an important garden product, not much appreciated during the flush times of summer but coming into its own at the approach of cold weather; the culture is practically179 that of all vine products. Starting seed on sod in the hotbed and transplanting has much to recommend it as the squash seems to attract more than a fair sort of attention from striped cucumber beetle, squash bugs, stink worm and blight. The vine borer also takes its tithe of the plant and a sudden wilting of the leaves is indication that he is at work; he should be hunted for and killed. Usually there is little hopes of saving the injured branch; if anything will do it it will be burying the wound in earth and keeping it moist for a time until it either heals or sends out roots at the nearest joint and so becomes an independent plant.

Winter squash is an important garden crop, not really appreciated during the peak of summer but getting its time to shine as the colder weather approaches. The growing process is nearly the same as that of other vine crops. Starting seeds in sod in a hotbed and then transplanting them has several advantages because squash tends to attract quite a few pests, like striped cucumber beetles, squash bugs, stink worms, and blight. The vine borer also takes its toll on the plant, and if the leaves suddenly wilt, that’s a sign he’s at work; you should look for and eliminate him. Usually, there isn’t much hope for saving the damaged branch; if anything might help, it would be burying the wound in soil and keeping it moist for a while until it either heals or sends out roots at the nearest joint, becoming a new independent plant.

As a rule squash, melons, cucumbers and the like will not transplant. It often happens that about all of the seed planted in some hills will germinate and make strong plants while other hills will have but one or two plants and it is desired to transplant some of the extra plants into hills where they are needed; attempts to do this with a trowel invariably fail; it is possible, however, to transplant an entire hill—or a part of one180 if spaced far enough apart, by passing a spade down into the ground at a sufficient distance from the plant to avoid disturbing the roots and lifting a large spadeful of earth with the plants. The hill that is to receive them should have been prepared in advance so that the earth may slide off the spade into the hole without disturbing or breaking it in the least; the soil should not be pressed down as this would have a tendency to crumble, but any space about it should be filled in carefully and water poured around it. Squash or other vines moved in this way invariably live and go on growing without any appreciable setback. A considerable patch of winter squash—the Delicious—was entirely secured by taking up plants that had come up self sown in various places; somewhere some immature squash were left in the garden the fall before; some came from the frame around a standpipe in the barnyard which was filled with coal ashes. How the squash came to come up in that unusual place is unknown, but there were a number of nice plants and these were lifted on the spade and carried—a181 spadeful at a time—and planted where they were wanted and the entire patch was very thrifty and bore abundantly.

As a rule, squash, melons, cucumbers, and similar plants don’t transplant well. Often, most of the seeds planted in some hills will sprout and create strong plants, while other hills might only have one or two plants. If you want to move some of the extra plants to other hills where they are needed, trying to do this with a trowel usually fails. However, you can transplant an entire hill—or part of one—as long as they are spaced far enough apart. Just use a spade to dig into the ground far enough from the plant to avoid messing with the roots and lift a big clump of dirt with the plants. The hill that will receive them should be prepared beforehand so the dirt can slide off the spade into the hole without disturbing or breaking it at all. The soil shouldn’t be packed down since that would likely cause it to crumble, but any gaps around it should be carefully filled in, and water should be poured around it. Squash or other vines moved this way usually survive and continue to grow without any major issues. A significant patch of winter squash—the Delicious variety—was entirely established by relocating plants that had grown spontaneously in various spots; some immature squash were left in the garden the previous fall, and others came from the frame around a standpipe in the barnyard that was filled with coal ashes. It’s unclear how the squash ended up in that unusual spot, but there were several nice plants that were lifted with the spade and carried—one spadeful at a time—and planted where they were needed, resulting in a thriving patch that produced abundantly.

Spraying, hand picking and attention to cultivation are essential in growing squash as with other garden crops. The dust-mulch is the one certain assurance against failure.

Spraying, hand-picking, and focusing on cultivation are crucial for growing squash, just like with other garden crops. The dust mulch is the one guaranteed way to prevent failure.

The Hubbard Squash, both Golden and Warted, have long been standard sorts, but both have lost, through much careless breeding, the qualities which distinguished them—dryness and sweetness. It is practically impossible of late years to find an individual of either variety that is really dry or sweet or that has keeping qualities equal to the early sorts. In the Delicious we have a much superior squash whose dryness is notable and sweetness all that one could desire, even small, immature specimens possess the quality in high degree. Unless one has home grown seed from a Hubbard that was perfect in these qualities I should advise planting the seed of Delicious and saving one's own seed from the best specimen of that.

The Hubbard Squash, both Golden and Warted, have been popular varieties for a long time, but they've lost the unique qualities that made them special—dryness and sweetness—due to careless breeding. It's practically impossible these days to find a real specimen of either variety that is actually dry, sweet, or that has the same keeping qualities as the older varieties. The Delicious squash, however, is a far superior option with notable dryness and the desired sweetness; even small, immature ones have these qualities to a high degree. Unless you have homegrown seeds from a perfectly dry and sweet Hubbard, I recommend planting Delicious seeds and saving your own seeds from the best specimens.

SUMMER SQUASH

Summer squash

Then there are all the varieties of summer squashes—Summer Crookneck, Giant Summer Crookneck, the Vegetable Marrows, and the several bush forms, which are a boon to the small kitchen garden as they take little room and are always within bounds; they include the Bush Fordhook, used as a summer squash when green, or ripe, a good keeper, often lasting until the next season's crop is ready. The Mammoth White Bush or Patty Pan, Early Yellow Bush, Early Golden Bush and Bush English Marrow are all good sorts—either cooked and mashed or egged and fried like eggplant. All require the same general treatment and all bear heavily and early. The summer squash are planted in the open ground any time that is suitable for planting corn. To guard against loss by seed decaying in the ground if the season is wet, set the seeds on edge, instead of laying them flat; this is advisable with all flat seeds of pronounced size; cover half an inch and mark the hills so that cultivation can183 commence at once. Covering the hills with frames will save much work in combating insects or a cap of window screening will be effectual; this is made from a round piece of netting with a slit on one side from center to edge to allow its being bent in a tent shape. A stick should be fastened to it to hold it together and anchor it to the ground; this can be easily arranged by taking a piece of wood four or five inches longer than the cap and splitting it half its length, inserting the wire where it laps into the split and thrusting the free end into the ground. These little caps are very practical as they can be flattened out and laid away when no longer required, occupying very little space to store and for that reason are preferable to the boxes.

Then there are all the different types of summer squashes—Summer Crookneck, Giant Summer Crookneck, Vegetable Marrows, and several bush varieties, which are great for small kitchen gardens since they take up little space and are always manageable. This includes the Bush Fordhook, which can be used as a summer squash when green or ripe, and it keeps well, often lasting until the next season’s crop is ready. The Mammoth White Bush or Patty Pan, Early Yellow Bush, Early Golden Bush, and Bush English Marrow are all excellent choices—whether cooked and mashed or battered and fried like eggplant. They all require the same general care and yield heavily and early. Summer squash can be planted in open ground whenever it's suitable for planting corn. To prevent loss from seeds rotting in wet conditions, plant the seeds on their edge instead of laying them flat; this is recommended for all larger flat seeds. Cover them with half an inch of soil and mark the hills so that you can start cultivating right away. Covering the hills with frames will make it easier to deal with insects, or a cap made of window screening will work well; this is created from a round piece of netting with a slit on one side from the center to the edge, allowing it to be bent into a tent shape. Attach a stick to hold it together and anchor it to the ground; you can easily do this by taking a piece of wood four or five inches longer than the cap, splitting it halfway down, placing the wire in the split, and pushing the free end into the ground. These little caps are very practical since they can be flattened and stored away when not needed, taking up very little space, making them preferable to boxes.

Squash vines may be kept from growing too rampant by shortening the branches. They should always be pinched back as soon as they have made a foot, or less, of growth and when fruit is well set on the vines the ends may be severely cut back to insure the early maturity of the fruit already set. I have removed branches184 several feet long and bearing half-grown squash from vines of the English marrow without the least ill effect and have no doubt that similar treatment would be well borne by the Hubbard or other winter squash, and so save much useless growth and conserve the strength of the vine for the main crop of squash and, perhaps, induce a dryer, sweeter product.

Squash vines can be kept from growing too wildly by trimming the branches. They should always be pinched back as soon as they've grown about a foot or less, and when the fruit is well set on the vines, the ends can be cut back significantly to ensure the early ripening of the already set fruit. I have removed branches184 several feet long with half-grown squash from English marrow vines without any negative effects, and I’m confident that a similar approach would also work well for Hubbard or other winter squash. This method can save a lot of unnecessary growth and help the vine focus its energy on the main crop of squash, possibly leading to a drier, sweeter outcome.

SWEET POTATOES

Sweet potatoes

The easiest way to raise one's own sweet potatoes is to buy already started plants of the market gardeners who make a business of starting them for sale; but if one prefers to plant the tubers and raise one's own plants, and the potatoes are available—which seldom is the case unless one has kept them over in a warm cellar buried in sand—then the potatoes are cut the same as Irish potatoes, one eye to a piece, and started in a warm hotbed in April. Before planting the pieces of potato it is a wise precaution to dip each piece in sulphur to protect against black rot. The plants should not be set out in the185 open ground until the nights are warm and all danger of frost is passed. The hills should be three feet apart each way at least as the vines make quite a rank growth. Warm, sandy soil, well fertilized, is necessary and a trowelful of poultry droppings may be added to each hill for good results. Cultivate thoroughly and often and when the vines become too long to make cultivating convenient they may be lifted and coiled around the top of the hill, the hill, by the way, not being a hill at all in the common acceptance of the term but merely a level space devoted to the growing of the potato. It is quite important that the ground immediately about the plant be kept clean, so that when the vines are coiled up they need not be again disturbed to remove weeds.

The easiest way to grow your own sweet potatoes is to buy starter plants from market gardeners who specialize in selling them. But if you prefer to plant the tubers and grow your own plants—and if the potatoes are available—which is rarely the case unless you've stored them in a warm cellar covered in sand—then you cut the potatoes like you would Irish potatoes, with one eye per piece, and start them in a warm hotbed in April. Before planting the potato pieces, it's a good idea to dip each one in sulfur to prevent black rot. You shouldn't plant the pieces in the open ground until the nights are warm and all risk of frost is gone. The hills need to be at least three feet apart in all directions since the vines grow quite vigorously. Warm, sandy soil that's well fertilized is crucial, and you can add a handful of poultry droppings to each hill for better results. Cultivate the soil thoroughly and frequently, and when the vines grow too long to cultivate easily, you can lift them and coil them around the top of the hill; by the way, the hill isn't really a hill in the typical sense, but just a flat space used to grow the potatoes. It's important to keep the area right around the plant clean so that when the vines are coiled up, you don't have to disturb them again to remove weeds.

The space between the plants should be kept mellow and free from weeds throughout the growing season. Sweet potatoes are quite as easy to grow as Irish potatoes, easier, in fact, as they have fewer enemies and are not attacked by the potato beetle. They are more difficult to keep, however, and should be stored in boxes of dry sand in a warm, dry cellar over winter.

The space between the plants should be kept relaxed and free from weeds throughout the growing season. Sweet potatoes are just as easy to grow as Irish potatoes, actually easier, since they have fewer pests and aren't affected by the potato beetle. However, they are trickier to store and should be kept in boxes of dry sand in a warm, dry cellar during the winter.


CHAPTER XI
UNCOMMONLY GROWN VEGETABLES

There is a considerable number of vegetables that are seldom encountered in the general garden, many of which are well worthy of acquaintance. Many of them are familiar to the city housekeper through the medium of the fruit stores and the delicatessen stores; more of them appear in the gardens of the foreign residents and might be adopted for general cultivation with good results.

There are quite a few vegetables that you don’t usually see in regular gardens, many of which are definitely worth getting to know. A lot of them are recognized by city homemakers from grocery stores and delis; even more can be found in the gardens of foreign residents and could be successfully grown more widely.

ARTICHOKES

ARTICHOKES

Which appear as an especial delicacy on the menus of the big hotels and restaurants on special occasions only, are not difficult to grow in sections of the country where the winters are not too severe. They will not stand the winters of the northern states, however, and in any longitude north of the Ohio, are better for winter protection.187 Given a mild winter climate they are as easily raised as a cabbage or an ear of corn and are far more ornamental, indeed so striking and handsome are the plants that they may be grown for their effectiveness alone.

Which are considered a special delicacy on the menus of large hotels and restaurants only during special occasions, are not difficult to grow in areas of the country with milder winters. However, they can't withstand the winters in the northern states, and anywhere north of Ohio, they benefit from winter protection.187 In a mild winter climate, they are as easy to cultivate as cabbage or corn and are much more decorative; in fact, the plants are so striking and attractive that they can be grown purely for their visual appeal.

The plants are grown from seed started in a hotbed in March or earlier and planted out in rich mellow soil when the weather is suitable. Set the plants three feet apart each way. The plants do not bear until the second year, but they may be had in cold sections by purchasing the plants of the florist at any time after the middle of April. As many undesirable sorts are often obtained from seed it is a more certain way of getting good varieties to purchase the plants. They are, however, more expensive than other vegetable plants and where they can not be carried over the winter are somewhat expensive, costing one dollar and fifty cents a dozen. However, a dozen will be ample for a small family.

The plants are grown from seeds started in a hotbed in March or earlier and then transplanted into rich, soft soil when the weather is right. Space the plants three feet apart in every direction. The plants won’t produce fruit until the second year, but you can buy them from a florist anytime after mid-April in colder areas. Since many unwanted types often come from seed, buying the plants is a more reliable way to get good varieties. However, they are pricier than other vegetable plants, and if they can’t be wintered over, they can cost around one dollar and fifty cents per dozen. Still, a dozen should be enough for a small family.

The unopened flower head is the part eaten and it is served raw as a salad or cooked in various ways as an entrée.

The unopened flower head is the part eaten, and it can be served raw in a salad or cooked in different ways as a main dish.

They should receive the same culture as okra or corn, thorough cultivation and water if the season is unduly dry. At the approach of severe weather the tops should be cut off close to the crown and the plants banked up with coal ashes, which should be removed in the spring before growth begins.

They should be cultivated just like okra or corn, with proper care and watering if the season is too dry. When bad weather is coming, the tops should be trimmed down to the crown and the plants should be covered with coal ashes, which should be taken away in the spring before growth starts.

ARTICHOKE, JERUSALEM

Jerusalem artichoke

Though sometimes used as a vegetable and for pickling is especially valuable for feeding stock, especially swine which are allowed to harvest it by rooting it out of the ground. It is claimed that an acre of ground planted to artichoke will keep from twenty to thirty hogs from October to April. They have a special value as a means of clearing a piece of land of undesirable weed growths—like Canada Thistle, quack grass or locust sprouts, as the hogs in rooting for the tubers will destroy the weed roots, thus redeeming a piece of land that may be utilized for garden crops or fruit.

Although sometimes used as a vegetable and for pickling, it is particularly valuable for feeding livestock, especially pigs, which can dig it up from the ground. It's said that an acre of land planted with artichokes can sustain twenty to thirty pigs from October to April. They are especially useful for clearing out unwanted weeds—like Canada thistle, quack grass, or locust sprouts—since the pigs will eliminate the weed roots while searching for the tubers, effectively reclaiming the land for growing garden crops or fruit.

In planting the tubers are cut and planted the same as potatoes and cultivated in the same way until the crop is matured sufficiently to turn the hogs on it or they may be harvested to feed during winter to any stock which needs a succulent winter food.

In planting, the tubers are cut and planted just like potatoes and are cared for in the same way until the crop has matured enough to let the hogs onto it, or they can be harvested to provide succulent winter food for any livestock that needs it.

BROCCOLI

BROCCOLI

A vegetable similar to cauliflower, but of somewhat coarser flavor. It is hardier than cauliflower and will do well in sections where cauliflower is not successfully grown. For rapid growth it should receive frequent cultivation and be grown in rich soil. Sow seed very early in greenhouse, hotbed or warm window and set out as soon as the ground can be prepared in spring, setting the plants the same distance apart as cabbage and drawing the earth up about the roots when hoeing. White Cap is about the best variety, making fine, large, compact heads of a creamy-white color, of good flavor.

A vegetable similar to cauliflower but with a slightly coarser taste. It’s tougher than cauliflower and can thrive in areas where cauliflower doesn't grow well. For quick growth, it should be regularly cultivated and planted in rich soil. Start seeds very early in a greenhouse, hotbed, or warm window, and transplant them as soon as the ground is ready in the spring, spacing the plants the same distance apart as cabbage and mounding the soil around the roots when weeding. White Cap is one of the best varieties, producing large, dense heads that are a creamy white color and have a great flavor.

BRUSSELS SPROUTS

Brussels sprouts

These little miniature cabbages, growing closely together on a stalk, are delicious boiled like cabbage or used as a salad. The culture is the same as that accorded cabbage. The seed should be sown in the hotbed in spring and set out in the open ground in May in rows three feet apart and about twenty inches apart in the rows. Cultivate to keep down weeds and maintain a dust-mulch. By fall the little heads will be fully developed. The delicate flavor is improved by a touch of frost. For late use sow seed in June.

These small cabbage-like vegetables, growing close together on a stalk, are tasty when boiled like cabbage or used in salads. They are grown in the same way as cabbage. Sow the seeds in a hotbed in spring and transplant them into the ground in May, making sure the rows are three feet apart and the plants are about twenty inches apart within the rows. Keep the area cultivated to control weeds and maintain a dust mulch. By fall, the little heads will be fully grown. Their delicate flavor gets better after a light frost. For a late harvest, sow seeds in June.

CHICORY

Chicory

Sow seed in the open ground early in spring as for parsnips, thinning to stand three inches apart in the rows and making the rows fifteen inches apart. Dig the roots in the fall and store in a dark cellar where the temperature can be controlled. Cut the leaves off a little above the root crown and place them in horizontal layers with the crowns outward covering each layer, excepting the tip of the crown, with earth. Each191 layer should be a little narrower than the one beneath so that they form a sloping bank. It is the tender white leaves produced in the dark that are used for salad. Another form of Chicory, the Large Rooted, is used to mix with or substitute for coffee, being sliced, dried, roasted and ground.

Sow seeds in the open ground early in spring, like you would for parsnips. Thin the plants to stand three inches apart in the rows, with the rows spaced fifteen inches apart. Harvest the roots in the fall and store them in a dark cellar where you can control the temperature. Cut the leaves off just above the root crown and layer them horizontally, placing the crowns outward and covering each layer with soil, except for the tip of the crown. Each layer should be slightly narrower than the one below it to create a sloping bank. The tender white leaves that grow in the dark are what you use for salad. There's another type of chicory called Large Rooted, which is used to mix with or substitute for coffee; it’s sliced, dried, roasted, and ground.

Witloof Chicory, or French Endive as it is sold by dealers in fancy fruits and vegetables, is sown in June in drills a foot apart and cultivated until frost, when the plants should be taken up and trimmed to an inch and a half from the neck and replaced upright in trenches about sixteen inches deep, setting the plants about an inch and a half apart. The trench is then filled in with soil and covered with manure to hasten growth. The tender, white tops will be ready for use in about a month and are eaten raw, like celery, used as a salad or cooked.

Witloof Chicory, also known as French Endive, is marketed by vendors of specialty fruits and vegetables. It’s planted in June in rows spaced a foot apart and grown until the frost. When that time comes, the plants should be dug up and trimmed to an inch and a half from the base, then replanted upright in trenches about sixteen inches deep, with the plants spaced about an inch and a half apart. The trench is then filled with soil and topped with manure to encourage growth. The delicate, white tops will be ready to use in about a month, and they can be eaten raw like celery, added to salads, or cooked.

CELERIAC

Celeriac

Or turnip-rooted celery is grown for its bulbous root, which has a distinct celery flavor and in192 gardens where celery will not succeed it makes a very good substitute. It is used, cooked, either as a salad or as a vegetable. It is cultivated much as celery is, only it does not require the banking so necessary with that plant. It may, however, be blanched and is said to be very fine that way. Delicatesse is a fine sort with perfectly smooth root, free from side rootlets, pure white, tender and excellent in quality. Giant Prague is another fine sort. Earliest of All is ready for use in June and is a good sort.

Or turnip-rooted celery is grown for its bulbous root, which has a distinct celery flavor, and in192 gardens where regular celery won’t thrive, it makes a great substitute. It's used cooked, either in salads or as a vegetable. It's grown much like celery, but it doesn't need the banking process that's essential for that plant. However, it can be blanched, and it's said to be very good that way. Delicatesse is a premium variety with a perfectly smooth root, free from side roots, pure white, tender, and excellent in quality. Giant Prague is another great variety. Earliest of All is ready for harvest in June and is a solid option.

CHERVILLE

CHERVILLE

Resembles parsley and is used for garnishing and for seasoning. Cultivate like parsley, making the rows a foot apart and thin to six inches.

Resembles parsley and is used for garnishing and seasoning. Grow it like parsley, keeping the rows a foot apart and thinning them to six inches.

COLLARDS

Collard greens

Grown at the south as greens and as a substitute for cabbage. Plant seed in rows, thinning or transplanting to a foot apart in the row. It is improved by a touch of frost.

Grown in the south as greens and as a replacement for cabbage. Sow seeds in rows, thinning or transplanting them to a foot apart in the row. It gets better with a little frost.

CORN SALAD

Corn Salad

Sow in spring in drills a foot apart. For winter and spring use sow in drills in August and September and cultivate like lettuce or other salad stuff.

Sow in spring in rows a foot apart. For winter and spring, sow in rows in August and September and care for it like you would lettuce or other salad greens.

CRESS

Cress

Upland Cress, which has the flavor of water-cress, can be grown in any good garden soil without the presence of water. The seed should be sown very freely in rows one foot apart, making repeated sowings for succession as the plant soon runs to seed. Water-cress can be grown about a water hydrant if the soil is clayey, or can be underlaid with a few inches of clay. Water-cress sown at intervals in such a position will give a supply of the pungent green that will be a very welcome addition to lettuce, corn or other salad. Remove a foot or eighteen inches of the soil for a square yard of space and in the excavation thus formed lay a few inches of clay, tamping and puddling it down until it makes a continuous194 layer, then apply a few inches of earth rich in humus or marsh earth, leaving the surface slightly lower than the surrounding soil and scatter the seed broadcast and keep free from weeds until up and growing. Allow the hydrant to drip sufficiently to maintain sufficient moisture. Continue to scatter seeds at intervals for a succession of cress.

Upland Cress, which tastes like watercress, can be grown in any decent garden soil without needing water. The seeds should be sown generously in rows spaced a foot apart, with repeated sowings for a continuous harvest since the plant tends to go to seed quickly. Watercress can be grown around a water hydrant if the soil is clay, or you can add a few inches of clay underneath. Sowing watercress at intervals in this setup will provide a supply of the sharp green that's a great addition to salads like lettuce or corn. Dig out a foot or eighteen inches of soil for every square yard of space, and in that hole, lay down a few inches of clay, tampering and compacting it until it forms a solid layer. Then, add a few inches of nutrient-rich soil or marsh earth, leaving the surface slightly lower than the surrounding soil. Scatter the seeds generously and keep the area weed-free until they start to grow. Let the hydrant drip enough to keep things moist. Keep scattering seeds at intervals to ensure a continuous supply of cress.

DANDELION

Dandelion

For those who love the bitter tang of the dandelion as a green, the cultivated affords a much finer dish than the wild as the leaves are double the size of the wild dandelion. The seed should be sown in drills, covering very lightly and shading with newspapers or brush until up. Thin to stand a foot apart and blanch, if desired, by inverting a box or flower-pot over each plant, or a cone of stiff paper can be used. For greens, only the top may be removed but for salad the plant may be cut down to the root, the part beneath the surface of the ground being very white and tender. There is no danger of dandelion195 grown in the garden becoming a troublesome weed as it is easily kept from seeding, which is its only way of spreading.

For those who enjoy the bitter taste of dandelion greens, the cultivated version offers a much better dish than the wild variety because the leaves are twice the size. The seeds should be sown in rows, lightly covered, and shaded with newspapers or brush until they sprout. Once they grow, thin them to stand a foot apart and blanch them, if you like, by putting a box or flower pot upside down over each plant, or you can use a cone made of stiff paper. For greens, you can just pick the tops, but for salads, you can cut the plant down to the root, which is very white and tender just below the surface. There’s no risk of dandelion195 grown in the garden becoming a pesky weed since it can easily be prevented from seeding, which is its only method of spreading.

FENNEL OR FINOCCHIO

Fennel or finocchio

Is extensively used in Italy as a salad. The part used is the enlargement of the leaf stalk at the base of the stem. When this is about the size of an egg, the earth should be drawn up about the plant to cover the enlargement partly and in a week or ten days the eggs maybe used, removing as many as required, a succession being produced. The flavor is delicate, resembling celery, and it may be used either as a salad or boiled.

Is widely used in Italy as a salad. The part used is the thickened leaf stalk at the base of the stem. When this is about the size of an egg, soil should be drawn up around the plant to partially cover the thickening, and in a week or ten days, the stalks can be used, removing as many as needed, producing a succession. The flavor is mild, similar to celery, and it can be used either as a salad or boiled.

GARLIC

GARLIC

So beloved of the Italians is quite worth cultivating in our American gardens. It is used in minute quantities as a seasoning in almost all forms of savory cooking, in omelets, salads, soups, dressings and wherever a piquant flavor, suggestive of onion, but distinctive, is desired. The garlic comes in a bunch of cloves which are196 separated and planted like onion sets an inch apart, but it requires warmer weather than the onion, succeeding especially well in the climate of California. It is, however, indigenous in a wild state in many parts of the country and cattle browsing in garlic-infested pastures have a distinctive garlicky flavor to their milk. So agreeable is the taste of garlic or leeks in butter to some people that it was once quite common in the Philadelphia markets to hear "leeky butter" inquired for.

So loved by Italians, garlic is definitely worth growing in our American gardens. It's used in small amounts as a seasoning in almost every type of savory dish, like omelets, salads, soups, dressings, and anywhere a tangy flavor similar to onion but with its own uniqueness is needed. Garlic comes in a bunch of cloves that are196 separated and planted like onion sets about an inch apart, but it needs warmer weather than onions, thriving especially well in California's climate. However, it also grows wild in many parts of the country, and cows grazing in garlic-laden pastures produce milk with a distinct garlic flavor. Some people find the taste of garlic or leeks in butter so enjoyable that it used to be common to hear requests for "leeky butter" in Philadelphia markets.

KALE OR BORECOLE

Kale or borecole

Are grown for greens and as a substitute for cabbage, being more hardy than that vegetable. For summer use sow the seed in the open ground in May or June and cultivate the same as cabbage. For early spring use, sow seed in September and protect during winter. Some of the varieties, like Imperial Long-standing Kale, are so hardy that they may be dug out from under the snow in the winter. Dwarf Curled Scotch is an excellent sort, very tender and fine flavored197 and with beautiful curled foliage. Dwarf Green Curled Kale and Excelsior Moss Curled Kale are other good sorts, very mossy, attractive and delicious.

Are grown for their greens and as a substitute for cabbage, being hardier than that vegetable. For summer use, sow the seeds in open ground in May or June and care for them like cabbage. For early spring use, sow seeds in September and protect them over the winter. Some varieties, like Imperial Long-standing Kale, are so hardy that they can be dug out from under the snow in winter. Dwarf Curled Scotch is an excellent type, very tender and flavorful, with beautiful curled leaves. Dwarf Green Curled Kale and Excelsior Moss Curled Kale are other great options, very mossy, attractive, and delicious.197

Sea Kale, less well known than the annual kale, is a hardy perennial that is cultivated somewhat like asparagus, the seed being sown in the spring in rows three to four feet apart. The seedlings give a crop the third year but quicker results come from planting root cuttings or offsets. The Sea Kale has a very long tap-root and should be grown in rich mellow soil that has been ploughed or dug very deep. As soon as shoots show above the ground blanch with boards, earth, sand or anything that will exclude light until ready for use. When blanched the leaf-stalk is cooked like asparagus or the leaves are used as greens.

Sea Kale, not as popular as regular kale, is a tough perennial that's grown a bit like asparagus. You plant the seeds in the spring in rows spaced three to four feet apart. The seedlings will produce a harvest in their third year, but you can get quicker results by planting root cuttings or offsets. Sea Kale has a very long taproot and should be planted in rich, loose soil that has been thoroughly turned. Once the shoots appear above the ground, cover them with boards, soil, sand, or anything else that blocks out light until they're ready to be harvested. When blanched, the leaf stalks can be cooked like asparagus, or the leaves can be used as greens.

KOHL-RABI

Kohlrabi

(Turnip-rooted cabbage)

Turnip cabbage

The bulb which grows on the stalk a few inches above the ground is the edible part of this vegetable.198 This is stripped and cooked like turnips, but is much more sweet and delicate. Sow seed in the open ground in June, making the rows sixteen inches apart and thin to six inches in the rows. Sow for succession from early spring until July. Cultivate like cabbage.

The bulb that grows on the stalk a few inches above the ground is the edible part of this vegetable.198 This is peeled and cooked like turnips, but it’s much sweeter and more delicate. Sow seeds in open ground in June, keeping the rows sixteen inches apart and thinning to six inches within the rows. Plant for a continuous harvest from early spring until July. Care for it like you would cabbage.

LEEKS

LEEK

Sow seed in April in drills one foot apart and one inch deep. Transplant when large enough to handle or thin to stand six inches apart in the rows, setting the plants as deep as possible so that the earth will come up well about the neck to blanch and insure its whiteness and tenderness. In cultivating draw the earth up about the plants. Seed may also be sown in August or September, the same as onions, and the plants transplanted the following spring.

Sow seeds in April in rows that are one foot apart and one inch deep. Transplant when they are big enough to handle or thin them out to be six inches apart in the rows, planting them as deeply as you can so that the soil covers the neck well to blanch and ensure they stay white and tender. When cultivating, draw the soil up around the plants. Seeds can also be sown in August or September, just like onions, and the plants can be transplanted the following spring.

Prizetaker Leek is a fine exhibition sort. Large Musselburg has enormous broad leaves and a pleasant flavor. Long Mezieres also has broad, erect leaves, fine flavor and a long, snow-white199 stem and is very hardy. Leeks are a valuable addition to the onion family of the garden.

Prizetaker Leek is a great exhibition variety. Large Musselburg has huge, wide leaves and a nice flavor. Long Mezieres also has broad, upright leaves, great taste, and a long, white stem, and it's very resilient. Leeks are a valuable addition to the onion family in the garden.

MARTYNIA

MARTYNIA

The curious pods of this vine vegetable are used for pickling and produce a very fancy article. They should be gathered when only half grown. Sow the seed in the hotbed in spring and transplant into hills three feet apart each way and cultivate the same as cucumbers. The plants will self-sow and voluntary plants will appear each year so that once established one is quite sure of a supply. Seed may also be sown in the open ground, if preferred, in May.

The interesting pods of this vine vegetable are used for pickling and create a really fancy product. They should be picked when they are only half grown. Plant the seeds in a hotbed in spring and then transplant them into hills that are three feet apart in all directions, taking care of them just like you would cucumbers. The plants will reseed themselves, and you'll see new plants popping up each year, so once it's established, you'll be all set for a steady supply. If you prefer, you can also sow seeds directly in the open ground in May.


CHAPTER XII
AMOUNT OF SEED NEEDED

Name Oz Lbs Drill tool Hills Acre Plants
Asparagus 1 4–5 1 200
Beans 1 1 50
Bush Lima 1 1 50
Pole Lima 1 1 75–100
Beets 1 5–6 50 1
Brussels Sprouts 1 200
Cabbage 1 4 ¼ 3000–4000
Cauliflower 1 3000
Carrots 1 3–4 100 1
Chicory 1 100
Celery 1 5000–6000
Cucumbers 1 2 50 1
Corn Salad 3 100
Collards 1 3000
Eggplant 1 1000–2000
Endive 1 300
Kale 1 5000
Kohl-Rabi 1 300
Lettuce 1 3000
Muskmelon 1 2–3 1
Watermelon 1 4–5 1
Onion 1 4–5 200 1
Okra 1 100
Parsley 1 150
201Parsnips 1 5–6 200 1
Peppers 1 1000–1500
Peas 1 50
Pumpkins 1 25
Potatoes 13
Radishes 1 100
Rhubarb 1 125
Salsify 1 50
Squash 1 3–4 25 1
Spinach 1 10–12 100 1
Tomatoes 1 3000–4000
Turnips 1 1–2 200 1

For those vegetables of which only a small quantity is grown the packets will be ample, most packets giving from one to two hundred plants, when started in the hotbed.

For vegetables that are grown in small amounts, the packets will be plenty, with most packets producing between one to two hundred plants when started in the hotbed.


CHAPTER XIII
Herbs: sweet, pot, and medicinal

Are a very welcome addition to the kitchen garden, giving just the often needed touch to the achievement of a successful dish, a touch that will change an everyday vegetable or meat course to something unusual and fancy in cuisine, and with no trouble or added expense to the cook—just a little pinch of this or that, and what a difference it makes! In most households sage is depended on for the flavoring of poultry dressing, sausage and the like, in spite of the fact that it may be anything but pleasing to some member of the family or the welcome guest; so accustomed are we to its use that substitution is scarcely thought of, and yet a very pleasing one is found in summer savory, which most people like better than sage, once its acquaintance is made. Coriander and caraway seeds are203 used in bread, cake and cookies, but just a touch of caraway is a very piquant addition to salads. Tarragon is used for making tarragon vinegar—the leaves being steeped in pale cider or white wine vinegar until the flavor is extracted and then used in the concoction of salad dressing. Dill is used principally for making dill pickles, the leaves being laid alternately with the pickles when laid down. Sweet fennel is used for salads and soups and also for fish sauce.

Herbs are a great addition to the kitchen garden, providing just the right touch needed to make a dish truly successful, transforming an ordinary vegetable or meat dish into something special and fancy without requiring much effort or extra cost from the cook—just a little pinch of this or that, and what a difference it makes! In many households, people rely on sage for flavoring poultry dressing, sausage, and similar dishes, even though it might not be the favorite of every family member or guest; we’re so used to it that we hardly think about substitutions. However, a delightful alternative is summer savory, which most people prefer over sage once they get to know it. Coriander and caraway seeds are used in bread, cakes, and cookies, but just a sprinkle of caraway can add a great kick to salads. Tarragon is used to make tarragon vinegar—its leaves are steeped in pale cider or white wine vinegar until the flavor is extracted, then used for salad dressings. Dill is mainly used for making dill pickles, with the leaves layered alternately with the pickles during preparation. Sweet fennel is used in salads, soups, and also for fish sauce.

If one has a strip of land at one side of the garden that is not needed, and can be conveniently skipped in the plowing, that will be the place for the herb bed. The soil should be rich and mellow and contain a fair proportion of humus. A poor strip of land may be built up by adding to it from season to season the old manure from the hotbed; this is nearly reduced to humus and the action of the elements will soon complete its transformation.

If you have a section of land on one side of the garden that isn't being used and can be easily avoided when plowing, that’s the perfect spot for the herb bed. The soil should be rich and soft, with a good amount of organic matter. If the land is poor, you can improve it by adding old manure from the hotbed season after season; this manure is almost turned into humus, and nature will quickly finish the transformation.

As many of the herbs are perennial it is best that the bed should be a permanent one, not subject to annual disturbance. It should be long,204 rather than wide, so that the herbs may be gathered without walking on the bed; three feet is a good width as that can be reached across fairly well. As the amount of any one herb used in the average family will be small it is not necessary that they be set in regular rows; they may rather be started in rows, for convenience in planting and identifying when up and then the fine, vigorous plants set in clumps in the border, or in colonies of sorts. The leaves of the various plants are the part used and they should be cut or gathered on a bright, clear day just as the plants are coming into bloom, tied in bunches and hung up in a dry place, an attic with open windows, or a shed, or spread out on racks or a floor, anywhere where they will dry quickly so as to retain all their flavor. When thoroughly dry the leaves should be stripped from the stems and packed in bags or boxes for use.

Since many herbs are perennial, it’s best to have a permanent bed that doesn’t get disturbed every year. It should be long, 204 rather than wide, so you can gather the herbs without stepping on the bed. A width of three feet is ideal, as it’s manageable to reach across. Since the amount of any one herb used by a typical family is small, they don’t need to be planted in neat rows; they can be started in rows for easier planting and identification, and then the strong, healthy plants can be grouped in clumps or colonies along the border. The leaves of the plants are what you use, and they should be cut or gathered on a sunny, clear day just as the plants begin to bloom. Tie them in bunches and hang them in a dry place—like an attic with open windows, a shed, or spread out on racks or the floor—anywhere that allows them to dry quickly to retain their flavor. Once completely dry, strip the leaves from the stems and store them in bags or boxes for later use.

The annual varieties are cultivated the same as the perennials but if one prefers these may occupy a row through the garden where they can have the cultivation accorded the other vegetables.205 The following list is quite complete and will indicate the various uses for which each is suitable.

The annual plants are grown just like the perennials, but if you prefer, they can fill a row in the garden where they can receive the same care as the other vegetables.205 The list below is quite comprehensive and will show the different uses for which each is suitable.

PERENNIAL HERBS

Evergreen Herbs

Balm. Lemon-scented and used for making balm tea.

Balm. Lemon-scented and used for making balm tea.

Catnip. Beloved of cats and useful in colic of infants.

Catnip. Loved by cats and helpful for easing infant colic.

Fennel, Sweet. Used in salads and soups.

Sweet Fennel. Great for salads and soups.

Horehound. Very useful in coughs and bronchial colds, made into syrup or candy, with sugar.

Horehound. Very effective for coughs and bronchial colds, usually made into syrup or candy with sugar.

Lavender. For perfuming linen. Not hardy and should be protected in winter.

Lavender. Used to scent sheets. It's not very hardy and needs protection during winter.

Mint. For mint sauces.

Mint. For making mint sauces.

Pennyroyal. Used medicinally, and for seasoning puddings and various dishes.

Pennyroyal. Used for medicinal purposes and to season puddings and various dishes.

Peppermint. For flavoring and in candy.

Peppermint. For flavoring and in candy.

Rosemary. For flavoring. ("Here's Rosemary, that's for remembrance.")

Rosemary. For flavoring. ("Here's Rosemary, that's for remembering.")

Rue. For roup in fowls and for medicinal purposes.

Rue. Used for treating chickens and for medicinal purposes.

Sage. Seasoning for sausage, poultry dressing and the like.

Sage. A seasoning for sausage, poultry stuffing, and similar dishes.

Savory, summer. Used in place of sage and as flavoring with string beans.

Summer Savory. Used instead of sage and as a seasoning for green beans.

Savory, winter. Used the same as summer savory.

Winter Savory. Used the same way as summer savory.

Sweet Marjoram. Used green in summer and dried in winter.

Sweet Marjoram. Used fresh in summer and dried in winter.

Tansy. For medicinal purposes.

Tansy. For medicinal purposes.

Thyme, broad-leaved English. For seasoning and poultry stuffing; also a tea for nervous headache.

Thyme, wide-leaved English. For seasoning and stuffing poultry; also used as a tea for nervous headaches.

ANNUAL HERBS

Annual herbs

Anise. For garnishing and flavoring and in making cordials.

Anise. Used for garnishing, flavoring, and making liqueurs.

Basil, sweet. The stems and seeds are used in soups and sauces.

Sweet Basil. The stems and seeds are added to soups and sauces.

Bene. Used medicinally—the leaves in water, beneficial in cases of dysentery.

Bene. Used for medical purposes; leaves soaked in water can help treat dysentery.

Borage. Excellent for bees. Leaves used in salads, the flowers in cooling drinks.207 Caraway. The seed used in bread, cakes, cookies and salads.

Borage. Great for attracting bees. The leaves are used in salads, and the flowers are added to refreshing drinks.207 Caraway. The seeds are used in bread, cakes, cookies, and salads.

Chamomile. Medicinal. Prescribed by physicians as an emetic and vermifuge.

Chamomile. Used medicinally. Recommended by doctors as a remedy for inducing vomiting and removing worms.

Coriander. Seeds aromatic. Used as a stomachic.

Coriander. Aromatic seeds. Used to aid digestion.

Cumin. As food for pigeons.

Cumin. Feed for pigeons.

Dill. In making dill pickles.

Dill. Used to make dill pickles.

Pimpinella. The young leaves, used as salad, have the flavor of cucumbers.

Pimpinella. The young leaves, which taste like cucumbers, are used in salads.

Saffron. Used for flavoring and coloring.

Saffron. Used for flavoring and coloring.

Tarragon. For flavoring and in salads. Does not come from seed but plants must be purchased.

Tarragon. Provides flavor and is used in salads. It doesn’t grow from seeds; you have to buy the plants.

Tagetes. This possesses in its green parts almost the true tarragon flavor.

Tagetes. Its green parts have a flavor similar to true tarragon.

Thyme. French Summer. Used for seasoning.

French Summer Thyme. Used for seasoning.

Waldmeister. Used in May wine and also for scenting clothes.

Woodruff. Used in May wine and also for scenting clothes.


CHAPTER XIV
Plant pests and insecticides

The well-tended garden does not suffer materially from inroads of insect pests especially in favorable seasons; cool, damp weather, and hot, muggy weather are conducive to fungoid diseases which sap the strength of the plants and make them less resistant to any kind of assaults, whether of insects or disease, but with normal weather and bright dry air a part of each day at least, little trouble should be experienced from insect pests; especially should this be the case if precautionary work has been done the previous fall in the way of gathering up and burning all rubbish that can harbor insects or disease and especially if the precaution is taken to fall plough the garden, leaving the soil in the rough furrow over winter. This is especially good practice when there has been trouble with209 insect pests, especially cutworms, root lice, tomato worms—the pupae of which winter in the ground and if turned up by the plough will be destroyed, radish and cabbage maggot and the like.

The well-maintained garden doesn’t suffer much from insect pests, especially in good seasons. Cool, damp weather, and hot, humid conditions can lead to fungal diseases that weaken the plants and make them more vulnerable to insects and diseases. However, with normal weather and bright, dry air at least part of each day, there should be little trouble from pests, especially if preventive measures were taken the previous fall by collecting and burning all debris that could harbor insects or diseases. It's especially useful to autumn plow the garden, leaving the soil rough over the winter. This practice is particularly beneficial if there have been issues with209 insect pests, especially cutworms, root lice, and tomato worms—the pupae of which hibernate in the soil and will be destroyed if turned over by the plow—as well as radish and cabbage maggots.

Even though the past season has been practically free from trouble of this sort the intelligent gardener will recognize the possibility of trouble and in time of peace will prepare for war by supplying himself with the more common and useful varieties of insecticides. It is not desirable that the list should include everything in the bug pharmacopæia; a few standard remedies faithfully and intelligently used are far better than an embarrassing assortment that leaves one undecided as to which is best and often results in half-hearted use of first one and then the other, with lax intervals which give the enemy time to recuperate and multiply.

Even though the last season has been mostly trouble-free, the savvy gardener knows that problems can arise, and during quiet times, it's wise to prepare for the worst by stocking up on the most common and effective insecticides. It’s not necessary to include every option available; a handful of reliable remedies, used consistently and thoughtfully, are much more effective than a confusing variety that makes it hard to choose the right one and often leads to half-hearted attempts with one after another, allowing the pests time to recover and multiply.

It is best in deciding upon the insecticides and fungicides to be used to have a clear classification in mind of the several kinds of insect to be exterminated as one form of poison may not be suited to all forms of insect life: for instance, insects210 which chew or eat the leaves of the plants to which they are addicted, as the potato beetle, caterpillar and the like, can most readily be destroyed by poison applied to the foliage; insects which do not eat the vegetation on the surface, but puncture it and drain away by suction the juices of the plant, like the aphis and other plant lice, will not be injured by surface poison, but must be destroyed by the contact of corrosive poison with their bodies, or with hot water, which is one of the best insecticides known, not only destroying all insect life with which it comes in contact, but cleansing and strengthening the plants. It should be used as a spray at about a hundred and forty degrees, taking pains to reach the underside of the leaves as well as the upper surface, and as it can be used when the fruit is in any stage of growth its advantage is obvious.

When choosing insecticides and fungicides, it's important to clearly identify the types of insects you want to eliminate, since one type of poison may not work for all insects. For example, insects that chew or eat plant leaves, like the potato beetle and caterpillars, can be effectively killed with poison applied to the leaves. However, insects that don't eat the surface vegetation but instead puncture it and suck the plant's juices, like aphids and other plant lice, won't be affected by surface poisons. These pests need to be dealt with using corrosive poisons that come into contact with their bodies or with hot water, which is one of the best-known insecticides. Hot water not only kills all insect life it touches but also cleanses and strengthens the plants. It should be used as a spray at around 140 degrees, ensuring you cover both the undersides and tops of the leaves. Since it can be used at any stage of fruit growth, its benefits are clear.

For the eating or chewing insects and beetles there are several reliable poisons on the market, all ready for use, needing only to be mixed with a definite bulk of water, flour or lime, according as the poison is to be used as a dust or a spray.

For the insects and beetles that eat or chew, there are several effective poisons available on the market, ready to use with just the addition of a specific amount of water, flour, or lime, depending on whether the poison will be applied as a dust or a spray.

ARSENATE OF LEAD

Lead arsenate

Used for all chewing insects that attack foliage and fruit trees; will not wash off nor burn the foliage. Use two or three pounds to fifty gallons of water as a spray. Price about forty-five cents a pound.

Used for all chewing insects that attack leaves and fruit trees; it won't wash off or damage the leaves. Use two or three pounds in fifty gallons of water as a spray. Price is about forty-five cents per pound.

ARSENATE OF ZINC

Zinc arsenate

A quick-acting adhesive insecticide for potato bugs, rose beetles and vegetables that have not headed sufficiently to be injurious if touched with the poison. Forty-five cents per pound.

A fast-acting sticky insect killer for potato bugs, rose beetles, and vegetables that aren't mature enough to be harmed by contact with the poison. Forty-five cents per pound.

BUG DEATH

Bug death

Used instead of Paris green for eating insects on potatoes, squashes, melons, eggplants, cucumbers. Twenty-five cents a pound; directions accompany it.

Used instead of Paris green for dealing with insects on potatoes, squashes, melons, eggplants, and cucumbers. Twenty-five cents a pound; instructions come with it.

PARIS GREEN

Paris Green

For all chewing insects. As a dust use one part of the poison to one hundred parts plaster, or flour; as a spray, one pound Paris green to212 one hundred and fifty to three hundred gallons of water according to the tenderness of the foliage. Sixty-five cents per pound.

For all chewing insects. For dust, mix one part of the poison with one hundred parts plaster or flour; for spray, use one pound of Paris green for one hundred and fifty to three hundred gallons of water, depending on how delicate the leaves are. Sixty-five cents per pound.

PYROX

PYROX

For eating insects, fungus growth, blight and rot. Adheres to foliage. One pound to six gallons of water. Forty cents per pound.

For consuming insects, fungus growth, blight, and rot. Sticks to leaves. One pound per six gallons of water. Forty cents per pound.

SLUG SHOT

Slug Shot

For potato bugs, tomato and cabbage worms, lice aphis and worms—use as dust with blow gun. Twenty cents a pound.

For potato bugs, tomato and cabbage worms, lice, aphids, and worms—use as a dust with a blow gun. Twenty cents a pound.

For fungoid diseases, blight and rot the various Bordeaux mixtures, single and combined with the arsenates so as to take the place of a separate poison for chewing insects, are suggested.

For fungal diseases, blight, and rot, various Bordeaux mixtures—either on their own or combined with arsenates to eliminate the need for a separate poison for chewing insects—are recommended.

BORDEAUX MIXTURE

Bordeaux mixture

The standard remedy against fungus, rust and rot. Five ounces to one gallon of water is standard strength. Spray at intervals until fruits sets, for potatoes till danger of late blight is passed. Thirty-five cents a pound.

The standard solution for fungus, rust, and rot. Five ounces per gallon of water is the recommended strength. Spray at intervals until the fruits are formed, and for potatoes, continue until the risk of late blight is over. Thirty-five cents per pound.

BORDEAUX-ARSENATE OF LEAD

Bordeaux lead acetate

A combined fungicide and insecticide for potatoes, melons, cucumbers and squash. Three ounces to one gallon of water. Spray once a week or every ten days. Forty cents per pound.

A mix of fungicide and insecticide for potatoes, melons, cucumbers, and squash. Three ounces per gallon of water. Spray once a week or every ten days. Forty cents per pound.

KEROSENE EMULSION

Kerosene mixture

For all soft-bodied, sucking insects, especially aphis and lice. One pound of paste to ten gallons of water. Paste, thirty cents a pound.

For all soft-bodied, sucking insects, especially aphids and lice. One pound of paste for ten gallons of water. Paste costs thirty cents a pound.

Directions for Preparing

How to Prepare

KEROSENE EMULSION

Kerosene emulsion

Dissolve one-half pound of soap in one gallon of boiling water, add two gallons of kerosene, and force through a spray pump again and again until an emulsion is formed. Dilute from ten to twenty-five times before applying. Use rain-water for making solution.

Dissolve half a pound of soap in one gallon of boiling water, add two gallons of kerosene, and spray through a pump repeatedly until an emulsion forms. Dilute it ten to twenty-five times before using. Use rainwater to make the solution.

BORDEAUX-ARSENATE OF LEAD

Bordeaux lead arsenate

One pound of arsenate of lead with fifty gallons of Bordeaux mixture for all eating insects and fungoid diseases.

One pound of lead arsenate with fifty gallons of Bordeaux mixture for all munching insects and fungal diseases.

BORDEAUX MIXTURE

Bordeaux mixture

Dissolve six pounds of copper sulphate by hanging it in a bag of coarse cloth in an earthen or wooden vessel containing four to six gallons of water, and dilute with twenty-five gallons of water. Slake four pounds of lime, diluting to twenty-five gallons and mix by pouring the two solutions into a third vessel. This is of such universal use that the large quantity will not be excessive, especially when combined with the arsenical preparations.

Dissolve six pounds of copper sulfate by hanging it in a bag made of coarse cloth in a clay or wooden container filled with four to six gallons of water, and then dilute it with twenty-five gallons of water. Slake four pounds of lime, mixing it with twenty-five gallons of water, and combine the two solutions by pouring them into a third container. This mixture is so versatile that the large amount will not be too much, especially when used with arsenic-based preparations.

Vegetables and Insects and Diseases
Attacking Them

Vegetables, Insects, and Diseases
That Impact Them

ASPARAGUS

ASPARAGUS

Keep the beds closely cut in spring and as soon as the shoots are allowed to grow spray with Bordeaux-arsenate of lead mixture.

Keep the beds trimmed in the spring, and as soon as the shoots start to grow, spray them with a Bordeaux-arsenate of lead mixture.

BEANS-ANTHRACNOSE

Beans anthracnose

Spray with Bordeaux mixture when an inch or two high and repeat as necessary.

Spray with Bordeaux mixture when it's about one or two inches high and repeat as needed.

BEAN BEETLE

Bean beetle

Spray with kerosene emulsion, being sure that it reaches every part of the under side of the leaves.

Spray with kerosene emulsion, making sure it covers every part of the underside of the leaves.

BEAN WEEVIL

Bean weevil

Fumigate the seed before planting with carbon-bisulphide, in a closed vessel for twenty-four hours or with formaldehyde, using one teaspoonful to a pint of water and wetting the seed and covering close a few hours.

Fumigate the seeds before planting with carbon bisulfide in a sealed container for twenty-four hours, or use formaldehyde by mixing one teaspoon with a pint of water to moisten the seeds, then cover them tightly for a few hours.

FLEA BEETLE

Flea beetle

Spray with arsenate of lead or Bordeaux-arsenate mixture.

Spray with lead arsenate or Bordeaux-arsenate mixture.

BEET-LEAF SPOT

Beet leaf spot

Spray with Bordeaux mixture and repeat once in two weeks but the leaves must not be used for greens after spraying begins.

Spray with Bordeaux mixture and repeat every two weeks, but the leaves cannot be used for greens after you start spraying.

CABBAGE AND CAULIFLOWER

Cabbage and cauliflower

Aphis: spray with kerosene emulsion and repeat as needful until the heads are nearly grown.

Aphis: spray with kerosene emulsion and repeat as needed until the heads are almost fully grown.

CABBAGE WORM

Cabbage worm

Spray with poisoned resin-lime mixture if the plants are young; after heads have formed use kerosene emulsion or hot water, preferably the latter.

Spray with a mixture of poisoned resin and lime if the plants are young; after the heads have formed, use kerosene emulsion or hot water, preferably the latter.

CABBAGE ROOT MAGGOT

Cabbage root fly

Protect the plants with disks of tar paper and wet the soil with Paris green solution or emulsion composed of one pound of soap, one gallon of boiling water and one pint of crude carbolic acid diluted with forty parts of water, using sufficient to soak the soil several inches.

Protect the plants with tar paper disks and wet the soil with a Paris green solution or an emulsion made of one pound of soap, one gallon of boiling water, and one pint of crude carbolic acid diluted with forty parts of water, using enough to saturate the soil several inches deep.

CELERY BLIGHT

Celery Disease

Spray with Bordeaux mixture once in two weeks, until plants are half grown.

Spray with Bordeaux mixture every two weeks until the plants are half grown.

CUCUMBERS

Cucumbers

For the striped beetle, use tobacco dust about the hills. Spray plants and ground with kerosene emulsion. Wrap rags saturated with kerosene about sticks and stick in center of hills to repel bugs with the odor. Better still, protect217 hills with frames of wire screening or mosquito netting. Spray with Bordeaux-arsenate of lead every two weeks.

For the striped beetle, apply tobacco dust around the hills. Spray the plants and ground with a kerosene emulsion. Soak rags in kerosene, wrap them around sticks, and place them in the center of the hills to keep bugs away with the smell. Even better, protect the hills with wire screening or mosquito netting. Spray with Bordeaux-arsenate of lead every two weeks.

SQUASH BUG

Squash bug

Hand pick the first bugs that appear and find and destroy all eggs. Dust with Bug Death. Protect with wire cloth.

Handpick the first bugs that show up and find and destroy all the eggs. Dust with Bug Death. Cover with wire mesh.

BLIGHT

BLIGHT

Leaves become spotted or covered with down. Spray every two weeks with Bordeaux mixture.

Leaves get spots or become fuzzy. Spray every two weeks with Bordeaux mixture.

ONIONS

Onions

Blight.—Spray every ten days with two-thirds strength Bordeaux mixture. Root lice.—Open trench along side the plants and apply salt freely.

Blight.—Spray every ten days with two-thirds strength Bordeaux mixture. Root lice.—Dig a trench alongside the plants and apply salt generously.

PEAS—APHIS

PEAS—APHIS

Spray with kerosene emulsion until pods are filling; then spray with hot water.

Spray with kerosene emulsion until the pods are filling up; then spray with hot water.

PEAS—MILDEW

PEAS - MOLD

Spray with Bordeaux mixture containing resin wash to make it stick, or with Pyrox.

Spray with Bordeaux mixture that includes resin wash for better adhesion, or use Pyrox.

POTATO—COLORADO BEETLE

Colorado potato beetle

Hand pick to destroy eggs. If young appear spray or dust with Paris green or Pyrox and repeat as often as necessary.

Handpick to destroy eggs. If young ones appear, spray or dust with Paris green or Pyrox and repeat as often as necessary.

FLEA BEETLE

Flea beetle

Keep plants well covered with Bordeaux mixture or Pyrox.

Keep plants well covered with Bordeaux mixture or Pyrox.

SCAB

SCAB

Do not plant on freshly manured land, should be manured in fall or February at latest. Soak seed in formaldehyde before planting and dip each piece in sulphur.

Do not plant on freshly manured land; it should be manured in the fall or by February at the latest. Soak the seeds in formaldehyde before planting and dip each piece in sulfur.

SQUASH BORER

Squash borer

Slit infested stem and destroy worm and cover injured branch with earth or stone.

Slit the infested stem and get rid of the worm, then cover the injured branch with soil or stone.

SQUASH BUGS

Squash bugs

Use tobacco stems freely about hills. Spray with hot water very early in morning.

Use tobacco stems freely around the hills. Spray with hot water very early in the morning.

TOMATO

TOMATO

For leaf-blight.—Spray with Bordeaux mixture every ten days.

For leaf blight — Spray with Bordeaux mixture every ten days.

TOMATO WORMS

Tomato pests

Pick worms, gather eggs and spray with Paris green or Pyrox. Do not use poison after the fruit is set. Fall-plough the tomato lot to rid the soil of the chrysalids of the worm.

Pick worms, collect eggs, and spray with Paris green or Pyrox. Do not use poison after the fruit has set. Plow the tomato area in the fall to get rid of the chrysalids of the worms.

CAUTION

Caution

In nearly all cases of surface infestation of plants, the insects can be destroyed with clear hot water, hot soapsuds of either whale oil soap or ivory soap or kerosene emulsion and this should be the first resort, using poison solutions only when the former fail to give relief.

In most cases of surface pest infestations on plants, you can get rid of the insects using clear hot water, hot soapy water made with either whale oil soap or ivory soap, or kerosene emulsion. This should be the first option, using poison solutions only if these methods don't work.

Bordeaux mixture is so generally indicated for all diseases of foliage and kerosene for so large a number of insects that it pays to prepare these at home in the large quantities and have them always on hand. The kerosene sometimes "goes back" and needs to be forced with the pump into a fresh emulsion.

Bordeaux mixture is widely recommended for all types of leaf diseases, and kerosene is effective against many insects, so it’s worth it to make these solutions at home in large amounts and keep them readily available. Sometimes the kerosene can separate, so it needs to be pumped back into a fresh emulsion.


CHAPTER XV
Winter Storage

It is in the late days of fall that one begins to realize substantially on the summer's investment of seed, time and labor in the garden. Previous to this one has watched the maturing of the summer vegetables with an eye to their immediate use; now one sees before one rich stores of food that shall tide one safely through many lean days when the price of food goes soaring and the visible supply temporarily disappears. If one is putting into cellar storage an abundance of such sugar producing vegetables as beets, squashes, carrots, parsnips and the like one need not fear any injury to the health of the family from a lack of sugar if these are used freely, for they will convert themselves into the needed sweet and although they may not be quite so palatable as cake and candy will supply their place in the economy of the physical system.

It is in the late days of fall that you start to really appreciate the summer's investment of seeds, time, and effort in the garden. Before this, you watched the summer vegetables grow with the intention of using them right away; now you see plenty of food that will get you through tough times when food prices rise and the supply runs low. If you're storing a lot of sugar-producing vegetables like beets, squashes, carrots, parsnips, and the like, you don’t have to worry about the family lacking sugar if you use these regularly, as they will turn into the necessary sweetness. Even though they might not be as tasty as cake and candy, they can serve as a substitute in your diet.

Most winter vegetables need to be kept in cold storage, not in a warm, dry place; for this reason a furnace-heated cellar is not satisfactory, but an adjoining room that is connected by a door that can be opened to admit warm air in a severe spell of winter weather is desirable. For certain roots that are not injured by a low temperature, or even slight freezing, an earth cellar is satisfactory. A cellar of this sort usually admits of piling vegetables on the floor or in pens on the floor and throwing dirt over them to exclude the air and prevent evaporation, and as the vegetables are used the surplus earth can be thrown out on the floor and the labor of storing is much lessened, for it is no small task to carry heavy baskets of earth into the vegetable cellar and to remove it again in the spring. If a small room can be arranged adjoining the cellar proper and bins divided off around the sides and the earth allowed to remain from year to year the task of winter storage will be slight. Beets, carrots, turnips, cabbage, parsnips, salsify, celery, all these things belong in the earth cellar and apples,222 too, may be stored in baskets, barrels or boxes here and will not be injured by light freezing, as it is heat and dry atmosphere that most militate against the successful keeping of winter apples.

Most winter vegetables need to be kept in cold storage, not in a warm, dry place; because of this, a furnace-heated cellar isn’t suitable. However, an adjoining room that can be opened to let in warm air during really harsh winter weather is ideal. For certain roots that can handle colder temperatures or even slight freezing, an earth cellar works well. A cellar like this usually allows for stacking vegetables on the floor or in bins and covering them with dirt to block out air and prevent evaporation. As you use the vegetables, you can just throw the surplus dirt onto the floor, making the storage process much easier. It’s no small task to haul heavy baskets of dirt into the vegetable cellar and then take it out again come spring. If a small room can be set up next to the main cellar with bins along the sides, and the dirt is left there from year to year, winter storage becomes a lot simpler. Beets, carrots, turnips, cabbage, parsnips, salsify, celery—all these should go in the earth cellar. Apples, too, can be stored in baskets, barrels, or boxes here, as they won’t be harmed by light freezing. It’s really heat and a dry atmosphere that cause the most problems with keeping winter apples fresh.

A few other vegetables call for dry, rather warm quarters, like the winter squash, onion, sweet and Irish potato, but good ventilation is indispensable for all. The chief merit of the root-cellar lies in the fact that it can be well ventilated, the windows being opened at times when it would be untenable to open them in rooms devoted to the storage of canned fruit and like perishable things. The windows in the vegetable cellar should not be permanently closed until severe winter weather, though they may be closed during storms and sharp falls of temperature. I have found that the losses from frost were less in direct proportion to the amount of fresh air admitted and in some mild winters the windows have remained open the entire time, the covering of earth being sufficient to preserve the vegetables in excellent shape until spring. Even when such things as are usually stored in the223 earth cellar are frozen stiff, they will be quite usable if thawed out in cold water. The water will draw the ice to the surface and it should be allowed to thaw, when the vegetables will be found entirely usable, but any vegetable that thaws out soft is beyond redemption and should at once be discarded. Also any vegetables found decaying in the cellar should at once be removed and the cause also removed. Usually it will be found that too much heat and too little fresh air are the trouble; opening a window will rectify both troubles.

A few other vegetables need dry, relatively warm conditions, like winter squash, onions, sweet potatoes, and Irish potatoes, but good ventilation is crucial for all of them. The main advantage of a root cellar is that it can be well-ventilated, with windows that can be opened when it wouldn’t be practical to do so in rooms used for storing canned goods and other perishable items. The windows in the vegetable cellar should not be permanently shut until severe winter weather arrives, although they can be closed during storms and sharp drops in temperature. I’ve noticed that losses from frost decrease in direct relation to how much fresh air gets in, and during some mild winters, the windows have stayed open the whole time, with just a layer of earth being enough to keep the vegetables in great shape until spring. Even when items usually kept in the 223 earth cellar are frozen solid, they can still be useful if thawed in cold water. The water will pull the ice to the surface, and it should be allowed to thaw; once thawed, the vegetables will be completely usable. However, any vegetable that thaws out mushy is no good and should be thrown away immediately. Additionally, any vegetables found rotting in the cellar should be removed right away, along with whatever caused the decay. Usually, the problem will be too much heat and not enough fresh air; opening a window will fix both issues.

POTATOES

POTATOES

Being our most important winter vegetables should be stored with great care. Practically their storage begins in the field when they are dug; they should be dug on a bright, dry day, preferably in the morning that the tubers should have time to dry off if at all damp, before being picked up and carried in. It will pay to sort in the field as they are gathered, throwing the culls—small potatoes and any that have been injured224 in digging—by themselves. These will be of value for feeding poultry, rabbits, goats and any stock on the place; they are excellent for horses, keeping the skin and coat in fine shape. Potatoes may lie on the ground in the sun long enough to dry off thoroughly, but not longer; left exposed to the light they will turn green and this discoloration is poisonous. They should be turned over once so that the under side of the potatoes may dry equally.

Being our most important winter vegetables, they should be stored with great care. Essentially, their storage starts in the field when they’re harvested; they should be dug up on a bright, dry day, preferably in the morning, so the tubers have time to dry off if they’re damp before being picked up and brought in. It’s helpful to sort them in the field as you're collecting them, setting aside the culls—small potatoes and any that have been damaged in the digging—on their own. These will be useful for feeding poultry, rabbits, goats, and any other stock on the property; they’re great for horses, helping to keep their skin and coat in good shape. Potatoes can be left on the ground in the sun just long enough to dry thoroughly, but not for too long; if left exposed to the light, they’ll turn green, and that discoloration is poisonous. They should be turned over once so that the underside of the potatoes can dry equally.

Garden
The benefit of having your garden close to your home is clearly illustrated here.

The best equipment for storing potatoes in the cellar consists of long bins divided into compartments that will hold from one to two bushels; these bins should have holes bored in the bottom for ventilation and they should be raised somewhat from the floor. Never store potatoes directly on the floor as this is the coldest part of the cellar and also the dampest; heat rises and cold falls so what heat there may be in the cellar will circulate beneath the bins and if, for any reason, it is necessary to supply artificial heat in the way of oil-stoves or lamps during a spell of zero225 weather the heat can get under the potatoes and raise the temperature in the bottom of the bins as well as on the top.

The best way to store potatoes in the cellar is to use long bins divided into sections that can hold one to two bushels each. These bins should have holes drilled in the bottom for ventilation and should be raised off the floor. Never store potatoes directly on the floor, as it is the coldest and dampest part of the cellar. Heat rises while cold falls, so any warmth in the cellar will circulate underneath the bins. If you need to provide artificial heat with oil stoves or lamps during extremely cold weather, the heat can reach underneath the potatoes and raise the temperature both at the bottom and on top of the bins.

When the potatoes are in the bins they must be covered to exclude light and prevent their turning green. The potatoes should be examined occasionally during winter to be sure that none are decaying or being affected by frost. As a general thing potatoes are not frosted if the skin crackles when the finger nail is pressed into it, but slight touches of frost sometimes do not affect the crispness of the skin but is shown by the potatoes becoming wet after lying for a while in a warm room, or by a sweetish taste when cooked. At that stage they are not injured for food but are less palatable and are liable to develop a queer fungus blight in the center. As spring approaches the potatoes will begin growth at the eyes-sprout, as it is called, and should be looked over and all growth rubbed off. This will probably have to be done more than once as the season advances.

When the potatoes are in the bins, they need to be covered to block out light and stop them from turning green. You should check on the potatoes occasionally during winter to make sure none are rotting or being damaged by frost. Generally, potatoes aren’t damaged by frost if the skin crackles when you press your fingernail against it. However, mild frost can sometimes affect the skin's crispness, which may show up as the potatoes becoming wet after sitting in a warm room for a while or having a slightly sweet taste when cooked. At that point, they're still safe to eat, but they don't taste great and might develop a strange fungus in the center. As spring gets closer, the potatoes will start to sprout from the eyes and should be checked regularly to rub off any growth. You'll likely need to do this more than once as the season progresses.

SWEET POTATOES

Sweet potatoes

Are far more difficult to carry through the winter than the Irish potatoes. They require more warmth and a dryer atmosphere, and should be stored in boxes of dry sand and set on some support away from the floor. The furnace cellar, if not too warm is the best place for them and it is well to use them freely so as to lessen the loss from decay as much as possible.

Are much harder to keep through the winter than Irish potatoes. They need more warmth and a drier atmosphere, so they should be stored in boxes filled with dry sand and placed on a support off the floor. The furnace cellar, if not too hot, is the best spot for them, and it's good to use them regularly to minimize loss from decay as much as possible.

WINTER ONIONS

Winter onions

Should be stored in a dry place, a little above freezing. Slight frost does not injure onions, but repeated freezing and thawing does, while too much heat will start them to growing. An upstairs room that receives sufficient heat to keep it from freezing will do nicely and it is a good plan to use the best onions first so that those which are unfit for use towards spring will not be so much of a loss; however, as these onions make the very best of green onions they are by no means a total loss, but the small and inferior ones will do quite as well for this purpose, for it227 is the live germ only that is important, all the onion body is formed anew. Where there is a hanging shelf in a cellar that is dry and warm the onions can often be wintered there successfully.

Should be stored in a dry place, slightly above freezing. A little frost won't hurt onions, but repeated freezing and thawing does, while too much heat will encourage them to sprout. An upstairs room that gets enough heat to prevent freezing works well, and it's a good idea to use the best onions first so that those that aren’t good anymore by spring won't be such a loss; however, since these onions make great green onions, they are not a total loss. The smaller and lower quality ones work just as well for this purpose, since it's only the live germ that matters; the whole onion body will regrow. If there’s a hanging shelf in a cellar that’s dry and warm, the onions can often be stored there successfully.

WINTER SQUASH

Winter squash

Require a rather warm and dry situation; the cellar rarely affords the right conditions for wintering them successfully. An upstairs room or garret where a chimney passes through is often just the thing for them as they may be piled in a heap near the chimney, with layers of excelsior or straw between, and protected with blankets or quilts and so pass the winter in good condition. From such a storage I have taken perfectly sound, dry Hubbards in mid-June and March squash are by no means a rarity.

Require a warm and dry place; the cellar often doesn't provide the right conditions for successfully storing them over winter. An upstairs room or attic where a chimney runs through is usually ideal, as they can be stacked near the chimney, with layers of excelsior or straw in between, and covered with blankets or quilts to survive the winter in good shape. From such storage, I've taken perfectly sound, dry Hubbards in mid-June, and March squash are not uncommon at all.

BEETS

Beets

May be dug any time before the ground freezes up; the shorter time any vegetable has to remain in cold storage the better for it, so if not brought in until about Thanksgiving the228 delay is all to the good. If the beets are to be stored in a root cellar covered with earth it is not material whether they are topped or not. I have sometimes thought that they kept rather better if the tops were allowed to remain; certainly there is, then, no loss from bleeding, and if piled in heaps with the tops all one way overlapping each other, but the tops free, it is far easier to find and remove them when wanted. Slight freezing does not injure beets if thawed out in cold water, but severe freezing does, so that sufficient earth should be used to cover them and the earth may be protected with blankets if necessary. If no root cellar is available the beets should be topped and packed with earth in bins or boxes in the vegetable cellar. If necessary to store in furnace cellar place as far from the furnace as possible. Where no other place for storage is available running a partition across one end or corner of the cellar will provide a place that will keep most vegetables in good shape and the expense will be covered by the saving in stock. The various wall boards advertised are excellent material with which to229 construct these little storage places and any handy man, or woman, for that matter, can put up something that will answer the purpose by the aid of a hammer and saw, a sheet or two of board and a few pieces of two-by-four to nail to.

You can dig them up anytime before the ground freezes. The less time any vegetable spends in cold storage, the better for it, so if they're not brought in until around Thanksgiving, that delay is actually a good thing. If the beets are going to be stored in a root cellar covered with dirt, it doesn't matter if they have their tops cut off or not. I've sometimes thought they last better if the tops are left on; for sure, there's no bleeding that way, and if you pile them up with the tops facing one direction, overlapping each other but free, it's much easier to find and remove them when needed. Slight freezing doesn't hurt beets if they're thawed in cold water, but severe freezing does, so make sure to use enough dirt to cover them, and you can protect that dirt with blankets if necessary. If you don't have a root cellar, top the beets and pack them in bins or boxes in the vegetable cellar. If you have to store them in a furnace cellar, place them as far from the furnace as you can. If there's no other storage option, putting up a partition at one end or corner of the cellar can create a space that keeps most vegetables in good shape, and the cost will be offset by the savings on your stock. The various wall boards advertised are great materials for building these little storage areas, and any handy person can put together something that works using just a hammer, saw, a couple of sheets of board, and a few two-by-fours to nail together.

CABBAGE

Cabbage

Are best stored in the root cellar, they may be pulled and stood up in the corner of the cellar and the roots buried in somewhat damp earth or they may be cut, the roughest leaves trimmed and the heads buried in earth, setting them upside down so that the earth will not work inside the leaves; handled in this way they should come out sound and good in spring. Wrapping in newspapers, where the supply is limited is sometimes successful, the main thing being to protect from the air and too great cold and to prevent the spread of decay which may attack individual heads.

Are best stored in the root cellar. They can be pulled and stood up in the corner of the cellar with the roots buried in slightly damp soil, or they can be cut, with the roughest leaves trimmed off and the heads buried in soil, placed upside down so that the soil doesn’t get inside the leaves. Handled this way, they should come out healthy and good in the spring. Wrapping them in newspapers, where the supply is limited, is sometimes effective. The main thing is to protect them from air and extreme cold and to prevent decay from spreading to individual heads.

CAULIFLOWER

Cauliflower

May be pulled at the approach of severe weather, the lower leaves removed and the plants230 put root down, buried in soil, in boxes or pens in the root cellar and will be available for some time, but do not keep through the winter like cabbage.

May be pulled when severe weather approaches, the lower leaves removed and the plants230 planted in the ground, buried in soil, in boxes or pens in the root cellar, and will be available for a while, but do not store through the winter like cabbage.

CELERY

CELERY

Should be dug, with the roots intact and placed roots down in boxes of wet soil or sand in the dark cellar, packing the plants close together to exclude air. If the cellar is necessarily light, the plants should be shaded or a corner of the cellar may be enclosed to afford protection from light. A movable partition made from wall board is a very handy thing to have in the root cellar as it makes possible the providing of special conditions as needed.

Should be dug up with the roots intact and placed roots down in boxes of wet soil or sand in a dark cellar, packing the plants close together to keep out air. If the cellar has to be light, the plants should be shaded or a corner of the cellar can be enclosed for protection from light. A movable partition made from wall board is very useful in the root cellar, as it allows for the creation of special conditions as needed.

PARSNIPS

PARSNIPS

Although parsnips are better for remaining in the ground until spring a supply for winter use should be dug in the fall, topped and buried in boxes of sand or earth in the cellar. This may be done in either the root or the kitchen cellar,231 as freezing does not injure the parsnip providing they thaw out in the ground or in water.

Although parsnips are best left in the ground until spring, you should dig up some for winter use in the fall, trim the tops, and store them in boxes filled with sand or soil in the cellar. This can be done in either the root cellar or the kitchen cellar, 231 because freezing won't damage the parsnips as long as they thaw out in the ground or in water.

SALSIFY

Salsify

Requires the same treatment as parsnips—leaving the main crop in the ground until spring but bringing in a supply for winter use. The main thing in the storing of all root vegetables is to prevent wilting more than freezing. Vegetables stored under any conditions, without the protective covering of earth to exclude air, soon become soft and wilted and unfit for food.

Requires the same treatment as parsnips—leave the main crop in the ground until spring but bring in a supply for winter use. The key to storing all root vegetables is to prevent wilting more than freezing. Vegetables stored in any conditions without the protective covering of soil to block air will quickly become soft, wilted, and unfit for eating.

TURNIPS

Turnips

Are especially sensitive to a dry atmosphere and must always be buried in sand or earth if they are to retain their crispness and flavor. They should not be dug until a touch of frost has sweetened them, then they should be topped, reserving the tops for the pig or rabbits and the roots stored as directed.

Are especially sensitive to a dry atmosphere and must always be buried in sand or earth if they are to retain their crispness and flavor. They shouldn’t be dug until a bit of frost has sweetened them; then they should be topped, saving the tops for the pig or rabbits, and the roots stored as directed.


CHAPTER XVI
CANNING THE GARDEN SURPLUS FOR
WINTER USE

The fullest measure of benefit from the garden has not been obtained unless one has preserved for future use the more succulent forms of vegetables that are not susceptible to preservation through winter in the usual form of cold storage.

The maximum benefit from the garden is not achieved unless you have saved for future use the more tender types of vegetables that can't be kept through winter in the usual cold storage methods.

Those early vegetables which are so keen an incentive to the planting of a garden—young beets, spinach greens, string beans, limas, peas, tomatoes and the like must be preserved in a cooked form, hermetically sealed from the air to preserve them from spoiling. This the commercial canners have done for years and we have been content to let them do this work for us at a price that has added materially to the high cost of living, while our own garden product, often of a far better quality, has gone to waste. Market gardeners233 who supply the canneries grow vegetables with a keen eye to their productiveness. If one vegetable will produce a half or a third more to an acre than another variety somewhat better, it is only human to grow that one, but the private garden is not, as a rule, grown with a sole idea of profit; it is quality and the enjoyment of the product that is looked for and only those vegetables that will produce a high grade product will be grown.

Those early vegetables that really inspire us to plant a garden—young beets, spinach, string beans, limas, peas, tomatoes, and so on—need to be preserved in a cooked form, sealed off from air to keep them from spoiling. This is what commercial canners have done for years, and we've been fine letting them handle this for us at a price that’s greatly contributed to the high cost of living, while our own garden produce, often of much better quality, has gone to waste. Market gardeners233 who supply the canneries grow vegetables with a sharp focus on productivity. If one vegetable can yield half or a third more per acre than another variety that’s a bit better, it's natural to choose that one, but a private garden isn’t usually focused solely on profit; it’s about quality and enjoying the produce, so only those vegetables that can produce a high-quality yield are grown.

The home canning of vegetables has been neglected owing to the uncertainty of results. Occasionally one found a housekeeper who could can corn successfully, but the results usually were unsatisfactory, all this, however, is changed since the government experts of the Agricultural Department have, by careful experiments along the lines of all sorts of vegetable products, worked out canning schedules that only require careful following to insure success.

Home canning of vegetables has been overlooked because of unpredictable results. Occasionally, you’d find a homemaker who could successfully can corn, but the outcomes were usually disappointing. However, all that has changed now that government experts from the Agricultural Department have conducted careful experiments with various vegetable products. They’ve developed canning schedules that only need to be followed closely to guarantee success.

The government bulletins give explicit instructions as to necessary equipment, method of handling each separate vegetable and try, in all234 possible ways, to insure success for the worker.

The government bulletins provide clear instructions on the necessary equipment, how to handle each type of vegetable, and strive in every way possible to ensure the worker's success.

At first glance the amount of equipment seems burdensome and some of the requirements unnecessary, but I have found that it is not safe to slight any one of them, but that there are short cuts in the work that materially lessen the labor. It will not always be convenient to supply oneself with a canning outfit involving much expense; especially will this be the case in the small family where only a moderate amount of canning is to be done, though the regular canning outfits greatly simplify and ease up the work. A home-made outfit will, however, take care of all the surplus from the small home garden, especially where there are but two or three cans to be handled at one time. There are always vegetables that mature their fruits sparingly—too many for immediate use, but not enough to sell. However, in order that the vines or plants should continue to bear heavily, all such products as string and lima beans, tomatoes, green corn and the like should be gathered as each reaches its most perfect stage. This often involves some waste unless it can be235 utilized in some way and here is where the canning is effective, as the continual canning of only one or two cans at a time results in the course of a summer in a well-filled cupboard that will insure one against any serious food shortage that may arise during the winter.

At first glance, the amount of equipment seems overwhelming, and some of the requirements may seem unnecessary, but I’ve found it’s not safe to overlook any of them. There are shortcuts in the process that can significantly reduce the labor involved. It won’t always be practical to invest in an expensive canning setup, especially for a small family where only a moderate amount of canning needs to be done, although standard canning kits do simplify things. A DIY setup, however, can handle all the surplus from a small home garden, particularly when only a couple of cans need to be managed at a time. There are always vegetables that bear fruit sparingly—too many for immediate consumption but not enough to sell. To keep the vines or plants producing well, you should collect items like string beans, lima beans, tomatoes, and sweet corn as they reach their peak ripeness. This often leads to some waste unless it can be used in some way, which is where canning comes in handy. Continuously canning just one or two cans at a time throughout the summer can lead to a well-stocked pantry, helping ensure you’re prepared against any significant food shortages that may come in the winter.

There are five types of canning outfits: Homemade outfits, constructed of such utensils as wash boilers, tin pails, milk cans, metal wash tubs and lard pails. The lard pails are especially usable and cream pails are excellent where only a few cans are to be processed at once; even a teakettle can be made to do duty where only one or two pint cans are to be cooked. Any metal vessel that will allow the water to come at least an inch above the tops of the cans will do.

There are five types of canning setups: Homemade outfits, made from items like wash boilers, tin pails, milk cans, metal wash tubs, and lard pails. Lard pails are particularly useful, and cream pails work well when only a few cans need to be processed at a time; even a teakettle can be used if you're only cooking one or two pint cans. Any metal container that allows water to cover the tops of the cans by at least an inch will work.

Hot-Water-Bath Commercial Outfits are constructed usually for outdoor work, with a sterilizing vat, lifting-trays, firebox, and smokepipe, combined in one piece. They are light and convenient. They may be moved about as desired, even carried to the orchard or garden where apples and corn are to be canned in quantity, but236 are more adapted to clubs and neighborhood cooperative work than to the needs of a small family.

Hot-Water-Bath Commercial Outfits are typically designed for outdoor use, featuring a sterilizing vat, lifting trays, firebox, and smokepipe all in one unit. They are lightweight and easy to handle. You can move them around as needed, even take them to the orchard or garden for canning apples and corn in large amounts, but236 they are better suited for clubs and neighborhood cooperatives than for the requirements of a small family.

Water-Seal Outfits consist of a double-walled bath and cover which projects down into the water between the outer and inner walls, thus making three metal walls and two water-jackets between the sterilizing vat and the outside of the canner. A high temperature can be maintained more uniformly than with the hot-water-bath outfit, since the escape of steam is prevented and a slight steam pressure is maintained.

Water-Seal Outfits consist of a double-walled bath and cover that extends down into the water between the outer and inner walls, creating three metal walls and two water jackets between the sterilizing vat and the exterior of the canner. A higher temperature can be kept more consistently than with the hot-water-bath outfit, as the escape of steam is prevented and a small steam pressure is maintained.

Steam-Pressure Outfits are made to carry from five to thirty pounds' pressure and are equipped with steam-tight sterilizer, lifting crate, thermometer, or pressure gauge, safety valve and steam petcock; they are, of course, the most perfect equipment and economical of labor and fuel.

Steam-Pressure Outfits are designed to handle pressures from five to thirty pounds and come with a steam-tight sterilizer, lifting crate, thermometer or pressure gauge, safety valve, and steam petcock; they are, of course, the most efficient equipment available, saving both labor and fuel.

Aluminum Pressure Cookers are combination outfits for cooking and canning and have the advantage of being useful all the year around. They are light in construction, economical of heat and will carry as high as thirty pounds steam237 pressure; they are equipped the same as steam-pressure outfits.

Aluminum Pressure Cookers are multi-purpose tools for cooking and canning, making them useful throughout the year. They are lightweight, energy-efficient, and can handle steam pressures up to thirty pounds237; they come equipped just like steam-pressure systems.

The purpose of this chapter, however, is not to go into the methods necessary for caring for large quantities of vegetables at one time nor the expenditure of any considerable sum in effecting the conservation of garden food; rather it is intended to help the housewife to save, cheaply and easily, her garden surplus as it accumulates day by day. Fuller details than are in the scope of this chapter can be gained through the canning and food preservation bulletins sent out by the Department of Agriculture at Washington and by the various states.

The purpose of this chapter, however, is not to discuss the methods needed to manage large amounts of vegetables at once or the substantial costs involved in preserving garden food; instead, it aims to assist the homemaker in saving her garden surplus easily and affordably as it builds up day by day. More detailed information than what is covered in this chapter can be found in the canning and food preservation bulletins provided by the Department of Agriculture in Washington and various state agencies.

The same general principles pertain to all fruits and vegetables to be canned, only the time of processing varying in individual cases.

The same general principles apply to all fruits and vegetables that need to be canned, with only the processing time differing for each case.

The vegetables to be canned should always be perfect of their kind and absolutely fresh; indeed, it is better to have everything ready for canning before they are gathered, then dress, sterilize and blanch and get into the cans as rapidly as possible. The Cold Pack Process calls for, first, the sterilizing238 of the product by plunging for five or six minutes in boiling water. This is best accomplished by either a wire basket, lined with cheese-cloth, if the vegetable is small, like peas or string beans, or alone for such things as tomatoes, peppers or corn on cob, or by a large piece of cheese-cloth a yard square at least. After blanching the vegetables must be plunged at once in cold water, to set the color and firm the surface. They are then packed at once in the cans, a teaspoon of salt added to each quart and the can filled with boiling water, rubber and top put in place, but not screwed tight, and the cans placed in the container, the water of which must come at least an inch above the top of the cans, and cooked, or processed, for the time indicated for each product. Before using the cans they should be sterilized by boiling, or at least thoroughly heating to obviate danger of cracking when plunged into the hot container.

The vegetables you can should always be top-notch and absolutely fresh; in fact, it’s better to have everything ready for canning before you gather them. Then, dress, sterilize, blanch, and get them into the cans as quickly as possible. The Cold Pack Process starts with sterilizing the product by plunging it for five or six minutes in boiling water. You can achieve this best using a wire basket lined with cheesecloth for smaller vegetables like peas or string beans or by using the vegetables alone for things like tomatoes, peppers, or corn on the cob, or by utilizing a large piece of cheesecloth, at least a yard square. After blanching, the vegetables should be immediately plunged into cold water to set the color and firm the surface. They should then be packed straight into the cans, adding a teaspoon of salt to each quart and filling the can with boiling water, placing the rubber and lid on, but not tightening it completely. The cans should be placed in a container where the water comes at least an inch above the top of the cans, and then cooked or processed for the specified time for each product. Before using the cans, they should be sterilized by boiling or thoroughly heated to prevent cracking when placed into the hot container.

The government directions state quite emphatically that the cans should be boiled but after putting up several hundred cans of vegetables of239 all sorts, without this precaution, all of which kept perfectly, I have come to the conclusion that it cuts out a lot of unnecessary time and equipment, for the necessity of having one large container to sterilize cans, another to sterilize the vegetables, a kettle of boiling water to fill up the cans, and the container for processing, entails a large amount of working space and an unnecessary amount of fuel. If any short cuts can be achieved it is certainly that much to the good, so I have been able to shorten the work so that much of my own canning has been done on a one-burner oil stove with one vessel of boiling water for processing, blanching, sterilizing jars, etc., and one pail of cold water for blanching and a good, big table for handling the vegetables. In handling the work I have everything ready before gathering the vegetables. For a few pint or quart cans I use a cream-pail which will hold four pints or three quarts. In this I have boiling plenty of water. I place the cans in a pan adding a little hot water, turning them carefully until warm through and then fill up and cover. Put240 the vegetables in the wire basket or cheese-cloth, dip them in the boiling water the specified time, plunge into cold water for an instant, take out cans, one at a time, being careful not to touch the tops with the hands, place rubbers, first dipped in the hot water, fill cans with vegetables, with a teaspoon of salt for the quart size, half a teaspoonful for pints, fill with the boiling water from the container, place caps—which have also been sterilized—on, screw down, but not tight and place in container, being sure that there is abundance of water, for the long cooking lowers the water materially and unless there is another kettle of boiling water available for filling up the water may go below the top of the can and the result will be blown out rubbers which will have to be replaced. This is one of the serious handicaps of canning by the cold-pack method. The remedy, however, is simple. Remove the can, remove the cap and put a fresh rubber in place, replace the cap and plunge again in the container and boil for five minutes longer. The changing of the rubber should be done as quickly as possible and241 care should be taken to avoid touching the edge of the top of the can or the inside of the cap while doing so. If there is any delay in replacing the rubber it will be better to boil ten instead of five minutes.

The government instructions clearly state that the cans should be boiled, but after preserving several hundred cans of various vegetables without this step, all of which turned out fine, I've concluded that it saves a lot of unnecessary time and equipment. Having to manage one large container for sterilizing the cans, another for the vegetables, a kettle of boiling water to fill the cans, and a container for processing takes up a lot of space and uses too much fuel. If there are any shortcuts to be found, they are definitely beneficial, so I’ve managed to streamline my canning process to use just a one-burner oil stove, one pot of boiling water for processing, blanching, and sterilizing jars, along with one bucket of cold water for blanching, and a large table for handling the vegetables. I prepare everything beforehand before picking the vegetables. For a few pint or quart cans, I use a cream pail that holds four pints or three quarts. I fill this with plenty of boiling water. I place the cans in a pan, add a bit of hot water, and carefully turn them until they're warm all the way through, then fill and cover them. I put the vegetables in a wire basket or cheesecloth, dip them in boiling water for the required time, then plunge them into cold water for just a moment. I take out the cans one at a time, being careful not to touch the tops with my hands. I place the rubber seals, first dipped in hot water, then fill the cans with vegetables, adding one teaspoon of salt for quarts and half a teaspoon for pints, and fill them with boiling water from the pot. I place the sterilized caps on, screw them down but not too tight, and put them in the container, making sure there’s enough water. The long cooking process reduces the water level, and if there's no extra kettle of boiling water on hand, it might dip below the top of the can and cause the rubber seals to blow out, which will need to be replaced. This is a significant challenge when using the cold-pack method. The solution is straightforward: remove the can, take off the cap, and put on a fresh rubber seal, replace the cap, and boil it again in the container for five more minutes. The rubber change should be done as quickly as possible, and care should be taken not to touch the edge of the can or the inside of the cap while doing it. If there's a delay in replacing the rubber, it's better to boil for ten minutes instead of five.

When the canning is done on the kitchen range or on a three-burner gas or oil stove it will be better to fill the cans with water from the teakettle and to sterilize the cans in a dishpan, allowing them to heat on the stove until required, but excellent results will follow the shorter method. Pint cans are most desirable for such vegetables as string beans, peas, lima beans and the like—things which are used alone and not combined with other foods as tomatoes and corn. Pint cans, however, have about disappeared from the market and even quarts have been at a premium. And one should take unusual care in cleansing cans and tops as soon as emptied, and placing them in a dry place until wanted for another year's canning. A cellar is not a suitable place to store cans, it is far too damp and conducive to mould. If cans are properly cleansed and242 dried and the tops adjusted and stored in a dry upstairs closet they will need far less sterilizing when required for use.

When canning on the kitchen stove or a three-burner gas or oil stove, it’s better to fill the jars with water from the kettle and sterilize them in a dishpan, letting them heat on the stove until needed. However, great results can come from the quicker method. Pint jars are preferred for vegetables like string beans, peas, lima beans, and similar items—things that are used on their own and not mixed with other foods like tomatoes and corn. Unfortunately, pint jars have mostly disappeared from stores, and even quart jars have become hard to find. It’s important to clean jars and lids thoroughly as soon as they’re empty and store them in a dry place until you need them for canning again. A cellar isn’t a good place for jars because it’s too damp and promotes mold. If jars are properly cleaned, dried, and have their lids secured, and they’re stored in a dry closet upstairs, they’ll require much less sterilizing when you’re ready to use them.

Often in canning vegetables it will be found that there is an uneven quantity—that is, there will be a quantity of one kind left after filling the cans, but not enough for another full can; if desired this can be put in a can and cooked with the rest for the family dinner, or it may be put away with the canned goods, for I have found the partially filled cans keep quite as well as the full ones and there are often times when the lesser quantity will be all that is needed for the meal, or it may be just enough for a salad or to combine with some other vegetable in a soup or entrée.

Often when canning vegetables, you might find that there's an uneven amount—that is, you'll have a quantity of one type left after filling the cans, but not enough for another full can. If you want, this can be put in a can and cooked with the rest for the family dinner, or it can be stored with the canned goods. I've discovered that partially filled cans keep just as well as fully filled ones, and there are often times when a smaller amount will be all that's needed for a meal, or it may be just enough for a salad or to mix with another vegetable in a soup or entrée.

In placing the cans in the container there must always be a rack of some sort to keep the cans from direct contact with the bottom of the vessel. This should, if possible, be in the form of a wire rack. The wire trivets to set hot dishes on, which may be obtained at the ten cent counter of any department store, are excellent for use in cream cans; they just fill the bottom and as243 they rest on little half-inch feet they allow the water to circulate freely beneath the cans, which is very important and failure to provide for which is sometimes a cause of blown out rubbers. For canning with large cans—quarts and two quarts—the twenty-five pound lard-cans are excellent. They are tall enough to insure plenty of water over the top of the cans and will accommodate four or five two quart and five or six one quart cans and seven pints, though some recommend placing two tiers of pints in the container, but I have always thought that rather risky. The lard-cans are very light to handle and the lids fit closely, retaining the steam. Whenever there is an imperfect closing of the lid it will be well to place a towel over the top of the can before adjusting the lid to insure the retention of the steam. If this is done the water will not evaporate so rapidly.

When placing the cans in the container, there should always be some kind of rack to keep the cans from touching the bottom of the vessel. Ideally, this should be a wire rack. The wire trivets designed for hot dishes, which can be found at any department store's ten-cent section, work great in cream cans; they just fill the bottom, and because they rest on little half-inch feet, they let water circulate freely underneath the cans, which is very important—neglecting this can sometimes cause the rubber seals to fail. For canning with large cans—like quarts and two quarts—the twenty-five-pound lard cans are perfect. They’re tall enough to ensure there’s plenty of water over the top of the cans and can hold four or five two-quart cans, five or six one-quart cans, and seven pint cans. Some suggest placing two tiers of pint cans in the container, but I’ve always thought that’s a bit risky. The lard cans are lightweight and the lids fit snugly, trapping the steam. If the lid doesn’t close perfectly, it's a good idea to place a towel over the top of the can before securing the lid to help keep the steam in. If you do this, the water won't evaporate as quickly.

The following schedule of time for processing vegetables is that suggested by the Department of Agriculture and is authoritative. In every instance the time for processing must be counted244 from the time the water commences to boil after the cans are put in the container, and the boiling must be continuous.

The following schedule for processing vegetables is recommended by the Department of Agriculture and is considered authoritative. In every case, the processing time must be counted244 starting from when the water begins to boil after the cans are placed in the container, and the boiling must be continuous.

CANNING DIRECTIONS FOR VEGETABLES

Canning Instructions for Vegetables

Asparagus—The green grasses grown in the home garden do not, as a rule, can well. They are too tender and delicate and break down under the long cooking suggested. It might be well to experiment with this, cooking only a short time and if the asparagus keeps two weeks or more, open a can and test the flavor and if found acceptable more can be canned. It requires the tough white asparagus like the Bonvillet or Argenteuil for canning and those are the kinds used in commercial canning. Possibly if the green grasses were cut below the ground as is done with the French grasses it would stand up better under cooking. The directions follow.

Asparagus—The green asparagus grown in home gardens usually doesn't can well. They're too tender and delicate and break down with the long cooking times suggested. It might be a good idea to experiment with this by cooking them for a shorter time. If the asparagus lasts two weeks or more, open a can and test the flavor; if it's acceptable, you can can more. It requires the tougher white asparagus like Bonvillet or Argenteuil for canning, which are the varieties used in commercial canning. If the green asparagus were cut below the ground, like the French varieties, they might hold up better during cooking. The directions follow.

Asparagus—Gather and clean at once, scraping off the scales on the sides, and cut to equal length. It takes about three bunches for a pint can as they shrink in blanching. Blanch five245 minutes, plunge at once in cold water. Pack in cans, sliding the stalks in carefully, butts down, fill with hot water, add one teaspoonful of salt to a quart, place rubber and cap in position but do not screw down tight. Place in container as fast as filled and boil 90 minutes. Remove and stand can on cap to cool.

Asparagus—Gather and clean right away, scraping off the scales on the sides, and cut to the same length. You’ll need about three bunches for a pint jar, as they shrink while blanching. Blanch for five245 minutes, then immediately plunge them into cold water. Pack them into jars, sliding the stalks in gently, bottoms down, fill with hot water, and add one teaspoon of salt per quart. Place the rubber seal and lid in position, but don’t screw it down tightly. Put them in the container as you fill them and boil for 90 minutes. Remove and let the jars cool upside down.

Beets—Select young beets about an inch and a quarter in diameter as the small beets retain their color better than larger ones. About an inch of the top may be left on. Wash very carefully but do not break the skin or remove the tap-root. Blanch four to five minutes, plunge at once in cold water. Remove skins by slipping them off with the hand, avoid the use of knife if possible and pack at once in cans. Fill with hot water adding one teaspoonful of salt to the can and place rubber and cap in place, place in container and boil 90 minutes.

Beets—Choose young beets that are about an inch and a quarter in diameter, as the smaller beets hold their color better than larger ones. You can leave about an inch of the top on. Wash them very carefully, but be sure not to break the skin or remove the taproot. Blanch for four to five minutes, then immediately plunge them into cold water. Remove the skins by slipping them off with your hands, and try to avoid using a knife if you can. Pack them right away into cans. Fill with hot water, adding one teaspoon of salt to each can, and place the rubber and cap in position. Put the cans in a container and boil for 90 minutes.

Beans, String—String or hull, blanch in hot water from five to ten minutes, or cut in half inch lengths and steam for five minutes—for small quantities a wire flour sieve over a teakettle will246 answer admirably—dip quickly in cold water, pack in cans. Fill with hot water, adding one teaspoonful of salt to the quart. Place rubbers and caps in position, cook for 120 minutes, remove and invert to cool and test the joint.

Beans, String—For string or hull beans, blanch in hot water for five to ten minutes, or cut into half-inch pieces and steam for five minutes. For smaller quantities, a wire flour sieve over a kettle will246 work perfectly. Dip them quickly in cold water and pack them into cans. Fill with hot water, adding one teaspoon of salt for each quart. Place the lids and rubber seals in place, cook for 120 minutes, then remove and turn upside down to cool and check the seal.

Beans, Lima—Shell and plunge in boiling water for five to ten minutes, plunge immediately in cold water. Pack at once in cans, handling very carefully. Put rubbers and cap in position but not tight. Place in container and cook 180 minutes.

Beans, Lima—Shell and boil in water for five to ten minutes, then immediately transfer to cold water. Pack into cans right away, handling with care. Position the rubber and cap but don't tighten them. Place in a container and cook for 180 minutes.

Cauliflower—Lay the heads in salted water half an hour to free from any insects that may have lodgment in the head. Break the head into convenient sized pieces and blanch in boiling water five minutes, plunge at once into cold water, pack in cans, fill with boiling water, add one teaspoonful of salt to the quart and place rubber and cap in position but not tight, place in container and cook 60 minutes. This is the government time but I have found it overcooks the cauliflower.

Cauliflower—Soak the heads in salted water for half an hour to get rid of any bugs that might be hiding in them. Cut the heads into manageable pieces and blanch in boiling water for five minutes, then immediately transfer to cold water. Pack into jars, fill with boiling water, add one teaspoon of salt per quart, and place the rubber seal and cap on without tightening them. Put in a container and cook for 60 minutes. This is the official time, but I’ve found it makes the cauliflower too soft.

Corn—This seems to give home canners more247 trouble than any other vegetable. This is probably caused by delay in the operation. The canning of corn involves more labor than any other vegetable and it is difficult for one person alone to handle it successfully. Two working together, one cutting the corn from the ear and the other packing it in the can, will insure a better result. The corn to be canned should be of the sweetest variety—Golden Bantam or Bantam Evergreen being excellent sorts. It should be picked at just the right stage—between the milk and the dough stage, or when the milk that flows when the grain is broken with the thumb nail looks milky and not watery. It is better to do one can at a time, blanching and dipping in cold water and packing the corn in the can, allowing a half inch at the top for the swelling of the corn, adding a teaspoonful of sugar and one of salt for every quart and filling with hot water, capping and placing in the container before going on with the next canful. The first can put in will not be injured by the extra cooking. Waterlogged or soaked corn is an indication of slowness in248 packing. If it is desired to can corn on the ear, blanch, plunge into cold water and pack at once in cans large enough to hold several ears. The two quart economy jars are excellent for canning corn on the ears. Whole corn is a little difficult to pack economically, but it can be packed closely if the jar is laid on the side when packing and the corn slid in, the first row being put in butt down and the second tip down. Add a tablespoonful of sugar to each quart can and do not fill more than one-third full with boiling water. When the can is filled with water the flavor of the corn is impaired, and it is more or less water-soaked. The big Stowell's Evergreen Corn is beautiful when canned whole; indeed so fine is its appearance that it is almost worth while to can it just for its appearance on the shelves of the fruit cupboard. Dipping the tops of the cans in paraffin aids in preserving the contents. When heating for use in winter, place in oven instead of hot water as this will render it more dry.

Corn—Home canners often find this more challenging than any other vegetable. This is likely due to delays during the process. Canning corn requires more effort than other vegetables, and it's tough for one person to manage it alone. If two people work together, one cutting the corn from the ear and the other packing it into the can, they will achieve better results. The corn should be from the sweetest varieties—Golden Bantam or Bantam Evergreen are great choices. It needs to be picked at the perfect time—between the milk and dough stages, when the milk that flows from a broken kernel looks milky, not watery. It's best to can one batch at a time: blanch the corn, plunge it into cold water, then pack it into the can, leaving half an inch at the top for the corn's expansion. Add a teaspoon of sugar and a teaspoon of salt for every quart, then fill with hot water, cap it, and place it in the canner before moving on to the next batch. The first can will not be harmed by extra cooking. Waterlogged or soaked corn indicates slow packing. If you want to can corn on the cob, blanch it, plunge it into cold water, and pack it instantly into large enough cans to hold several ears. The two-quart economy jars are perfect for canning corn on the cob. Packing whole corn can be a little tricky, but it can be packed tightly if the jar is laid on its side during packing. Slide the corn in, placing the first row butt down and the second row tip down. Add a tablespoon of sugar to each quart jar and fill only one-third full with boiling water. If you fill the jar with too much water, it can diminish the corn's flavor and make it soggy. Stowell's Evergreen Corn looks beautiful when canned whole; it’s so attractive that canning it just for display in the pantry is almost worth it. Dipping the tops of the cans in paraffin helps preserve the contents. When reheating for winter, place the jars in the oven instead of hot water, as this will keep the corn drier.

Okra—Gather the pods while still tender, wipe249 clean, plunge into boiling water five minutes, plunge immediately in cold water, remove and cut into half-inch rings. Pack in can, adding one teaspoonful of salt to the quart. Fill with boiling water, place rubber and cap in position, tighten and put at once in container and cook 120 minutes. Remove, tighten cap and reverse to cool and test seal.

Okra—Harvest the pods when they're still tender, wipe them clean, plunge them into boiling water for five minutes, then quickly transfer to cold water. Remove and slice into half-inch rings. Pack into a jar, adding one teaspoon of salt per quart. Fill with boiling water, secure the rubber seal and cap, tighten it, and immediately place in a container to cook for 120 minutes. After cooking, tighten the cap and turn the jar upside down to cool and check the seal.

Peas—Should always be freshly gathered, shell and steam over boiling water for ten minutes, blanch and pack at once into cans, adding one teaspoon of salt and one of sugar to each quart. Put rubber and cap in position, but do not tighten. Place in container and sterilize 180 minutes. Peas should be very carefully handled. A cloudy appearance of the water is an indication of rough handling or broken peas.

Peas—Always use fresh peas, shell them, and steam over boiling water for ten minutes. Blanch and pack them into cans immediately, adding one teaspoon of salt and one teaspoon of sugar for each quart. Put the rubber and cap in place, but don’t tighten them. Place them in a container and sterilize for 180 minutes. Handle peas very carefully. A cloudy appearance in the water indicates rough handling or broken peas.

Tomatoes—Scald until skin loosens sufficiently to remove easily, cold dip, empty the seed cavities and cut in small pieces. Pack at once in cans, pressing the tomato down full. Add one teaspoonful of salt to the quart but no water. Place rubber and cap and put in container and250 cook 22 minutes. Remove, reverse to cool and test seal. Tomatoes cooked in the open-pan method so long customary are so satisfactory that it is scarcely worth while to change the method, unless one finds the cold-pack way more convenient and agreeable. If preferred tomatoes may be canned whole or simply cut in two and the seed cavities emptied. Smaller or broken tomatoes may be cooked and passed through a sieve to remove the seeds and the purée thus formed used to fill in between the slices in the can; this makes a very fine product.

Tomatoes—Scald them until the skin loosens enough to peel off easily, then dip them in cold water, remove the seeds, and chop into small pieces. Pack them immediately into cans, pressing the tomatoes down to fill them completely. Add one teaspoon of salt for each quart, but do not add water. Place the rubber seal and cap on, then put them in the container and250 cook for 22 minutes. Remove them, turn them upside down to cool, and check the seal. The method of cooking tomatoes in an open pan has always been satisfactory, so it might not be worth changing unless the cold-pack method is more convenient and pleasant for you. If desired, tomatoes can be canned whole or simply cut in half with the seeds removed. Smaller or damaged tomatoes can be cooked and passed through a sieve to get rid of the seeds, and the resulting purée can be used to fill in between the slices in the can; this makes a really great product.

It is not advisable to can vegetables that can be stored successfully in cellar or store rooms; such products should not deplete the already scanty store of cans; but in the case of people living in flats or apartments where there are no storage facilities squash and pumpkins for pies may be utilized in this way to advantage.

It’s not a good idea to can vegetables that can be stored easily in a cellar or pantry; those products shouldn’t reduce the limited supply of cans. However, for people living in flats or apartments without storage options, canning squash and pumpkins for pies can be a smart choice.

Squash and Pumpkins—Prepare and cut into convenient sections, blanch three minutes, cold dip. Pack closely in hot jars or cans. Fill with boiling water, add teaspoonful of salt to each251 quart. Put rubbers and caps of jars into position but do not tighten. Put in container and sterilize 120 minutes. Remove, tighten caps and reverse to cool and test seal.[4]

Squash and Pumpkins—Prepare and slice into manageable pieces, blanch for three minutes, then dip in cold water. Pack tightly into hot jars or cans. Fill with boiling water and add a teaspoon of salt for each quart251. Place the rubber seals and lids on the jars, but don’t tighten them. Put them in a sterilizer and process for 120 minutes. When done, tighten the lids and turn them upside down to cool and check the seal.[4]

Soups—Odds and ends of vegetables that occur during the summer may be utilized for vegetable soups. It often happens that tomatoes are picked by the chickens so that they are unsalable, but otherwise sound, or they may be spotted in a way that does not preclude the use of the uninjured portion; such tomatoes may be used for canning if the injured portion is carefully removed. Okra that is getting too large to be left ungathered, a few string or lima beans, carrots that are crowded—anything in the vegetable line that lends itself to the concoction of a palatable soup may be utilized and so make the garden just that much more remunerative. If possible the amount of tomato should nearly or quite equal that of the other vegetables combined.252 The tomatoes should be scalded, cold dipped, the seed cavities emptied and the pulp cooked until it will pass through a wire sieve to free it from the seeds. The other vegetables should be blanched, plunged into cold water and put through the meat chopper and added to the tomato and the cans filled, but no water added, the juice of the vegetables, and especially of the tomato, being sufficient. The following combination makes an excellent soup: When the cans are opened for use in winter beef stock to give the proper consistency should be added, or one bouillon cube to each portion to be served and sufficient water may be substituted or a cream soup may be prepared by using milk and adding rolled crackers.

Soups—Leftover vegetables from the summer can be used to make vegetable soups. Sometimes, tomatoes are picked by chickens, making them unsellable, but they’re still good otherwise, or they might have some spots that don’t affect the usable parts; these tomatoes can be canned if you carefully remove the damaged sections. Overgrown okra, a few string or lima beans, crowded carrots—anything that can contribute to a tasty soup can be used, which helps maximize the garden’s value. Ideally, the amount of tomato should be about the same as or slightly more than the total of the other vegetables combined.252 The tomatoes should be scalded, dipped in cold water, the seeds taken out, and the pulp cooked until it can be strained through a wire sieve to remove any seeds. The other vegetables should be blanched, then placed in cold water, put through a meat grinder, and added to the tomatoes, filling the cans without adding water; the juice from the vegetables, especially from the tomatoes, is enough. An excellent soup combination is as follows: When you open the cans in winter, add beef stock for the right consistency, or one bouillon cube per serving, and enough water can be substituted. Alternatively, a creamy soup can be made using milk and adding crushed crackers.

Vegetable Soup—½ bushel tomatoes, three stalks of celery or one teaspoonful of celery seed, one head cabbage, six carrots, three turnips, six ears corn cut down through each row of kernels and the kernels sliced off the ear, ½ peck string beans, two quarts shelled lima beans, one dozen onions, three red peppers, six salsify roots, one253 pint of okra pods (sliced) one cup salt, one tablespoon black pepper.

Vegetable Soup—½ bushel of tomatoes, three stalks of celery or one teaspoon of celery seed, one head of cabbage, six carrots, three turnips, six ears of corn (cut through each row of kernels and the kernels sliced off the ear), ½ peck of string beans, two quarts of shelled lima beans, one dozen onions, three red peppers, six salsify roots, one253 pint of sliced okra pods, one cup of salt, one tablespoon of black pepper.

Prepare tomatoes as suggested above, cut all the other vegetables fine and add to the tomatoes. Separate into two parts. To one part add one cup of rice, cooked till tender, to the remainder an equal amount of cooked barley. Fill in cans and process two hours. Soups can scarcely be cooked too much, as unless the vegetables are thoroughly softened the product is unsatisfactory. The cabbage and turnips may be omitted if their flavor is not liked.

Prepare the tomatoes as mentioned above, chop all the other vegetables finely, and mix them with the tomatoes. Divide the mixture into two parts. To one part, add one cup of cooked rice, and to the other part, add an equal amount of cooked barley. Fill the mixture into cans and process for two hours. Soups can hardly be overcooked, as the vegetables need to be fully softened for the final product to be satisfying. You can skip the cabbage and turnips if you don't like their flavor.

The government bulletins give a number of formulas for soups and camp rations which are worth considering when conserving one's garden supplies, if one already has cans and tops. (The pint cans are best as the soup is in solid form and a pint is sufficient for a family, when reduced with broth, water or milk.) The cost of the soup per can will not exceed two or three cents as against ten for the much smaller cans purchased at the grocery.

The government bulletins provide several recipes for soups and camp rations that are worth looking at when you're trying to make the most of your garden supply, especially if you already have cans and lids. (Pint cans are ideal since the soup is solid, and a pint is enough for a family when mixed with broth, water, or milk.) The cost of the soup per can will be no more than two or three cents compared to ten cents for the much smaller cans bought at the store.

Sweet Corn Dried—As corn is more trouble to can than any of the other vegetables and more uncertain in its results, many housekeepers prefer to dry it, and a way that is very highly recommended is as follows: The corn is gathered when still in the milk stage, somewhat younger than for canning. It is necessary for two to handle the product as it must all be finished in one operation—that is, it is a one-day job, and a rather strenuous and busy one, too. As in canning, the corn is blanched, plunged in cold water, the grains scored through the center and sliced from the cob, care being given that no part of the cob is included. It is then placed on plates or tins with a small amount of butter or butter substitute added—just enough to prevent the corn sticking to the plates—and placed in the oven and on top of the stove to dry. It must be stirred almost continuously to prevent burning or sticking. Only as much corn must be prepared at one time as can be accommodated on the stove or in the oven and one person must prepare and cut the corn while the other stirs and dries it. The dry255 corn is then stored in paper bags or paper cartons until wanted, and is said to be a very delicious product, much better liked than canned corn.

Sweet Corn Dried—Since canning corn is more difficult than preserving other vegetables and the results can be unpredictable, many home cooks choose to dry it instead. A highly recommended method is as follows: Gather the corn when it’s still in the milk stage, which is a bit younger than what you would use for canning. It takes two people to complete the process in one day since it requires a lot of effort and keeps you busy. Like with canning, the corn is blanched, plunged into cold water, and the kernels are sliced off the cob, making sure no cob pieces are included. It’s then spread on plates or tins with a small amount of butter or a butter substitute to prevent sticking, and put in the oven and on the stovetop to dry. You need to stir it almost constantly to avoid burning or sticking. Prepare only as much corn as will fit on the stove or in the oven, and one person should handle cutting the corn while the other stirs and drying it. The dried255 corn is then stored in paper bags or cartons until needed and is said to taste much better than canned corn.

Bulletins for Drying Fruit and Vegetables are sent out by the Department of Agriculture on request and should be very helpful to the housewife.

Bulletins for Drying Fruit and Vegetables are sent out by the Department of Agriculture upon request and should be very useful to the homemaker.

4 Or—cut in large pieces and steam or bake until soft, remove from shell and mash smooth. Fill cans, pressing down evenly with a wooden spoon or potato masher, place rubber and caps and plunge in container for one hour.

4 Or—cut into large pieces and steam or bake until soft, remove from the shell and mash until smooth. Fill cans, pressing down evenly with a wooden spoon or potato masher, place on the rubber and caps, and submerge in a container for one hour.


CHAPTER XVII
Fall gardening tasks

If the garden has been well tended during the growing season there will not be much rubbish to clear away and the absence of weeds will make the harvesting of the winter vegetables a pleasure. A bright, sunny day is best for digging all root vegetables, especially potatoes which should be allowed to lie on the ground until dry enough for the dirt to shake off, leaving the tubers clean and sightly.

If the garden has been well cared for during the growing season, there won't be much mess to clean up, and the lack of weeds will make gathering the winter vegetables enjoyable. A bright, sunny day is perfect for digging up all root vegetables, especially potatoes, which should be left on the ground until they dry enough for the dirt to shake off, leaving the tubers clean and attractive.

After frost has killed the vegetables so that no further good will be derived from them they should be pulled and piled in a heap to dry and be burned; especially is this desirable if they have been infested with any disease or insects during summer, but if free from any harmful conditions they should, preferably, be put on the compost heap to add fertility to the coming season's garden.

After frost has killed the vegetables so that no more good can come from them, they should be pulled up and stacked in a pile to dry out and be burned; this is especially recommended if they were affected by any diseases or insects during the summer. However, if they are free from any harmful conditions, it’s better to put them on the compost heap to boost the fertility of next season's garden.

Wire trellises, poles and wires used for the training of peas, tomatoes, cucumbers and the like should now be removed and stored away for next year. All boxes, boards or sash that can harbor insects or the chrysalids of cabbage or other worms, should be raised, cleaned and removed.

Wire trellises, poles, and wires used for supporting peas, tomatoes, cucumbers, and similar plants should now be taken down and stored for next year. All boxes, boards, or frames that can attract insects or the chrysalids of cabbage or other worms should be lifted, cleaned, and removed.

The winter treatment of the garden will depend upon conditions that have existed during summer. If the garden has been free from insects and disease it will have been a good plan to sow the entire area to rye for a cover crop during winter, to be turned under for green manure in the spring. This protects the ground from leaching during winter, especially if the winter should be open, and adds materially to the fertility of the soil, but if there has been trouble with insects and disease it will be better to fall-plough, leaving the ground in furrows so that as many as possible of the chrysalids and larvæ of the various plant enemies may be destroyed.

The winter care of the garden will depend on the conditions that were present during the summer. If the garden has been free of pests and diseases, it’s a good idea to sow the entire area with rye as a cover crop during winter, which will be turned under for green manure in the spring. This helps protect the soil from leaching during the winter, especially if the winter is mild, and significantly increases the soil's fertility. However, if there have been issues with pests and diseases, it’s better to plow the ground under, leaving it in furrows so that as many chrysalids and larvae of various plant enemies as possible can be eliminated.

If onion seed has been sown in August for258 early spring onions it will be well to give the beds a covering of straw or marsh hay at the approach of cold weather. The rhubarb rows may be banked with coarse manure from the barnyard and the asparagus bed may have the tops removed and the roots protected with manure; this will hasten the production of shoots in the spring and make stronger roots.

If onion seeds were planted in August for early spring onions, it's a good idea to cover the beds with straw or marsh hay as cold weather approaches. The rhubarb rows can be built up with coarse manure from the barnyard, and the asparagus bed should have the tops cut off, with the roots protected by manure; this will speed up the growth of shoots in the spring and strengthen the roots.

If there is a bit of land available for early peas it may be ploughed and the furrows filled with well-rotted manure, each furrow turned over the manure in the next and the rows marked with sticks; in early spring, drills may be opened with the hand cultivators and the seed for the very earliest peas sown.

If there's a small piece of land ready for early peas, it can be plowed and the furrows filled with well-rotted manure. Each furrow should be turned over onto the manure in the next one, and the rows marked with sticks. In early spring, you can use hand cultivators to open drills and plant the seeds for the earliest peas.

If the lettuce, carrots, beets, salsify, endive, spinach, parsnips and radishes have proved satisfactory and any of the annual varieties have been allowed to go to seed it will be wise to save the seed for the coming season as the increasing shortage of seeds makes it more or less problematical whether a supply may be forthcoming another season.259 Lettuce, endive, spinach, Swiss chard, Chinese cabbage, and radishes seed freely the first year, beets, carrots, salsify, parsnips and turnips the second year and the mature vegetables must be planted in the spring to produce seed. If there are good roots of carrots and beets, these may be stored in sand in the cellar and planted out in the spring when they will bloom and produce seed. The parsnips and salsify left in the ground may be dug in the spring and reset where they are to bloom and a few plants will give sufficient seed for the home garden. The seed from the best tomatoes should have been saved, a few melons, cucumbers and eggplants allowed to ripen and the finest of the red peppers saved for seed. The sweetest and driest of the winter squash should have its seed set aside for the coming year. Even should there prove to be an abundance of seed this saving will do no harm; the raising of seed of biennial vegetables is interesting and should there be a real scarcity of seed one will be very thankful of the forethought260 which makes the shortage innocuous as far as one's own garden is concerned and, besides, one may do one's little bit by supplying friends and neighbors.

If the lettuce, carrots, beets, salsify, endive, spinach, parsnips, and radishes have been satisfactory and any of the annual varieties have gone to seed, it would be wise to save the seeds for the next season since the increasing shortage of seeds makes it uncertain whether there will be a good supply available next season.259 Lettuce, endive, spinach, Swiss chard, Chinese cabbage, and radishes will freely produce seeds the first year, while beets, carrots, salsify, parsnips, and turnips will do so in the second year, and the mature vegetables need to be planted in the spring to produce seeds. If there are good roots of carrots and beets, they can be stored in sand in the cellar and planted in the spring when they will bloom and produce seeds. The parsnips and salsify left in the ground can be dug up in the spring and replanted where they are to bloom, and a few plants will yield enough seeds for the home garden. Seeds from the best tomatoes should have been saved, and a few melons, cucumbers, and eggplants should be allowed to ripen, along with the finest red peppers set aside for seeds. The sweetest and driest winter squash should have its seeds reserved for the coming year. Even if there turns out to be plenty of seeds, saving them is beneficial; growing seeds from biennial vegetables is interesting, and if there is a real seed shortage, you’ll be grateful for the foresight that makes the shortage less concerning for your own garden. Plus, you can help out friends and neighbors. 260


CHAPTER XVIII
THE ANNUAL GARDEN

For the busy woman who has but a modicum of time to spare for the growing of flowers, but is loath to relinquish entirely their cheerful presence about the grounds and house, the annual garden with its wide diversity of color, season and charm affords the greatest possible returns for the outlay required. A few packets of seed, most of which may be purchased for from five to ten cents, will lay the foundation for sheets and sheets of bloom and the labor of planting and caring for them will be less than is required for perennials.

For the busy woman who has little time to spend on growing flowers, but doesn’t want to completely give up their cheerful presence in her yard and home, an annual garden with its wide variety of color, seasonal appeal, and charm offers the best return on investment. A few packets of seeds, most costing between five and ten cents, will create beautiful blooms, and the effort needed to plant and take care of them will be less than what’s needed for perennials.

One great advantage in growing annuals is that the beds may be freshly prepared each spring, there is nothing in the way to retard spading—no perennial growths to be carefully worked around, that the roots may not be injured or the new growth, not yet above ground, be destroyed.262 It is all straight ahead work, and the first early crop of weeds is completely eliminated, grass eradicated and all is in order for the reception of the plants which may have been started in flats in the house or in a hotbed or cold frame or, in the case of such annuals as do not take kindly to transplanting, in the open ground.

One big advantage of growing annuals is that the garden beds can be freshly prepared each spring. There’s nothing getting in the way of turning the soil—no perennials to work around carefully to avoid damaging their roots or harming new growth that hasn't surfaced yet.262 It’s all straightforward work, and you can completely get rid of the first round of weeds, clear out the grass, and everything is ready for planting. This can include plants started in trays indoors, in a hotbed or cold frame, or, for those annuals that don’t transplant well, seeds sown directly in the ground.

Nor is it necessary in the case of annuals that there should be a regular, formally laid out garden or permanent beds. A border about the base of the house along the fence or walks, will give room for several kinds of flowers, flowers that will be a mass of bloom from early summer until late frost.

Nor is it necessary for annuals to have a regular, formally designed garden or permanent beds. A border around the base of the house along the fence or walkways will provide space for various types of flowers, creating a burst of blooms from early summer until the first frost.

A very satisfactory place for annuals I have found is down through the vegetable garden. I like their company while I am at work among the useful but less ornamental vegetables, so always plan to have a row of something mid-way of the garden; usually the row takes the form of tea roses which never do so well for me as in this homely situation. The culture is more thorough than can be given to plants in beds, there is less263 crowding, hence fewer insect pests and I always plan to have the adjacent vegetables of as ornamental a character as possible; a fine row of mossy parsley on one side, feathery carrots on the opposite row gives a charming background of green. Lettuce, beets, parsnips, any of the pleasantly leaved greens are attractive companion rows and although the rose is the aristocrat of the garden, objecting decidedly to sharing her bed with less royal plants I have never found that she objects to their presence when they keep to their own allotted row.

A great spot for annuals I've found is down by the vegetable garden. I enjoy their company while I'm working among the useful but less decorative vegetables, so I always plan to have a row of something halfway through the garden; usually, this row consists of tea roses, which never thrive as well for me as they do in this cozy spot. The care is more thorough than what can be given to plants in beds, there’s less263 overcrowding, which means fewer insect pests, and I always try to have the nearby vegetables be as decorative as possible; a lovely row of mossy parsley on one side and feathery carrots on the other provides a charming green backdrop. Lettuce, beets, parsnips, or any of the nicely-leaved greens make attractive companion rows, and even though the rose is the aristocrat of the garden and definitely prefers not to share its bed with less noble plants, I've never found that it mind their presence as long as they stick to their own designated row.

This long row through the garden is an excellent place to start seeds of hardy perennials for transplanting into permanent beds the following year, but only for this preliminary growth, for the annual plowing makes their permanent tenancy impracticable, but bedding plants such as dahlias, gladioli, tigridias and the like will be at their best here and in their summer culture have all the characteristics of annuals.

This long row in the garden is a great spot to start seeds of hardy perennials for transplanting into permanent beds next year, but only for this initial growth. The annual plowing makes it impractical for them to stay permanently. However, bedding plants like dahlias, gladioli, tigridias, and similar varieties will thrive here, and during the summer, they exhibit all the traits of annuals.

For early blooming it is always worth while to sow the seeds of annuals early in the spring in264 flats in the house or in a hotbed or cold frame. Usually one can spare room in the hotbed for a few plats of seeds and these should be sown at the same time the seeds of the vegetables are sown, sowing each separate variety in little plats by itself, separating the plats from each other by narrow strips of wood pressed into the ground, and labelling each plat with the names of seed, date of sowing and, if known, the length of time it takes for the seed to germinate. Annuals, however, germinate more rapidly than perennials, many appearing above ground in from three to five days after sowing, though a few, like the Arctotis Grandis, nicotianas and ricinus, may take from ten to fifteen days. This is where the forethought of labelling the seed plats with date of sowing and period of germination is of practical value—it prevents undue impatience and discouragement when the plants fail to appear as soon as we expect them to; but with a mixed planting of seeds of varying characteristics, there will always be early comers to encourage one and265 keep alive faith in the ultimate appearance of the least and last.

For early blooming, it's always worthwhile to sow annual seeds early in the spring in 264 flats inside the house or in a hotbed or cold frame. Usually, you can find space in the hotbed for a few seed flats, and these should be sown at the same time as the vegetable seeds. Sow each variety in small flats by itself, separating them with narrow strips of wood pressed into the ground, and label each flat with the seed names, sowing date, and if known, the expected germination time. Annuals, however, germinate more quickly than perennials, with many emerging within three to five days after sowing, although some, like Arctotis Grandis, nicotianas, and ricinus, may take ten to fifteen days. This is why labeling the seed flats with the sowing date and germination period is practical—it helps avoid impatience and discouragement when the plants don’t show up as quickly as we hope; but with a mixed planting of seeds with different characteristics, there will always be early arrivals to inspire us and 265 maintain our faith in the eventual appearance of the last and least.

Any considerable planting of annuals should include those that will give a long season of bloom for scenic effect, those that will be especially desirable for cut flowers and above all those special flowers which most appeal to our sentiment and are dear to us through associations or suggestions.

Any significant planting of annuals should include ones that will provide a long blooming season for visual appeal, those that are particularly good for cut flowers, and especially those unique flowers that resonate with our emotions and hold special meaning for us due to past experiences or memories.

For mass planting about the base of buildings or in front of shrubbery there are few plants more effective than the celosias, especially the varieties known as prince's feather; many of the varieties in red and yellow effects are very good and they seem to stand the heat and drought and even the early frosts remarkably well. Usually a spray of the plumey blooms is a whole bouquet in itself. If cut before killing frosts and brought into the house they will retain their freshness for a long time, and potted make excellent fall and early winter plants.

For planting in large groups around the base of buildings or in front of shrubs, few plants are as effective as celosias, especially the varieties known as prince's feather. Many of the red and yellow varieties are really good and they seem to handle heat, drought, and even early frosts exceptionally well. A spray of their fluffy blooms is like a whole bouquet by itself. If you cut them before the killing frosts and bring them inside, they’ll stay fresh for a long time, and when potted, they make excellent plants for fall and early winter.

The argemone or prickly poppy is a little known plant of rather recent introduction that266 is rather slow in getting started in spring, but once on its way produces a continuous succession of large poppy-like blooms in golden yellow, pale yellow and pure white, the latter especially attractive with its crown of golden stamens. Its chief merit, however, consists in its immunity to frost, continuing in full bloom well into November—a quality shared by few annual flowers. Perhaps as close a companion as can be cited is the tall-growing lupine, a beautiful annual that comes in purest white, rosy mauve, sky blue, purple and scarlet and white and mind not at all the frost of late October and early November. The soft foliage would seem ill suited to cold, but if one looks closely one will notice that the foliage is dry, not succulent like many annuals that succumb readily to the first cold wave. Balsams and portulacca are notable examples of this susceptibility.

The argemone, or prickly poppy, is a little-known plant that was introduced fairly recently. It’s quite slow to start in spring, but once it gets going, it produces a continuous display of large, poppy-like blooms in golden yellow, pale yellow, and pure white, with the latter especially stunning because of its crown of golden stamens. Its main advantage, however, is its resistance to frost, blooming beautifully into November—a trait that few annual flowers have. A close companion would be the tall-growing lupine, a lovely annual available in the purest white, rosy mauve, sky blue, purple, and scarlet, which also doesn't mind the frost of late October and early November. The soft leaves might seem poorly suited to the cold, but if you look closely, you’ll see that the foliage is dry and not juicy like many annuals that easily give in to the first cold snap. Balsams and portulaca are notable examples of this vulnerability.

The nicotianas are other cold-resisting plants and have the added advantage of self-sowing—not to a troublesome extent but sufficiently to insure a yearly supply of volunteer plants without267 thought or trouble on the gardener's part. The nicotiana does not open up well in bright sunshine, but unfolds its snowy cups in late afternoon and on cloudy days, but in shady positions is more generous of its beauty and is lovely when silhouetted against the flaming red of the salvias.

The nicotianas are other cold-resistant plants and have the added bonus of self-sowing—not to an annoying extent, but enough to guarantee a yearly supply of volunteer plants without267 any effort or thought from the gardener. Nicotiana doesn't bloom well in bright sunlight, but it opens its white flowers in the late afternoon and on cloudy days. In shady spots, it shows off its beauty more generously and looks stunning when set against the vibrant red of the salvias.

The arctotis grandis is another of the less commonly grown annuals that should be included in one's garden planting. These, too, are sturdy defiers of the frost and exceedingly desirable as cut flowers, remaining in bloom for a week or ten days and should be placed in a sunny position for best effect as they are real sun lovers. Like all the preceding they are of the easiest culture—good garden soil, water if the season is unusually dry, and plenty of room to develop. The distance at which any plant should be set depends, of course, upon its manner of growth, but it is an excellent rule to plant all erect growing plants at least half their height apart. Low-growing and trailing plants, of course, are an exception to the rule, many requiring two or three times their height in inches apart, as the verbena.

The arctotis grandis is another less commonly grown annual that should definitely be included in your garden. These are tough against frost and are highly desirable as cut flowers, staying in bloom for about a week to ten days. They thrive best in sunny spots as they are true lovers of the sun. Like the previous plants mentioned, they are easy to grow—just need good garden soil, some water if the weather is unusually dry, and enough space to grow. The distance between plants depends on how they grow, but a good rule of thumb is to plant all upright-growing plants at least half their height apart. Low-growing and trailing plants are exceptions, with many needing two or three times their height in inches between them, like the verbena.

Few annuals require staking, notable exceptions being the sultanas, tall anterrhinums, scabiosas, the tall stocks and a few others. When staking is necessary it should be done by as inconspicuous means as possible; bamboo stakes painted green are the neatest and most inconspicuous.

Few annuals need support, with notable exceptions being the sultanas, tall snapdragons, scabiosas, taller stocks, and a few others. When support is necessary, it should be done in the most discreet way possible; green-painted bamboo stakes are the neatest and least noticeable.

For masses of brilliant color there is nothing to equal the scarlet verbena, the scarlet sage, salvia splendens, the various phlox Drummondii or the dwarf nasturtium, the scarlet or orange zinnias and the marigold, and for sweetness one must have the sweet peas and the stock.

For vibrant color, nothing compares to the scarlet verbena, scarlet sage, salvia splendens, the different types of phlox Drummondii, dwarf nasturtium, scarlet or orange zinnias, and marigold. For sweetness, you have to include sweet peas and stock.

Much is gained by the use of low-growing plants as a border to beds of taller plants. Blue lobelias, dwarf morning glories, English daisies, sweet alyssum, candytuft, all require little root room and add materially to the resulting bloom.

Much can be gained by using low-growing plants as a border around beds of taller plants. Blue lobelias, dwarf morning glories, English daisies, sweet alyssum, and candytuft all need minimal root space and significantly enhance the overall bloom.

For a screen to mask an undesirable view or object there are several very desirable annuals that are of the easiest culture and of most effective presence. With the stately ricinus all are familiar; less well-known is the tall cleom pungens,269 with its curious flowers of pure white and white and rose, the long, curving anthers of which have given it the name of "Spider Flower." It is a beautiful and desirable plant, and should be started in the house or hotbed and transplanted where it is to bloom when the nights are warm, setting the plants two feet apart. The Nicotiana Sylvestris is another stately plant, growing to a height of five or six feet in good soil and, unlike N. affinnis, its snow-white blooms remain open all day and are attractive when grown in the rear of beds of salvias. Like the cleom it requires room to develop. Practically all annuals may be sown in the open ground; the only object in sowing in hotbeds or house and transplanting is to bring them forward early so as to have the longest possible season of bloom.

For a screen to hide an unwanted view or object, there are several great annuals that are easy to grow and look fantastic. Most people are familiar with the impressive ricinus; however, the tall cleom pungens is less known, with its unique flowers in pure white and shades of white and rose. Its long, curved anthers have earned it the nickname "Spider Flower." It’s a beautiful and desirable plant that should be started indoors or in a hotbed and transplanted when the nights are warm, spacing the plants two feet apart. The Nicotiana sylvestris is another impressive plant, reaching up to five or six feet tall in good soil. Unlike N. affinnis, its bright white blooms stay open all day and look great when planted at the back of beds of salvias. Like cleom, it needs space to grow. Almost all annuals can be sown directly in the ground; the only reason to sow in hotbeds or indoors and then transplant is to get them started early for the longest blooming season possible.

To speak of asters seems superfluous, as whatever flowers may be absent from the annual garden it is a safe venture to claim that the aster will not be missing; that is quite as it should be; there is really no one flower that so completely meets the requirements of scenic effect and cut270 flower work as the asters. In the stronger colors of crimson, purple and blue it is as effective a flower as one could wish to use for mass planting, while for more refined and delicate beauty no one could ask for anything better than the pure white and delicate shell pinks of the Ostrich Feather and Late Branching whites. The Comet asters are very artistic, attractive flowers but, unfortunately, do not stand up under wet weather—a hard rain reducing them to a dismal, raggy condition. Set the wide branching asters at least a foot apart and see that all asters have clean, healthy soil to grow in to avoid the troubles that arise when conditions are unfavorable. A warm, fibrous loam, well enriched with old manure, is best and water should be given freely during dry weather, especially when the buds are forming. The black aster beetle is the only serious foe of the aster and makes its appearance when the flowers are in full bloom, doing an immense amount of damage in a few hours if not destroyed as they eat the petals of the flowers, rendering them very unsightly. The only satisfactory remedy271 is hand picking in early morning while the beetles are sluggish. If a pan of hot water or water with a little kerosene in it is carried and the beetles dropped into it as gathered it will not be difficult to control them. Spraying with arsenate of lead will kill them if one does not object to the use of poisons on flowers that are to be brought into the house. Paris green can also be used but discolors the flowers, but hand picking has no objectionable features aside from the labor entailed, and that is by no means prohibitive as it takes but a short time to go over a hundred plants.

Talking about asters seems unnecessary since, no matter what other flowers might be missing from the annual garden, you can safely say that the aster will always be there; and that’s just how it should be. No single flower quite fulfills the needs of visual appeal and cut flower arrangements like the aster does. In strong colors like crimson, purple, and blue, it’s an ideal choice for mass planting, while for more refined and delicate beauty, nothing beats the pure white and soft shell pinks of the Ostrich Feather and Late Branching whites. The Comet asters are very artistic and attractive, but unfortunately, they don’t hold up well in wet weather—a heavy rain turns them into a sad, ragged state. Plant the wide branching asters at least a foot apart and ensure that all asters are in clean, healthy soil to prevent problems when conditions aren’t right. A warm, fibrous loam enriched with old manure is best, and they should be watered generously during dry spells, especially when the buds are forming. The black aster beetle is the only major enemy of the aster and shows up when the flowers are in full bloom, causing a lot of damage in just a few hours if not dealt with, as they eat the petals, making them look terrible. The best solution is to handpick them early in the morning when the beetles are sluggish. Carry a pan of hot water or water mixed with a little kerosene to drop the beetles into as you gather them, which makes it easy to keep them under control. Spraying with arsenate of lead will kill them if you don’t mind using poisons on flowers that will be brought indoors. Paris green can also be used, but it discolors the flowers, while handpicking has no negative aspects apart from the effort involved, and it doesn’t take long to go over a hundred plants.

Try planting a few salvias on the shady side of the house; they will not make as much show during the summer as those grown in the sunlight but will be in full bloom long after those in exposed positions are cut down by frost.

Try planting some salvias on the shady side of the house; they won't be as vibrant during the summer as those grown in the sun, but they'll be in full bloom long after the ones in exposed spots are taken down by frost.

A few very desirable annuals are plants of one florescence and need to have repeated plantings of seed for a continuous bloom. Most conspicuous of this class of plants is the candytuft in white, purple and red and the charming little schizanthus, which should be sown every few272 weeks for a succession of blooms. The plants come into bloom in a few weeks from the sowing of seed and are perfect little pyramids of bloom. Sow fresh seed of candytuft when the first sown plants are beginning to form flower buds; used in this way the candytuft furnishes a most useful white for window-boxes and vases, and is unexcelled for edgings of taller plants.

A few highly sought-after annuals are single-bloom plants that require regular seed planting for continuous flowering. The most prominent of these plants is the candytuft in white, purple, and red, along with the lovely little schizanthus, which should be planted every few272 weeks for a steady succession of blooms. The plants start blooming just a few weeks after sowing the seeds and form perfect little pyramids of flowers. Sow fresh candytuft seeds when the initially planted ones begin to develop flower buds; when used this way, candytuft provides a lovely white for window boxes and vases, and it’s unmatched for edging taller plants.


CHAPTER XIX
THE RESILIENT GARDEN

Is a permanent investment, possible only in the permanent home. It adds dignity and charm attainable from no other form of planting. It is to the outdoor life of the home what the possession of colonial furniture and family heirlooms is to the indoor life, and yet is neither expensive nor tedious in its inception. It may be acquired fully grown, as it were, by an order to the florist for ready grown plants of blossoming size, ready to give seasonal bloom, or it may be developed in a few months, inexpensively and most interestingly, by procuring the seeds of as many desirable varieties of hardy perennials as one has room or inclination for and planting them in the hotbed in early spring, and transplanting into permanent positions when large enough or, better still, by planting the seed in cold frames in274 August or early September and growing them on until cold weather when they should be protected for the winter and in the spring planted out where they are to bloom. Every hardy perennial set out in one's garden is an asset that will increase in value each succeeding year. Many have the root formation that admits of divisions—as the Shasta daisy, a single two year old clump usually dividing up into from six to ten blooming-size plants. English violets, English daisies, polyanthus, and many other plants may be divided annually until in time one owns large colonies of them, and this is a point well worth understanding,—that a large number of one kind of plant is much more effective and worth while than a large number of kinds of plants, of just one or a few individuals. Many plants which are inconspicuous or ineffective singly or in small groups, surprise one with their beauty when grown in large masses or long rows. The ulmaria—a variety of spiræa of deciduous growth—is a notable example of this. Planted singly it is merely a rather pretty flower; grown275 in a long row it is a mass of snowy white in late June and July that compels one with its beauty. Its congener, the spiræa fillipendula, a lesser but most graceful growth, also pleases one especially when grown in long rows in front of taller plants. And right here is a point well worth considering in planting a hardy border—the arranging of plants in rising tiers of bloom so that a bank of bloom may be produced. One effective bed that gladdened my heart for several seasons and rose in tier after tier of gracious bloom through several weeks of early summer had an initial planting next the front of tritomas, whose scarlet torches of flame did not come into bloom until late summer, but from then until frost made a brilliant band of color. Back of these was a fine planting of columbine, next a row of scarlet lychnis alternated with white feverfew, and still further back a full planting of the garden spiræa whose feathery heads of pinky-white flowers stood four or five feet high and in turn were topped with fine clumps of physostegias; the whole planting making a beautiful bank276 of bloom and one not commonly seen. This was a permanent planting requiring little care beyond the removal of all weeds and grass in the spring and an occasional thinning out of the plants when they became too crowded. The physostegia increases rapidly by root division and the lychnis, feverfew and aquilegias all self-sow so the bed practically never ran out or needed renewing and the cost, except for the tritomas, was that of a few packets of seeds—probably a total of fifty cents for some one hundred and fifty square feet of loveliness, and there are many, many combinations as happy and as easily acquired as that.

Is a lasting investment that’s only possible in a permanent home. It brings dignity and charm that you can't find in any other type of planting. It's to the outdoor life of the home what colonial furniture and family heirlooms are to indoor life, yet it's neither expensive nor complicated to start. You can get it fully grown by ordering blooming-size plants from a florist, or you can grow them in just a few months easily and entertainingly. Just get seeds from a variety of hardy perennials that you've got space for and plant them in a hotbed in early spring, then move them to permanent spots when they're big enough. Even better, you can sow the seeds in cold frames in274 August or early September, grow them until cold weather arrives, then protect them for the winter and plant them in the spring where they'll bloom. Every hardy perennial you plant in your garden is an asset that increases in value year after year. Many have roots that can be divided—like the Shasta daisy, where a two-year-old clump can turn into six to ten blooming-size plants. English violets, English daisies, polyanthus, and many others can also be divided each year until you eventually have large groups of them. It's important to grasp that having more of one type of plant is much more effective than a variety of different plants, especially if you just have one or a few of each. Many plants that look plain or ineffective on their own or in small groups become stunning when grown in large clusters or long rows. The ulmaria—a type of spiræa that's deciduous—is a prime example. Planted alone, it's just a fairly nice flower; but when grown275 in a long row, it forms a dazzling mass of snowy white in late June and July that captivates with its beauty. Its relative, the spiræa fillipendula, a smaller but graceful plant, particularly catches the eye when planted in long rows in front of taller plants. This brings us to a key point to consider when planting a hardy border—arranging plants in ascending tiers of bloom to create a bank of color. One bed that brought me joy for several seasons featured layers of lovely blooms over several weeks in early summer. I started with tritomas in the front, whose scarlet flames didn’t bloom until late summer, but once they did, they provided a vibrant splash of color until frost. Behind them, I planted columbine, then a row of scarlet lychnis alternating with white feverfew, and behind that, a full planting of garden spiræa with feathery pinky-white flowers standing four to five feet tall, which were topped with nice clumps of physostegias. This entire arrangement created a beautiful bank276 of blooms that’s not commonly seen. It was a permanent planting that needed little care beyond weeding in the spring and occasionally thinning out overcrowded plants. The physostegia rapidly increases through root division, while the lychnis, feverfew, and aquilegias all self-sow, so the bed hardly ever needed replenishing. The cost, aside from the tritomas, was just a few packets of seeds—about fifty cents total for around one hundred and fifty square feet of beauty, and there are many, many other combinations just as delightful and easy to achieve.

Lacking the convenience of hotbeds and cold frames, the vegetable garden is a most excellent place in which to start hardy perennials for a permanent garden. Flowers planted in rows among vegetables always seem to do better than anywhere else, the reason being that they are not crowded—usually being in single rows with a foot or more of open space at each side through which the hoe and cultivator can work freely, and277 where they will receive regular and constant attention throughout the growing season. In a garden of say fifty feet in width, several varieties of flowers may be grown in short lengths of ten feet or more. They should be covered somewhat more deeply than when sown in the hotbed or cold frame and the ground firmed well above them, especially if the weather is dry at the time of planting; when the seedlings appear they will probably need thinning in order that they may not grow spindling, but will not need the room they will require when in permanent quarters. Many kinds of hardy perennials will give some bloom the first year, though, of course, they will not be at their best, but they will be sufficiently pronounced to make it possible to select those most desirable for cultivation. Delphiniums, for instance, will give small spikes of bloom, probably a foot high, the first season and if the Gold Medal Hybrids have been planted some very lovely blooms will result. In the fall the plants may be lifted and set in permanent positions, or they may be left in the ground until278 spring and then transplanted; probably this is the better treatment providing the ground is not to be ploughed too early, as some of the perennials die down in the fall and may not appear above the ground in time for very early transplanting.

Without the convenience of hotbeds and cold frames, the vegetable garden is a great spot to start hardy perennials for a lasting garden. Flowers planted in rows among vegetables tend to thrive better than anywhere else because they aren't overcrowded—usually planted in single rows with a foot or more of open space on each side, allowing the hoe and cultivator to work freely, and277 where they will receive regular and consistent care throughout the growing season. In a garden about fifty feet wide, you can grow several varieties of flowers in short stretches of ten feet or more. They should be planted a bit deeper than when sown in the hotbed or cold frame, and the soil should be packed firmly above them, especially if the weather is dry during planting; when the seedlings sprout, they might need thinning to prevent them from getting spindly, but they won't need as much space as they'll require when they're in their permanent spots. Many types of hardy perennials may bloom the first year, although they won't be at their peak, but they'll be noticeable enough to help you choose the most desirable ones for cultivation. For example, delphiniums will produce small spikes of bloom, likely around a foot tall, in the first season, and if the Gold Medal Hybrids are planted, some beautiful blooms will result. In the fall, the plants can be lifted and placed in permanent spots, or they can be left in the ground until278 spring and then transplanted; this is probably the better approach as long as the ground isn't plowed too early, since some perennials die back in the fall and may not emerge in time for very early transplanting.

Evergreen boughs make the best winter covering, especially when rested against some support with the tips downward, so as to shed rain. They do not mat down into a sodden mass as do leaves which have a tendency to smother and rot plants with an evergreen crown of leaves, but protect from sun and cold winds, at the same time admitting sufficient air to the plants to keep them in good condition.

Evergreen branches are the best winter cover, especially when leaned against something with the tips pointing down to shed rain. They don’t clump together into a wet mass like leaves do, which can suffocate and rot plants that have an evergreen canopy, but instead protect against sun and cold winds while still allowing enough air to reach the plants to keep them healthy.

When immediate effect is desired from hardy perennials which must be produced from seed, considerable time may be gained by planting the seeds in flats in the house in early February, giving them as light a position as possible, a south window being preferable, and transplanting the little seedlings to the hotbed when that is started in March or early April. This will often force along the blooms and will certainly produce279 strong, well developed plants by fall, plants that should stand the winter and come out in spring in fine condition, ready for a notable season of bloom.

When you want quick results from hardy perennials that need to be grown from seed, you can save a lot of time by starting the seeds in flats indoors in early February. Place them in the brightest spot possible, preferably a south-facing window, and then transplant the small seedlings to the hotbed when you start that in March or early April. This method often speeds up blooming and will definitely produce279strong, well-developed plants by fall—plants that should survive the winter and thrive in the spring, ready for a great blooming season.

While hardy perennials are generally thought of in connection with such herbaceous plants as die down to the ground in fall, reappearing again in spring, and the few that make a crown of winter foliage, like the hollyhocks and delphiniums, no perennial garden could be considered complete without an abundance of lilies. These may be planted here and there, singly and in groups among the perennials and shrubbery and will need little attention, increasing in numbers year by year. This is especially true of the candidum or annunciation lily, which once planted continues to increase for many years, but should have the clumps broken up once in three or four years and spread out to give more room. Failure to bloom successfully always calls for investigation of the condition of the bulbs. Usually it will be found that decay has set in or that worms or ants have invaded the bulbs. In either280 case the bulbs should be lifted and cleaned and all diseased scales removed, saving the scales for replanting; reset in clean soil, packing a handful of clean, sharp sand and a pinch of charcoal about each bulb. Candidum lilies should not be set more than an inch or two below the surface of the ground, but most other lilies, especially the auratums, speciosums, Brownii, and giganteums should be planted six or more inches deep and well padded with sand. A little pad of sphagnum moss under each bulb is excellent as it supplies the necessary drainage. Auratum bulbs and bulbs of the Japanese lilies are not as permanent as the candidums and tiger lilies, usually lasting a maximum of five years, if left undisturbed.

While hardy perennials are usually associated with herbaceous plants that die back to the ground in the fall and come back in the spring, and the few that keep some winter foliage, like hollyhocks and delphiniums, no perennial garden is truly complete without plenty of lilies. These can be planted here and there, both individually and in clusters among the perennials and shrubs, requiring little care, as they increase in number year after year. This is particularly true for the candidum or annunciation lily, which, once planted, continues to grow for many years but should be divided every three to four years to give them more space. If they fail to bloom properly, it’s important to check the condition of the bulbs. Typically, you’ll find that they are decaying or that they’ve been invaded by worms or ants. In either case, the bulbs should be lifted and cleaned, removing any diseased scales, while keeping healthy ones for replanting; then, reset them in clean soil, adding a handful of clean, sharp sand and a pinch of charcoal around each bulb. Candidum lilies should be planted no more than an inch or two below the ground’s surface, but most other types, especially auratums, speciosums, Brownii, and giganteums, should be planted six inches or deeper, well-padded with sand. A small layer of sphagnum moss beneath each bulb is great as it provides necessary drainage. Auratum bulbs and bulbs of Japanese lilies are not as long-lasting as candidums and tiger lilies, typically surviving a maximum of five years if undisturbed.

It is not much use to plant lily bulbs, tulips and hyacinths in ground infested with moles. The moles should first be eradicated, and then bulbs may be planted safely but it is little satisfaction to make an extensive and costly planting of bulbs only to have them become food for the moles and ground mice. I have known plantings281 of several hundred tulips to be entirely destroyed during a single winter. In one such planting of five hundred bulbs only three appeared above ground the following year. A good mole trap is invaluable where moles are in evidence.

It’s not very helpful to plant lily bulbs, tulips, and hyacinths in soil overrun with moles. You need to get rid of the moles first; then you can safely plant the bulbs. It's very disappointing to invest time and money into planting bulbs only for them to become a snack for the moles and ground mice. I've seen plantings281 of several hundred tulips completely wiped out in just one winter. In one case with five hundred bulbs, only three came up the next year. A good mole trap is essential when moles are present.


CHAPTER XX
Planting fall bulbs

The time for planting of hardy perennials and shrubbery is optional with the gardener, many things doing quite as well when planted at one season as at another, but in the planting of spring blooming bulbs less latitude exists; these must be gotten into the ground in fall if any measure of success is desired. The handling of this class of plants is one of the luxuries of gardening, as they come all ready to commence root growth, but in a perfect dormant condition, and may be gotten into the ground very much at one's convenience, and regardless of weather; the earlier they are planted the stronger root growth they will be able to make before the ground freezes, which makes for stronger bloom in the spring.

The timing for planting hardy perennials and shrubs is up to the gardener; many of them thrive equally well regardless of the season they are planted in. However, when it comes to planting spring-blooming bulbs, there is less flexibility; these need to be planted in the fall if you want to achieve any level of success. Dealing with this type of plant is one of the perks of gardening, as they're ready to start rooting but in a completely dormant state. You can plant them at your convenience, no matter the weather. The earlier they are planted, the stronger their root growth will be before the ground freezes, leading to better blooms in the spring.

Crocus, scillas, narcissi, daffodils, tulips, hyacinths and the like may be planted from the time283 they can be procured from the florist (which is usually in September) until the ground freezes. They will grow and bloom to perfection in any good, well-drained garden soil, providing it is not infested by moles and ground mice but beware of these, as they seem to possess an insatiable appetite for bulbs and once they have entered a bed will seldom leave it until they have exhausted its resources.

Crocuses, scillas, narcissus, daffodils, tulips, hyacinths, and similar flowers can be planted from when you can get them from the florist (usually in September) until the ground freezes. They will grow and bloom beautifully in any good, well-drained garden soil, as long as it’s not plagued by moles and voles. Watch out for these pests, as they have an endless appetite for bulbs and will rarely leave a flower bed once they’ve moved in, until they've consumed everything.

I recall that a few years ago I planted, in an empty canna bed on the front lawn, some five hundred choice, named tulips. The following spring just three tulip plants appeared above ground—the moles having destroyed the other four hundred and ninety-seven. In the flower garden where other hundreds of bulbs had been used to border beds of hardy perennials, they fared somewhat better, the greater part coming up, but many had been destroyed and still others carried far from the place of their planting, coming up as much as three feet away in the middle of paths and in sod.

I remember a few years ago when I planted about five hundred premium, named tulips in an empty canna bed on the front lawn. The next spring, only three tulip plants emerged—the moles had wiped out the other four hundred and ninety-seven. In the flower garden, where I had used hundreds of bulbs to line the beds of hardy perennials, they did a little better; most came up, but many were destroyed, and some were even moved far from where I had planted them, sprouting up as much as three feet away right in the middle of paths and in the grass.

One of the most satisfactory ways of using284 tulips is to plant them as a border to beds of perennials or shrubs, setting them in single, double or triple rows, along the edge and leaving them to ripen and increase from year to year; in this way one gets the greatest good at the least expenditure of time and space. When they are planted in beds by themselves it is customary to lift them when through blooming and to heel them in some out-of-the-way spot until the tops have died when they may be lifted and stored in paper bags until time to plant out again in the fall. This leaves the beds free for summer annuals or bedding plants. If it is not desired to lift them, then one may sow seed of some annual of light root growth such as the myostis or forget-me-not, the schizanthus, pansy, verbena, or phlox Drumondii, as these plants will not interfere with the maturing of the bulbs and the protection afforded them from the heat of summer will be of benefit.

One of the best ways to use 284 tulips is to plant them as a border around perennial or shrub beds, placing them in single, double, or triple rows along the edge and letting them mature and multiply year after year. This method provides the maximum benefit with the least amount of time and space. When planted in separate beds, it's common to lift them after blooming and temporarily store them in a less visible area until the tops die back. Then, they can be stored in paper bags until it's time to plant them again in the fall. This keeps the beds available for summer annuals or bedding plants. If you choose not to lift them, you can sow seeds of light-rooted annuals like myosotis or forget-me-not, schizanthus, pansy, verbena, or phlox Drumondii, since these plants won’t interfere with the bulbs' growth and will help protect them from the summer heat.

The soil for any variety of bulbs should be rich, mellow and thoroughly well drained and it is285 better in planting any but the smallest bulbs to remove a few inches of the top soil and having leveled off the surface mark it in straight lines from side to side each way so that the lines cross each other and set a bulb at each intersection of the lines. For tulips the lines should be five inches apart each way and for hyacinths seven inches. Where solid beds of hyacinths or tulips are planted small bulbs, such as crocus, scilla or winter aconite, may be used for filling in the spaces between with charming effect. White crocus and blue scillas are especially dainty, or the lovely ixias may be used but in this case the beds must be very carefully protected against the cold and covering removed with discretion in the spring.

The soil for any type of bulbs should be rich, loose, and well-drained. It’s better to remove a few inches of the topsoil when planting anything other than the smallest bulbs. After leveling the surface, mark it in straight lines that cross each other so you can place a bulb at each intersection. For tulips, the lines should be five inches apart in both directions, and for hyacinths, seven inches. When planting solid beds of hyacinths or tulips, you can fill in the spaces with small bulbs like crocus, scilla, or winter aconite for a charming effect. White crocus and blue scilla are particularly delicate, and lovely ixias can also be used, but in this case, the beds need to be well protected against the cold, and covering should be removed carefully in the spring.

Narcissus, daffodils, jonquils and all that family appear to better advantage when planted in long double or triple rows and should be set a foot apart each way and about four inches deep. These bulbs increase by forming new bulbs in a circle around the old bulb and should be allowed286 abundant room to increase and once planted should not be disturbed until they have become too crowded to bloom well.

Narcissus, daffodils, jonquils, and all their relatives look best when planted in long double or triple rows. They should be placed a foot apart in each direction and about four inches deep. These bulbs grow by producing new bulbs in a circle around the original one and need plenty of space to multiply. Once planted, they shouldn't be disturbed until they become too crowded to bloom well.286

Crocuses are never so lovely as when studding the green of the lawn in early spring and this is the simplest form of planting, it only being necessary to lift a bit of sod with a trowel, slip a crocus bulb underneath and press the sod back above it. Plant them informally, singly, in groups. Scatter them freely about with the hand and bury them where they fall. There is one precaution, however, to be observed in this system of planting—the lawn-mower must be withheld in spring until the crocuses have matured their leaves or there will be no flowers the following spring.

Crocuses are never as beautiful as when they brighten up the green lawn in early spring, and this is the easiest way to plant them. All you need to do is lift a small piece of sod with a trowel, place a crocus bulb underneath, and press the sod back down. Plant them casually, either individually or in clusters. You can scatter them around by hand and bury them wherever they land. However, there's one important thing to keep in mind with this planting method—hold off on mowing the lawn in spring until the crocuses have fully developed their leaves, or else there won't be any flowers the next spring.

All spring bulbs profit by a liberal application of old, well-rotted manure but this should be either spaded deep in the beds below where the bulbs will set or used as a top dressing after the soil removed before planting has been replaced and not allowed to come in contact with the bulbs. Manure is not only harmful in itself but287 it is also the home of the little white wire worms so injurious to all bulbs and especially to lilies, and almost always when bulbs are found to be not doing well the trouble will prove to be either worms or poor drainage.

All spring bulbs benefit from a generous amount of old, well-rotted manure, but this should either be mixed deep into the beds where the bulbs will be planted or used as a top dressing after replacing the soil removed before planting, ensuring it doesn't touch the bulbs. Manure is not only harmful on its own but287 also provides a habitat for little white wire worms, which are very damaging to all bulbs, especially lilies. When bulbs are not thriving, the issue is often due to either worms or poor drainage.

A part of the winter covering of all bulb beds should be lifted as soon as growth starts in the spring as a stockier, stronger growth results but the finer portion should be left and in case of such tender bulbs as ixias that removed may be kept handy to replace in case of an unusually cold snap.

A portion of the winter covering on all bulb beds should be removed as soon as growth begins in the spring, as this encourages a sturdier, stronger growth. However, the finer material should be left in place, and for delicate bulbs like ixias, the removed covering can be kept nearby to replace it in case of an unexpected cold snap.

Many of the miscellaneous bulbs offered by the florists are desirable when grown in well established groups, but lack effect planted singly or in too small groups. One of the loveliest of summer-blooming bulbs is found in the anthericum or St. Bruno's lily. These should be set in colonies in the hardy border where they may remain undisturbed for years. Plant about three inches deep and four inches apart. Alliums, chinodoxia, and bulbs of this class need grouping to be at their best, otherwise they are288 apt to appear rather straggly. I like to see bulbs colonized among the shrubbery and the edge of evergreens where they appear at their best in the early days of spring and do not seriously interfere with the use of the lawn-mower later on.

Many of the different bulbs sold by florists are attractive when planted in well-established clusters, but they don’t have much impact when grown alone or in small groups. One of the most beautiful summer-blooming bulbs is the anthericum, or St. Bruno's lily. These should be planted in groups in the hardy border where they can stay undisturbed for years. Plant them about three inches deep and four inches apart. Alliums, chinodoxia, and similar bulbs also need to be grouped to look their best; otherwise, they tend to look a bit messy. I prefer to see bulbs clustered among the shrubs and at the edges of evergreens, where they look great in early spring and don’t get in the way of mowing the lawn later on.

Ramblers
An effective remedy for hikers

CHAPTER XXI
SAVING MONEY ON BUYING SHRUBS

May often be achieved by a wise selection of varieties. Any extensive planting runs up into dollars fast, especially if the larger sized shrubs are selected. Fortunately successful planting depends as much upon a number of plants of one variety as upon the size and distinction of the sorts. A dozen plants of one variety of spiræa, for instance, is far more effective than one plant each of twelve varieties—try it and see if I am not right.

May can often be accomplished with a smart choice of varieties. Large-scale planting can get expensive quickly, especially if you choose bigger shrubs. Luckily, successful planting relies just as much on having several plants of one variety as it does on the size and uniqueness of the types you select. For example, a dozen plants of one kind of spirea is much more impactful than having one plant each of twelve different varieties—give it a try and see if I'm not correct.

If, therefore, one has several strips of lawn to embellish with shrubbery and wishes to economize the expenditure as far as possible it will be found a most excellent plan to make a mixed planting on the most urgent section, selecting those shrubs which by their manner of root formation offer possibilities of rapid increase and use the product for subsequent planting; taking all290 of the sort of plant so as to leave as few varieties in the old bed as possible and in this way simplifying the ultimate planting of the entire grounds.

If someone has several patches of lawn to enhance with shrubs and wants to keep costs down as much as possible, it's a great idea to do a mixed planting in the most important area. Choose shrubs that grow quickly due to their root structure and use what they produce for later plantings. Take all of that type of plant so that you have as few varieties as possible in the old bed, which will simplify the final planting across the whole property.

When these new offspring have reached a presentable size they may be retained and the other sorts which can now be spared may be removed to a new location, planting out the youngsters in their vacated positions.

When the new offspring have grown to a suitable size, they can be kept, and the other types that can now be let go may be moved to a new location, planting the young ones in their empty spots.

There are three classes of plants which lend themselves very readily to propagation through root division, layering and root offshoots. The first is found in those plants which make an exuberant root system of many fine feeding roots and many stems. A good example of this class is found in the Hydrangea arborescens which may be lifted, pulled apart and the several plants reset without in any way disturbing its growth intention. In this respect it differs materially from H. paniculata which, while making a generous root system, has but the one main stem and so is incapable of division but is easily propagated by cuttings thrust into the ground in the shade of the plant early in June. H. arborescens is291 similar in habit to many perennials which are increased by root division, as for instance the Shasta daisy, English daisy, English violets, polyanthus and others.

There are three types of plants that are really easy to propagate through root division, layering, and root offshoots. The first type includes plants that have a lush root system filled with many fine feeding roots and multiple stems. A great example of this type is the Hydrangea arborescens, which can be lifted, separated, and replanted into several new plants without affecting its growth. This is quite different from H. paniculata, which, while it has a generous root system, only has one main stem and can't be divided. Instead, it can be easily propagated by sticking cuttings into the ground in the shade of the plant early in June. H. arborescens is291 similar in growth habit to many perennials that are increased through root division, such as the Shasta daisy, English daisy, English violets, polyanthus, and others.

Often a plant of H. arborescens purchased from the florist will admit of the removal of two or three smaller parts without seriously injuring the appearance of the original plant and if these are set out and well cared for they will quickly develop into blossoming plants for this form is an early and reliable bloomer.

Often, a plant of H. arborescens bought from the florist can have two or three smaller sections removed without significantly harming the look of the original plant. If these sections are potted and well taken care of, they'll quickly grow into blooming plants since this type blooms early and reliably.

Spiræa Anthony Waterer is another shrub which may be increased by pulling apart the roots; indeed this plant is benefited by occasional treatment of this sort, doing much better and flowering more freely. Planted in front of taller shrubs it is a very desirable and reliable plant and if the faded flowers are removed after the spring florescence it will continue to produce flowers throughout the summer.

Spiræa Anthony Waterer is another shrub that can be propagated by separating the roots. In fact, this plant thrives with this kind of treatment, performing better and flowering more abundantly. When planted in front of taller shrubs, it makes for a very attractive and dependable addition to your garden. If you remove the spent flowers after the spring bloom, it will keep producing flowers all summer long.

One of the most easily propagated shrubs is found in the symphoricarpus or snow-berry; indeed, in the case of this pretty shrub the difficulty292 is not to increase one's stock as the new growth is usually prostrate the first year, lying supinely on the ground and if left undisturbed will throw out roots at the joints and rapidly produce attractive little plants as robust as the parent stock. Lifting the branches occasionally will prevent rooting but usually one likes to have the new plants form. I do. After becoming well rooted the branch should be severed between the plant and the parent. As the root growth is dense, consisting of a mass of fibrous roots, the young plants can be lifted at almost any time and reset without much check to growth. The pale, pinky-white flowers come in mid-summer, followed by the white berries which remain on the bushes well into the winter and are very attractive.

One of the easiest shrubs to propagate is the snowberry or symphoricarpus. In fact, with this lovely shrub, the challenge isn't increasing your stock, as the new growth usually lies flat on the ground in its first year and, if left undisturbed, will send out roots at the joints and quickly produce cute little plants as sturdy as the parent plant. Lifting the branches occasionally will stop them from rooting, but generally, it's nice to let the new plants form. I do. Once well-rooted, the branch should be cut between the plant and the parent. Since the root system is dense and made up of a tangle of fibrous roots, the young plants can be lifted at almost any time and replanted with little disruption to their growth. The pale, pinky-white flowers bloom in mid-summer, followed by the white berries, which stay on the bushes well into winter and look very attractive.

Somewhat similar in its way of increase is the Deutzia-Pride of Rochester. That magnificent shrub which challenges our admiration when covered with its drooping, bell-shaped white flowers late in June and which, under favorable conditions, assumes the proportions of a small tree. Like the symphoricarpus the lateral branches are293 more or less inclined to a recumbent or prostrate habit or because of their flexibility are easily pegged down and root easily at the joint but do not make as vigorous root growth and the joint should have a little earth drawn over it and be kept moist by placing a stone on top. This shrub is so altogether desirable that several branches may well be devoted to the increase of stock, one or more plants being produced from each branch.

Somewhat similar in its way of growth is the Deutzia-Pride of Rochester. This stunning shrub truly impresses us when it’s in full bloom with its hanging, bell-shaped white flowers in late June and can even grow into a small tree under the right conditions. Like the symphoricarpus, the side branches tend to lean towards a lying down or sprawling position, or due to their flexibility, they can easily be pinned down and will root at the joints. However, they don’t develop as vigorous root systems, so it’s best to cover the joint with a bit of soil and keep it moist by placing a stone on top. This shrub is so highly desirable that multiple branches can be used to propagate new plants, with one or more plants produced from each branch.

Of those shrubs which throw up suckers from the roots the lilac will occur to most people as a well-known example, so if in buying the newer, double-flowered sorts one will insist on purchasing plants upon their own roots and not be satisfied with grafted plants one will soon become possessed of a quite respectable planting of lilacs of notable size and color of bloom. The suckers should be removed as soon as they have had one season of growth for the protection of the parent plant which will be much depleted in bloom by their permanent presence.

Of the shrubs that send up shoots from the roots, the lilac is probably the most familiar to most people. So, when buying the newer, double-flowered varieties, if you make sure to get plants on their own roots and not accept grafted ones, you'll soon have a impressive collection of lilacs with significant size and vibrant blooms. The shoots should be removed as soon as they've had one season of growth to protect the parent plant, which will lose a lot of blooms if they stay.

One of the most beautiful foliage shrubs, the fern-leaved sumac—Rhus typhina laciniata—forms294 root rhizomes which send up volunteer plants at each joint. These should be removed and replanted. This is one of the most beautiful ornamentals with which I am acquainted, quite rivalling the Japanese maples. The leaves are compound or pinnate, fifteen to eighteen inches long and of a dark, rich green on the upper side, glaucous beneath and with a rich red midrib—an elegant fern-like spray which is very useful in cut flower work and in autumn turns to the most vivid crimson imaginable. It does best when protected from severe wind, from which it seems to shrink, distorting its symmetrical growth. In good rich soil a half dozen offshoots may appear the second year after planting and after one has once become familiar with its beauty all will be welcome.

One of the most stunning shrubs, the fern-leaved sumac—Rhus typhina laciniata—produces294 root rhizomes that sprout volunteer plants at each joint. These should be taken out and replanted. This is one of the most beautiful ornamental plants I know, almost rivaling Japanese maples. The leaves are compound or pinnate, fifteen to eighteen inches long, dark, rich green on the top, glaucous underneath, and have a vibrant red midrib—an elegant fern-like spray that's very useful in floral arrangements and turns the brightest crimson in autumn. It thrives best when shielded from strong winds, as harsh conditions can distort its symmetrical growth. In good rich soil, several offshoots may appear the second year after planting, and once you appreciate its beauty, you’ll welcome all of them.

Another small tree or shrub with similar characteristics is the Aralia spinosa or Hercules' club as it is commonly called. This also has the compound leaves somewhat resembling the black walnut but of gigantic proportions, two to three feet in length and of equal breadth, giving295 the tree a most tropical effect. It is very easily transplanted and a few trees in a clump are very effective or it is fine as a specimen tree and owing to its abundance of spines can be utilized effectively as a hedge. Where only a single tree is wanted it is easily kept in check by cutting out the rhizomes with a spade close to the parent plant.

Another small tree or shrub with similar features is the Aralia spinosa, commonly known as Hercules' club. It also has compound leaves that look somewhat like those of a black walnut but are gigantic, measuring two to three feet in length and the same in width, giving295 the tree a very tropical appearance. It is easy to transplant, and a few trees grouped together create a striking visual, or it works well as a specimen tree. Due to its many spines, it can also be effectively used as a hedge. If you only want a single tree, it's easily controlled by cutting out the rhizomes close to the main plant with a spade.

The euonymus, or burning bush as the Indians always called it, propagates itself by means of its coral berries which appear in quantities in late summer or early fall. One finds the volunteer plants appearing every spring in places where one least expects them and one can lift and transplant them wherever desired.

The euonymus, or burning bush as the Native Americans always called it, spreads by producing its coral berries, which show up in abundance in late summer or early fall. Every spring, you can find these volunteer plants popping up in unexpected places, and you can dig them up and transplant them wherever you want.

Another most attractive shrub which may be easily raised from seed sown in spring is the Buddleya—a plant with long racemes—in the newer form of B. veitchiaa, over twenty inches long, of violet mauve flowers of a delightful violet fragrance. Spring-sown seed will often produce blossoming plants the first season which in the second will attain a height of from three to five296 feet and be a perfect bouquet of bloom throughout the summer. The branches are somewhat pendulous and in the young state are better for a little support. They afford delightful material for cut-flower work and the odor has that fugitive elusive quality of the violet, seeming to come from different directions and to elude one's search.

Another attractive shrub that can be easily grown from seeds sown in spring is the Buddleya—a plant with long flower clusters—in the newer variety of B. veitchiana, which can have blooms over twenty inches long, featuring violet mauve flowers with a lovely violet fragrance. Seeds sown in spring often produce blooming plants in their first season, which in the second season can grow to a height of three to five296 feet, creating a beautiful display of flowers all summer long. The branches are somewhat droopy, and when young, they benefit from a bit of support. They are wonderful for cut-flower arrangements, and the scent has that fleeting, elusive quality of violets, seeming to come from different directions and always slipping away from your grasp.

It will be found an excellent plant to combine with Spiræa Van Hutti as it comes into bloom after that splendid plant has rested on its laurels for the summer and keeps the hedgerow alive with bloom and fragrance.

It’s a great plant to pair with Spiræa Van Hutti since it starts blooming after that amazing plant has taken a break over the summer and keeps the hedgerow vibrant with flowers and fragrance.


CHAPTER XXII
A constant flow of blossoms in
the bushes

HOW TO SECURE IT

HOW TO PROTECT IT

The planting of shrubbery about the home is so important that it may well take precedence of the flower garden proper or even the grading of the lawn itself. Indeed, if one owns the site of a home and the building is yet in the future, no better expenditure of one's spare time and dollars can be inaugurated than such initial planting as shall insure the presence of blooming shrubs about the home at the time of its completion so that all may be beautiful and perfect together, rather than that two or three years must elapse before one can begin to enjoy the results.

The planting of shrubs around the home is so crucial that it might even be more important than the flower garden or the landscaping of the lawn itself. In fact, if you own the land for your future home, there’s no better way to spend your free time and money than to start planting now. This way, you'll have blooming shrubs around your home by the time it’s finished, allowing everything to look beautiful and perfect together, rather than waiting two or three years to enjoy the results.

Hardy shrubs vary very greatly in the precociousness of their bloom, certain forms giving298 quite noticeable results the second season, while others need two or three years' growth even to indicate what their ultimate beauty will be.

Hardy shrubs differ widely in how early they bloom; some varieties show noticeable results in the second season, while others require two or three years of growth just to hint at their eventual beauty.

The location, too, will have much to do with results. For a low planting about the foundation of the house, in front of porches or to top low terraces many plants may be employed which would be unsatisfactory in places at a distance where a general effect is desired more than an intimate relation. For masking a building, hiding an undesirable view and the like, tall-growing shrubs and flowering trees are usually preferred and these being of more or less slow growth require time to develop.

The location will also significantly impact the results. For low planting around the foundation of the house, in front of porches, or on low terraces, many plants can be used that might not work well in places further away where a broader effect is desired over a close connection. To hide a building, conceal an unattractive view, and similar purposes, tall-growing shrubs and flowering trees are typically favored. These plants generally grow slowly, so it takes time for them to mature.

In all shrubbery planting it will be found that a number of plants of one sort is far more effective than one or two plants each of many distinct kinds. The mistake is often made of planting only shrubs which bloom together, producing a medley of more or less inharmonious colors and form for a few weeks in spring leaving the shrubbery bare and uninteresting for the remainder of the year. This is a mistake I have often made299 in my own garden, but one which I usually rectify by planting in other shrubs which will come forward when the first have ceased to bloom.

In any shrub planting, you'll find that having several plants of one kind is way more effective than just one or two plants each of a lot of different types. Many people make the mistake of planting only shrubs that bloom at the same time, creating a mix of somewhat clashing colors and shapes for a few weeks in spring, leaving the shrubbery looking bare and dull for the rest of the year. I've often made this mistake in my own garden, but I usually fix it by adding other shrubs that will thrive when the first ones have finished blooming.299

For a number of years a very beautiful hedge of Hydrangea paniculata grandiflora has separated the lawn from the flower garden; only one objection could be urged against it—its flowerless condition throughout most of the summer. To overcome this objection, scarlet salvias were alternated between the plants and an edging of scarlet and white phlox made a mass of color from mid-June until well into October. This, of course, was not legitimate shrubbery planting, so recourse was made to alternating Hydrangea arborescens with the paniculata. These coming into bloom late in June gave a very satisfactory arrangement, but this year Deutzia-Pride of Rochester, which also blooms in June, was introduced and I am anticipating much pleasure from the addition.

For several years, a stunning hedge of Hydrangea paniculata grandiflora has separated the lawn from the flower garden; the only downside was its lack of flowers for most of the summer. To fix this issue, we planted scarlet salvias between the hydrangeas, and an edging of scarlet and white phlox created a vibrant burst of color from mid-June until well into October. Of course, this wasn't a proper shrub planting, so we added Hydrangea arborescens in alternation with the paniculata. These bloom in late June, bringing a very pleasing look. This year, I introduced Deutzia-Pride of Rochester, which also flowers in June, and I'm looking forward to enjoying this new addition.

A hedge of Spiræa Van Hutti extending from the house to the road is very beautiful in early May, but inconspicuous and uninteresting the300 remainder of the summer. If it had been in a situation demanding a heavier planting I should have alternated the plants, setting them behind the spiræas, with forsythias—whose golden yellow blooms make bright the garden in earliest spring—and between the forsythias introduced the deutzias.

A hedge of Spiraea Van Hutti stretching from the house to the road looks stunning in early May, but becomes pretty dull and unremarkable for the rest of the summer. If it had been in a spot that needed a denser planting, I would have mixed in forsythias behind the Spiraea, with their bright yellow flowers lighting up the garden in early spring, and added deutzias in between the forsythias.

There are few more satisfactory and graceful plants for use in front of a porch than this Spiræa Van Hutti; its gracefully curved branches, though growing to a good length, curve away gracefully from the building, bending with their weight of snowy bloom almost to the ground and the growth is very strong and rapid, but never coarse. It is the very best early blooming shrub to date.

There are hardly any plants more satisfying and elegant for the front of a porch than this Spiræa Van Hutti. Its beautifully curved branches, while growing quite long, gracefully arch away from the building, bending under the weight of its snowy blooms nearly to the ground. The growth is strong and fast but never rough. It is by far the best early-blooming shrub available.

Very lovely effects may be secured by alternating the spiræa with the Weigela Eve Rathke, and keeping this down to a somewhat prostrate habit; this will give a perfect sheet of bloom from early May until the last of June and a less-pronounced show of flowers throughout the remainder of summer from the weigela.

Very nice effects can be achieved by mixing the spiræa with Weigela Eve Rathke and keeping it more low-growing. This will create a beautiful display of flowers from early May until the end of June, with a less intense bloom from the weigela throughout the rest of summer.

There is a strong tendency when purchasing shrubbery to select a little of everything—one plant of each, perhaps. I do this myself—not without excuse perhaps on my part, for we people who write for the benefit of others have to get our knowledge by, often costly, experience, and not by the mere reading of nursery catalogues. It is sometimes a most excellent thing to gratify this inclination providing one has a piece of land which can be devoted to experimental purposes and where one can shift things about until one has gained just the right combination and exposure for each plant. A strip of ground twelve or fifteen feet wide and as long as available will give room for a very successful planting of small trees and shrubs and hardy perennials may be introduced to fill in until the shrubs have reached an effective size. Ulmarias, hardy phlox, oriental poppies, rudbeckias and the like will be found very useful and tall clumps of lilies should always be interspersed in all permanent plantings.

There’s a strong tendency when buying shrubs to choose a little bit of everything—maybe one of each plant. I do this myself—not without reason, perhaps, since we writers who aim to help others gain our insights from sometimes expensive experiences rather than just by reading nursery catalogs. It can actually be a great idea to indulge this tendency, as long as you have a piece of land you can use for experimentation and where you can rearrange things until you find the perfect combination and light conditions for each plant. A strip of land twelve or fifteen feet wide and as long as you have available will allow for a successful planting of small trees and shrubs, and hardy perennials can be added to fill in until the shrubs grow to a good size. Ulmarias, hardy phlox, oriental poppies, rudbeckias, and similar plants will be very helpful, and tall clumps of lilies should always be included in any permanent plantings.

It will often be found that some shrub which one has admired at close range is entirely ineffective302 in the shrubbery border; take, for instance, the Tartarian honeysuckle—a pretty enough thing close at hand but ineffectual and insignificant at any distance.

It’s often the case that a shrub you admire up close looks completely unremarkable in the landscape. Take the Tartarian honeysuckle, for example—it's nice to look at up close but seems inadequate and forgettable from a distance.302

For a long shrubbery border of twelve or fifteen feet wide no better selection of shrubs can be made than these seven perfectly reliable and hardy shrubs—Forsythia, April; Spiræa Van Hutti, May; Deutzia Pride of Rochester, June; Hydrangea arborescens, July, August; Hydrangea paniculata, September; Althea, October and November. These are—with perhaps the exception of the althea, which is sometimes uncertain—absolutely hardy and reliable plants which increase in size and beauty from year to year and insure a constant succession of bloom throughout the summer and fall so that by their use the shrubbery border need never be without flowers.

For a long shrub border that's twelve to fifteen feet wide, you can't go wrong with these seven reliable and hardy shrubs: Forsythia in April; Spiraea Van Hutti in May; Deutzia Pride of Rochester in June; Hydrangea arborescens in July and August; Hydrangea paniculata in September; and Althea in October and November. With the possible exception of the althea, which can be a bit unpredictable, these plants are completely hardy and dependable, growing in size and beauty each year. They ensure a continuous display of blooms throughout the summer and fall, so your shrub border will always have flowers.

In planting a border of these mixed shrubs attention to arrangement will have much to do with success. Of course it will occur to the most inexperienced that the taller shrubs should be in the303 rear, but it is not necessary or desirable that they should be planted in a rigid, unbroken line. Better that the line be somewhat waved, dipping forward occasionally a step or two. Then it will, of course, occur that the lowest forms will be in front, but this line, too, maybe broken occasionally with advantage, allowing the second row to step forward enough to prevent too much formality of outline.

In planting a border of these mixed shrubs, how you arrange them is key to success. Naturally, even a beginner would think the taller shrubs should go in the303 back, but it's not necessary or ideal to plant them in a straight, unvaried line. It’s better if the line has some gentle curves, occasionally dipping forward a step or two. This means the shorter plants will naturally be in the front, but this line can also benefit from some breaks, allowing the second row to step forward a bit to avoid a too formal outline.

Where immediate effect is desired, and this is invariably the case, either large specimen shrubs should be used or, if the smaller sorts seem more available, then these should be set as close again as would be done in the planting of large specimens and after they have made two or three years' growth and have begun to crowd, every other plant may be lifted and used to start a new shrubbery elsewhere.

Where immediate impact is wanted, which is almost always the case, either large specimen shrubs should be used or, if the smaller varieties seem more accessible, then these should be planted as close together as you would with large specimens. After two or three years of growth, when they start to crowd each other, every other plant can be removed and used to create a new shrubbery in another location.

This was what was done with my hydrangea hedge, started as a border between the front lawn and a pear orchard. The plants were first set three feet apart in a single row. When they had filled up the intervening space they were304 lifted and used for a hedge in the rear of the lawn, this time being set six feet apart, a distance which they soon closed, and for weeks in the fall were a wonderful mass of bloom. A hedge of Spiræa Van Hutti replaced the hydrangeas in the front and these will probably remain undisturbed for a number of years as, owing to the proximity of a magnificent maple tree, they do not make the strong growth they do in more favorable situations.

This is what happened with my hydrangea hedge, which started as a border between the front lawn and a pear orchard. The plants were initially spaced three feet apart in a single row. Once they filled the gaps, they were304lifted and used as a hedge at the back of the lawn, this time spaced six feet apart. They quickly filled that space too and created a stunning display of blooms for weeks in the fall. A hedge of Spiræa Van Hutti took the place of the hydrangeas in the front, and these will likely stay undisturbed for several years since, due to the nearby magnificent maple tree, they don’t grow as robustly as they would in more favorable conditions.

Although I have suggested the forsythia, spiræa, deutzia, hydrangeas and althea, etc., as the seven very best shrubs for general planting there are very many more worthy of adoption. Among these the various weigelas, especially the red varieties, the syringas and the lilacs should not be overlooked. Of the latter, far too little is known, most people being content with a bush or two of the old-fashioned purple and white of their grandmothers' garden, and perhaps, as a truth, these old sorts appeal to our hearts more strongly than the newer, more showy varieties and it is in no spirit of disparagement that I urge305 the adoption of some of the newer sorts—not to displace, but to supplement and extend the lilac season over a period unknown to the old-time garden.

Although I've suggested forsythia, spiraea, deutzia, hydrangeas, and althea as the top seven shrubs for general planting, there are many more that deserve consideration. Among these, various weigelas, particularly the red varieties, syringas, and lilacs should not be overlooked. Sadly, too little is known about the latter; most people are satisfied with a bush or two of the old-fashioned purple and white from their grandmothers' gardens. It's true that these old varieties often resonate with us more than the newer, flashier options, and I don't mean to devalue them. Instead, I encourage the adoption of some newer types—not to replace, but to enhance and broaden the lilac season beyond what we had in traditional gardens.305

Syringa vulgaris, alba and purpurea are usually through blooming by the twentieth of May, or thereabouts, but Emodi, with its rosy-white flowers, is ushered in with the early days of June and Josikaea shows its first purple blooms late in the same month about the time that the creamy-white panticles of Japonica appear. The new double-flowered, named sorts come into bloom about the time of the common sorts and are well worth the extra cost they involve. Mme. Cassimire Perier and Pres. Grevy are two of the finest sorts and should be in every collection.

Syringa vulgaris, alba, and purpurea typically finish blooming by around May 20th, but Emodi, with its rosy-white flowers, starts blooming in early June. Josikaea shows its first purple flowers later in the month, around the same time that the creamy-white panicles of Japonica appear. The new double-flowered varieties usually bloom around the same time as the common ones and are definitely worth the extra expense. Mme. Cassimire Perier and Pres. Grevy are two of the best varieties and should be included in every collection.

In buying lilacs it will pay well to purchase those on their own roots. Most of the named lilacs are grafted on common stock and the suckers are annoying and worthless and if allowed to grow will seriously interfere with the blooming of the graft. Such shoots as come from true roots can be detached and used to increase the306 supply of plants and are, therefore, most valuable additions.

When buying lilacs, it's best to choose those on their own roots. Most of the named lilacs are grafted onto common stock, and the suckers can be bothersome and useless. If allowed to grow, they can really mess with the blooming of the graft. Shoots that come from true roots can be removed and used to increase the306 supply of plants, making them very valuable additions.

One of the most beautiful small trees for planting where a light and feathery effect is sought or against a background of evergreens is found in the tamarix. I know of nothing so airy and graceful as these at all times and especially when in bloom. The flowers, which are very tiny, quite cover the branches at the time of blooming in May, in mid-summer and in fall according to their season and there is a marked difference in the foliage which in certain species shows a decided blue tinge which is very beautiful. Unfortunately they are not always entirely hardy at the north and require a somewhat protected position. They are very useful at the seashore, being one of the few things which can stand the salt air. As they make a rapid growth one can afford to experiment with them until just the right environment is found for they are well worth trying for and planted in groups of the different sorts will give a succession of bloom all summer. They are very useful for cut-flower work, making exquisite307 bouquets when placed in dull green majolica or similar holders.

One of the most beautiful small trees to plant where you want a light and feathery look or against a backdrop of evergreens is the tamarix. I don’t know of anything that’s as airy and graceful as these trees, especially when they’re in bloom. The tiny flowers completely cover the branches during their blooming periods in May, mid-summer, and fall, depending on the species, and there’s a noticeable difference in the foliage—some types show a lovely blue tint. Unfortunately, they aren’t always fully hardy in northern regions and need a somewhat sheltered spot. They’re very useful by the ocean since they’re one of the few plants that can tolerate salt air. Because they grow quickly, you can experiment with them until you find the perfect environment; they’re definitely worth the effort, and if planted in groups of different varieties, they’ll provide a continuous display of blooms all summer. They’re also great for cut flower arrangements, creating beautiful bouquets when placed in dull green majolica or similar containers.307

Very careful preparation of the ground for shrubbery is essential as once planted they usually remain undisturbed for years; for this reason the earth should be dug very deep, underdrained, if necessary, and thoroughly fertilized.

Very careful preparation of the ground for shrubbery is essential because once planted, they usually stay undisturbed for years. For this reason, the soil should be dug very deep, underdrained if necessary, and thoroughly fertilized.

After planting the ground should be kept cultivated by hoeing or by the use of the scuffle-hoe—anything which will maintain a dust-mulch, prevent the earth drying out and caking and retain the moisture. The success of the planting depends upon this one feature more than upon any other one thing. A plant insufficiently supplied with moisture during the growing season is quite certain to succumb to the rigors of the succeeding winter—not, indeed, on account of the cold itself, but the condition in which it entered the winter.

After planting, the ground should be kept cultivated by hoeing or using a scuffle hoe—anything that will maintain a dust mulch, prevent the soil from drying out and hardening, and retain moisture. The success of the planting relies on this aspect more than anything else. A plant that doesn’t get enough moisture during the growing season is likely to struggle in the harsh conditions of the following winter—not because of the cold itself, but due to the state it was in when winter began.

The best season for the planting of all hardy shrubs is early spring, before growth starts, the next best, late fall after the foliage has dropped. Altheas and white birch trees, however, do better with spring planting.

The best time to plant all hardy shrubs is early spring, before they start to grow. The next best time is late fall after the leaves have fallen. However, Altheas and white birch trees grow better when planted in spring.


CHAPTER XXIII
Gardening for homebodies

There are possibilities in the indoor culture of flowers, though it may seem to the casual observer, that only open air culture would justify one in undertaking the growing of a flower garden on any extended scale; but open air gardening, while it certainly makes for unlimited area of flower beds and a great variety of sorts has still its drawbacks of inclement weather, insufficient or too much moisture, much humbling of one's physical self on bended knees and a summer-long fight with the myriad insect pests, from the tiny aphis that colonizes itself on the tip of every green shoot in early spring, to the predatory mole that furrows up paths and beds, making efficient drains to deflect all water intended for the refreshment of the plants.

There are opportunities in indoor flower cultivation, even though it might seem to a casual observer that only outdoor gardening is worth pursuing on a large scale. Outdoor gardening does offer unlimited space for flower beds and a wide variety of plants, but it also comes with challenges like bad weather, too little or too much moisture, a lot of time spent kneeling, and a constant battle with various pests. This ranges from the tiny aphids that gather on the tips of every new shoot in early spring to the pesky moles that dig up paths and beds, creating efficient drains that divert water away from the plants.

Such indoor plants as one may elect to grow309 are assured an adequate and continuous supply of moisture, a soft and friable soil, a reasonable freedom from insect pests and a certain amount of protection from burning sun and drying winds. Moreover they are not restricted in their season of bloom to a few months of the year; the indoor garden may be in bloom the year around—a bewitching succession of most of the seasons repertoire of bloom.

Such indoor plants as you choose to grow309 are guaranteed a consistent supply of moisture, soft and loose soil, a reasonable lack of insect pests, and some protection from harsh sunlight and drying winds. Plus, they aren’t limited to just a few months for blooming; your indoor garden can bloom year-round—a captivating display of flowers from most seasons.

The indoor garden may have its beginning in the late days of September, when the hardy spring blooming bulbs come into the market. Nearly all of this class of plants force readily and pots and window boxes may be filled with soil, planted to tulips, hyacinths, narcissi, valley lilies, and the like and set aside in a cool dark cellar for midwinter blooming, requiring no further care for weeks to come. In the meantime their places need not be kept empty waiting their time of bloom but boxes and pots of bright geraniums, cinnerarias, primroses, cyclamen and the like will keep bright every nook and corner one can spare. Nothing is more dainty and delightful310 than a window full of primroses, and no plant will give a more generous and constant succession of bloom from fall until spring.

The indoor garden can start in late September when the tough spring-blooming bulbs hit the market. Most of these plants grow easily, so you can fill pots and window boxes with soil, plant tulips, hyacinths, daffodils, valley lilies, and similar flowers, and store them in a cool, dark basement for midwinter blooms, needing no extra care for weeks. Meanwhile, you don't have to leave their spots empty; you can fill them with boxes and pots of vibrant geraniums, cinerarias, primroses, cyclamen, and other cheerful plants to brighten up every nook and corner. Nothing is more delicate and delightful than a window filled with primroses, and no plant offers a more generous and steady show of blooms from fall to spring.310

As far as practicable, the growing of plants in window-boxes instead of pots will be found more satisfactory. Inside boxes which are narrow enough to rest on the window-sill are preferable and the plants may be planted directly in the boxes or, if preferred, in pots and the pots plunged into the boxes with moss packed between the pots to retain the moisture. This gives a better moisture condition than when the pots are stood on a shelf, exposed on all sides to the drying air of the living-room. It has the added advantage of allowing the pots to be lifted from the box for spraying the foliage, a great help to successful growth, and to apply such insecticides as may occasionally be needed. Plants grown in the dry air of the living-room are apt to be affected by red spider; this is especially noticeable with such plants as cinnerarias, calceolarias and a few others. Those who are so fortunate as to possess that modern essential of a311 well equipped house—a sun room—will find limitless opportunities for floriculture, boxes beneath the windows, trellises against the walls and hanging baskets, all affording opportunity for much delightful work with flowers.

As much as possible, growing plants in window boxes instead of pots will be more satisfying. Boxes that are narrow enough to sit on the window sill are ideal, and the plants can either be planted directly in the boxes or, if preferred, in pots that are set into the boxes with moss packed around them to keep moisture in. This creates better moisture conditions than when pots are just placed on a shelf, exposed to the drying air of the living room. It also makes it easier to lift the pots out for spraying the leaves, which greatly helps with growth, and to apply any insecticides that might be needed from time to time. Plants grown in the dry air of the living room can be prone to red spider mite; this is especially noticeable with plants like cinerarias, calceolarias, and a few others. Those lucky enough to have that modern essential of a well-equipped house—a sunroom—will find endless opportunities for flower growing, with boxes under the windows, trellises on the walls, and hanging baskets, all providing a chance for enjoyable work with flowers.

One of the most fascinating features of indoor gardening is found in the growing of greenhouse and other flowers from seed, and this is a feature especially suited to the invalid or shut in. The little flats in which seed is started are so light and easily handled and the plants grown from seed so sure to do well that one may depend almost entirely on plants from this source. Almost any light, shallow box may be used, as flat, half size cigar boxes, codfish boxes, or boxes specially constructed to fit the window-sills and divided by strips of wood into several compartments may be used. All require the same treatment—a few holes to insure drainage, a fine mellow soil of fibrous loam, leaf mold and a little sharp sand, filled to within a half inch of the top of the box and well shaken down, and the best seed procurable.

One of the most interesting aspects of indoor gardening is growing greenhouse and other flowers from seed, which is particularly well-suited for those who are ill or confined indoors. The small trays used to start seeds are very lightweight and easy to handle, and the plants grown from seeds are likely to thrive, allowing you to rely almost entirely on this source for plants. You can use almost any light, shallow container, such as flat half-size cigar boxes, codfish boxes, or boxes specifically designed to fit on window sills and divided by wooden strips into several compartments. They all need the same care—just a few holes for drainage, a fine, loose mix of fibrous loam, leaf mold, and a bit of sharp sand, filled to within a half inch of the top of the box and well packed down, along with the best seeds you can find.

All begonias, rex, fibrous and tuberous may be readily grown from seed which should be lightly scattered over the surface of the soil, and pressed down with a bit of smooth board, then set in a pan of water till the surface looks dark, surplus water drained away, covered with white paper, glass and set in a warm place till the tiny plants break through the soil, when they should be given air and light gradually and encouraged to make a healthy, sturdy growth from the start.

All begonias—rex, fibrous, and tuberous—can easily be grown from seed. Just sprinkle the seeds lightly over the soil's surface and press them down with a smooth board. Then, place the container in a pan of water until the surface looks dark. Drain any excess water, cover it with white paper or glass, and keep it in a warm spot until the tiny plants emerge from the soil. Once they do, gradually introduce air and light and encourage them to develop strong, healthy growth from the beginning.

A low, broad table with a large, shallow drawer and a shelf half way down one side will be found the most convenient place to work and this can be moved as the work progresses from place to place so as to make as little walking and lifting as possible. Another work-table that I have found most convenient consists of a broad shelf—hinged to a strip of wood nailed to the window-casing, as wide as the window-casing and deep enough to reach the floor when dropped down out of use. This is held in place by two strips of metal attached to the window-casing that hook over screw-heads in the side of the shelf,313 but drop down against the wall when not in use. Such a shelf affords an excellent working surface for starting seeds in flats, bulbs and cuttings in pots and is indispensable for drawing plants away from a window on stormy nights. If finished to match the woodwork of the room it will be an attractive feature whether in use or dropped down out of the way and may be used for papers and magazines when not required for plants. For the latter purpose a neat finish is a border to match the standing woodwork and a center of green baize of felt.

A low, wide table with a large, shallow drawer and a shelf halfway down one side is the most practical workspace. You can move it around as needed to minimize walking and lifting. Another work table I've found really useful has a broad shelf that’s hinged to a strip of wood nailed to the window frame. It’s as wide as the window frame and long enough to reach the floor when it’s lowered and out of use. It’s secured with two metal strips attached to the window frame that hook over screws on the side of the shelf, but they can drop down against the wall when it's not in use. This shelf provides an excellent work surface for starting seeds in trays, bulbs, and cuttings in pots, and it's essential for moving plants away from the window on stormy nights. If it matches the woodwork in the room, it can be a nice feature whether it's in use or set aside. When not used for plants, it can hold papers and magazines. For that purpose, a neat finish would be a border that matches the surrounding woodwork and a center of green felt or baize.313

There are a number of attractive vines and trailing plants—the Asparagus Sprengeri, Manettia Vine, Thumbergia—that may be grown successfully from seed and add greatly to the interest of the indoor garden.

There are several appealing vines and trailing plants—the Asparagus Sprengeri, Manettia Vine, Thumbergia—that can be successfully grown from seed and significantly enhance the indoor garden's appeal.

At this time of the year it will be worth while to start seeds of certain garden annuals for use in outside window-boxes. Nasturtiums, verbenas, candytuft, phlox Drummondii, petunias, coleus, ageratums, daisies, lobelias, all make bright and charming window gardens and when314 the sliding screens are used that may be pushed up out of the way, the boxes may be planted and cared for from the inside with little fatigue.

At this time of year, it’s a good idea to start seeds for some garden annuals to use in outdoor window boxes. Nasturtiums, verbenas, candytuft, phlox Drummondii, petunias, coleus, ageratums, daisies, and lobelias all create bright and charming window gardens. Plus, when the sliding screens are pushed up out of the way, the boxes can be planted and tended to from the inside with minimal effort.

Hanging baskets add much to the charm of sun room and porch, but are difficult to care for as usually arranged, but if instead of hanging from a short chain from a hook in the ceiling or cornice of porch or sun room, the basket is attached to a stout cord passed over a pulley and the free end provided with a couple of rings to hook over hooks in the side wall or pillars to hold it at the desired height it can be lowered on to a table for attention with little trouble. The moss-lined wire baskets are the best for this purpose; they retain moisture and are free from danger of breakage. If a pail of water is placed on the table beneath them and the basket lowered into this and allowed to remain until the soil is thoroughly soaked, then raised sufficiently by one of the rings to drain away all surplus water, the plants will be in the best possible condition to grow and bloom.

Hanging baskets really enhance the charm of a sunroom and porch, but they're tricky to take care of as typically arranged. However, if you attach the basket to a sturdy cord that goes over a pulley instead of just hanging it from a short chain on a hook in the ceiling or cornice, and use some rings on the free end to hook it over hooks in the side wall or pillars to keep it at the right height, you can easily lower it onto a table for maintenance. Moss-lined wire baskets work best for this; they hold moisture well and are less likely to break. If you put a bucket of water on the table underneath them and lower the basket into it until the soil is completely soaked, then lift it a bit with one of the rings to let the excess water drain out, the plants will be in great shape to grow and bloom.

One of the most fascinating plants for growing indoors is the little Japanese rosebushes, which may be grown from seeds into blooming plants in from six to eight weeks. They make the daintiest, most charming little plants imaginable. Shapely, many branched and loaded with bloom they are the very daintiest "Favors" imaginable for luncheons and other social affairs and are charming gifts at all times. The blossoms are about the size of a ten cent piece, and come in white, pink and red. The seeds may be sown in the pots—three inch ones, in which they are to bloom or may be sown in flats and pricked out into pots when large enough. I have found the seed to germinate very freely and the plants to grow on finely from the start. When planted in pots these should be plunged in a shallow box of wet sand or moss in a sunny window. This is the way to handle all young greenhouse plants, especially cyclamen, cinnerarias, gloxinias, carnations, Lady Washington geraniums and the like. To keep them growing vigorously they316 should not be allowed to dry out, nor to become soggy with too much water.

One of the most interesting plants to grow indoors is the small Japanese rosebush, which can be grown from seeds to blooming plants in about six to eight weeks. They make the cutest, most charming little plants you can imagine. Shapely, multi-branched, and filled with blossoms, they are the most delightful "favors" for luncheons and other social events and are lovely gifts at any time. The flowers are about the size of a dime and come in white, pink, and red. The seeds can be sown directly in the pots—three-inch ones, where they will bloom—or in flats and then transplanted into pots when they’re large enough. I’ve found the seeds germinate very easily, and the plants grow well from the beginning. When planted in pots, they should be placed in a shallow box of wet sand or moss in a sunny window. This is how to care for all young greenhouse plants, especially cyclamen, cinerarias, gloxinias, carnations, Lady Washington geraniums, and similar varieties. To keep them growing strong, they shouldn’t be allowed to dry out or to become waterlogged.

For starting summer-blooming bulbs the use of moss in shallow boxes or baskets will be found more convenient than the heavier soil. The sphagnum moss used by florists for shipping plants is the sort needed and may be used again and again if necessary, the only merit it has being its retention of moisture, exclusion of air and lightness for handling.

For starting summer-blooming bulbs, using moss in shallow boxes or baskets is more convenient than using heavy soil. The sphagnum moss that florists use for shipping plants is what you need, and it can be reused multiple times if necessary. Its main benefits are that it retains moisture, excludes air, and is light for easy handling.

If one wishes to grow from seed for outdoor planting the hardier annuals and perennials, then somewhat larger and deeper flats should be used, but none over four inches in depth should be undertaken. In these such readily salable plants as asters, salvias, balsams, cobæa scandens, Shasta daisies, pansies, and the like will prove a veritable little pin-money mine and equally profitable will be found peppers, cauliflowers, bush musk-melons and other of the choicer vegetables, all requiring, practically, the same treatment.

If you want to grow tougher annuals and perennials from seed for outdoor planting, you should use somewhat larger and deeper trays, but nothing deeper than four inches. In these, plants that are easy to sell like asters, salvias, balsams, cobæa scandens, Shasta daisies, pansies, and others can be a great little money-maker, and you'll also find that peppers, cauliflowers, bush melons, and other choice vegetables are equally profitable, all needing basically the same care.

The shut-in who wishes to specialize in the317 unusual might make an attempt to imitate the dwarf trees of China and Japan. This is not so impossible or difficult as it appears as the appearance of great age is more often the result of skill than of many years.

The person who wants to focus on the317 unusual might try to replicate the dwarf trees of China and Japan. This isn’t as impossible or hard as it seems because looking ancient often comes from skill rather than just many years.


CHAPTER XXIV
THE POTENTIAL OF AN APARTMENT IN THE CITY

The possibilities of the city flat will depend upon just how much window space the flat affords and how much sunlight the windows receive, for upon the amount of light will depend not so much the quantities of flowers which may be grown, as their character.

The possibilities of the city apartment will depend on how much window space the apartment has and how much sunlight the windows get, because the amount of light will affect not just the number of flowers that can be grown, but also their nature.

It may be possible that, in a restricted area, but one window can be devoted to the growing of plants during the winter season and where that is the case one will wish to realize as much pleasure as possible from that one window. If it is a sunny window then it will be an easy matter to fill it full of bright flowers. Now no flower so well withstands the heat and dust of our living-rooms as the geraniums, but it is by no means necessary that they should be of the more common zonal type. The Lady Washington geraniums—pelargoniums—are319 far more beautiful and even more prolific in their bloom. They may be purchased all ready to bloom of the florist or easily raised, from spring sown seed, to blooming size by fall. Heliotropes, the sweetest of all flowers, will bloom freely in any sunny window if the precaution is taken to spray or wet the foliage thoroughly every day; without this refreshing bath the foliage will curl up and die and the buds blast.

It might be possible that in a small space, only one window can be used for growing plants during the winter season, and in that case, you’ll want to make the most of that single window. If it’s a sunny window, it’ll be easy to fill it with colorful flowers. No flower can handle the heat and dust of our living rooms better than geraniums, but they don’t have to be the more common zonal type. Lady Washington geraniums—pelargoniums—are319 much more beautiful and even more abundant in their blooms. You can buy them already ready to bloom from a florist or easily grow them from spring-sown seeds to blooming size by fall. Heliotropes, the sweetest of all flowers, will bloom nicely in any sunny window if you remember to spray or wet the leaves thoroughly every day; without this refreshing bath, the leaves will curl up and die, and the buds will drop.

The carnation is an excellent plant for the sunny window but must be sprayed frequently to keep in check the red spider, and all the spring blooming bulbs can be depended upon for the winter window garden and have this advantage that they can be potted in the fall, tucked away in a dark closet somewhere and brought out when ready to begin blooming, and again relegated to any out of the way place as soon as their season of bloom is passed.

The carnation is a great plant for a sunny window but needs to be sprayed often to manage red spider mites. All the spring-blooming bulbs work well for a winter window garden and have the added benefit of being able to be potted in the fall, stored away in a dark closet, and brought out when they’re ready to bloom. Once their bloom season is over, they can easily be put back in a less visible spot.

The most convenient way of growing house plants where there are only common windows to accommodate them is in boxes made to fit the320 window-sills. The ready-to-use metal boxes are very handy and satisfactory, but not as attractive as simple boxes made of wood to match the standing woodwork of the room; these should have a metal lining to protect the woodwork and if the expense of boxes of hardwood in a rented flat seems undesirable, very simple boxes of cheap wood may be made to imitate the hardwood finish by giving a covering of the paper or wood pulp that comes in all the natural hardwood finishes. This is simply pasted on the boxes and when dry should be given a coat of sizing-glue dissolved in hot water to a thin paste, and when this is dry a coat of varnish or jap-a-lac. This will be so successful that few casual observers will detect the substitution. A very pretty plant box can be evolved from a single cheese box, cut down a couple of inches covered with the paper and supplied with legs or mounted on a small lamp stand, or white enamel will be charming, especially when the box is filled with blooming tulips or narcissi, or given over to ferns, asparagus vines and the like.

The easiest way to grow houseplants when you only have standard windowsills is to use boxes that fit those 320 window-sills. Pre-made metal boxes are really handy and do the job well, but they aren’t as appealing as simple wooden boxes that match the room's woodwork; these should have a metal lining to protect the wood. If buying hardwood boxes for a rented apartment feels too expensive, you can easily make simple boxes from inexpensive wood and cover them with paper or wood pulp that mimics natural hardwood finishes. Just paste this cover on the boxes, let it dry, then apply a coat of sizing glue mixed with hot water to create a thin paste. Once that dries, finish it with varnish or jap-a-lac. The result will be so convincing that most people won’t notice the difference. You can even create a nice plant box from a single cheese box by cutting it down a couple of inches, covering it with the paper, and adding legs or placing it on a small lamp stand. A white enamel finish will look lovely, especially when the box is filled with blooming tulips or narcissi, or with ferns and asparagus vines.

Where one has a window opening on to an air shaft or a court that gives no view but infringes one's privacy a delightful screen which will not deprive one of too much light and air, but effectually screen the window is made from a box the length of the window-sill, fitted with double casters to allow it to be moved from place to place. A long rod or wire, long enough to extend upright as high as the screen is desired, cross over and return on the other side, should be fitted into the end boards close to the back by boring holes with a drill the size of the rod for nearly the depth of the wood and the ends of the wires firmly sunk in them. The frame is then covered with wire netting or twine and the box planted to some light, graceful vine like the asparagus plumosus nanna, the manettia vine, clarodendron, but the plumosus nanna is an excellent choice. Such a screen is very convenient and artistic between two rooms where it is desired to leave a door open for air, but desirable to screen the contents of one of them.

Where there's a window facing an air shaft or courtyard that offers no view and invades your privacy, a charming screen can be created that won’t block too much light and air yet will effectively cover the window. This is made from a box the length of the window sill, equipped with double casters for easy movement. A long rod or wire, long enough to extend upright to the desired height of the screen, should be attached to the end boards near the back by drilling holes the size of the rod almost all the way through the wood, with the ends of the wires firmly inserted. The frame is then covered with wire mesh or twine, and the box is planted with a light, graceful vine like the asparagus plumosus nanna, the manettia vine, or clerodendron, although the plumosus nanna is an excellent choice. Such a screen is very convenient and stylish between two rooms where you want to keep a door open for airflow but still wish to conceal the contents of one of them.

It is the summer flat, however, that offers the322 greater possibilities of floriculture for in this season the boxes may be placed outside of the windows if properly secured, and a much greater variety of plants grown, for there is no exposure for which there are not many delightful things available. A north window, that to many would seem especially undesirable for plants, will often be found to develop the most interesting boxes. All the hardier varieties of cultivated ferns may be usual here, all the blooming and fibrous rooted begonias, all the asparagus fern, especially A. sprengeri, the various impatiens, especially I. sultani, the trailing fuchsias, abutilons, variegated wandering Jew, aspidistras, farfugiums. Palm grass, Pannicum Excurrens—a palm-like grass which one has to send to southern florists for but which grows rankly at the north, either in the house or in the open ground—is good. I bedded one out in spring, intending to lift in the fall for interior decoration and found it to have made so sturdy a root growth, and so immense a top that it defied a spade to move it and had to be abandoned to the frost. Within323 doors its long, curved leaves are most attractive and interesting. It is a magnificent plant for the rear wall of a sun room or conservatory.

It’s the summer flat, though, that offers the322 greatest possibilities for growing flowers because during this season, the boxes can be placed outside the windows if secured properly, allowing for a much wider variety of plants to be grown, as there are delightful options available for every exposure. A north-facing window, which many might think is bad for plants, often produces the most interesting arrangements. You can usually find all the hardier types of cultivated ferns here, all the flowering and fibrous-rooted begonias, all types of asparagus fern, especially A. sprengeri, various impatiens, particularly I. sultani, trailing fuchsias, abutilons, variegated wandering Jew, aspidistras, and farfugiums. Palm grass, Pannicum Excurrens—a palm-like grass that you typically have to order from southern florists—grows vigorously up north, either indoors or outdoors. I planted one in the spring, planning to dig it up in the fall for indoor decoration, but it developed such strong roots and an enormous top that it was impossible to move with a spade and had to be left to the frost. Indoors, its long, curved leaves are very attractive and interesting. It’s a stunning plant for the back wall of a sunroom or conservatory.

If one occupies a flat with a rear outside staircase, then one may utilize the top of the railing to place boxes of trailing nasturtiums and bright flowers—a planting of nasturtiums in the rear, a middle planting of geraniums, justitias, petunias, verbenas, phlox drummondii, etc., and a fringe of sweet alyssum or other delicate trailer along the front will give a succession of bloom all the summer long.

If you live in an apartment with a back outdoor staircase, you can use the top of the railing to put boxes of trailing nasturtiums and bright flowers. Plant nasturtiums at the back, geraniums, justitias, petunias, verbenas, phlox drummondii, and so on in the middle, and add a border of sweet alyssum or other delicate trailing plants along the front to enjoy a continuous display of blooms all summer long.

Along the outer edge of the steps one may arrange small but deep boxes of earth and in each plant blooming vines such as the Japanese morning glory, the cobæa scandens, flowering beans, or that gay little new vine—the cardinal climber. These may be trained to run on wire or cord so as to afford privacy for the stairway, or if this is not desired, trailing vines and erect plants may be used instead, the trailers masking the unlovely architecture of the stairs.

Along the outer edge of the steps, you can set up small but deep boxes filled with soil, and in each one, plant flowering vines like the Japanese morning glory, cobæa scandens, flowering beans, or the cheerful new vine—the cardinal climber. You can train these to grow on wire or cord for some privacy on the stairway. If you don't want that, you can use trailing vines and upright plants instead, with the trailing ones hiding the unattractive design of the stairs.

Possibly one may be in possession of one of324 those flats whose side windows look out upon the roof of a lower building—a tin roof expansion of ugliness which is a hindrance to spiritual calm and mental cheerfulness. If this is the case, why not utilize it to create a roof garden? If the area is small one can utilize all of it, if too large then pre-empt the portion nearest one and draw a trellis of wire across the boundary line on which one may grow in long, narrow boxes of soil morning glories galore. It is not necessary that these boxes be of anything but the roughest construction; home-made boxes, evolved from old packing cases, are as good as anything as they will be masked by the plants and vines; these should extend around three or even all four sides of the roof, those in the rear and, if it is desired to secure privacy, those on the sides, being planted with vines or tall-growing plants like ricinus, cannas, cleomes, cosmos and the like. It will not be desirable to leave too much open space in a garden of this sort, unless it will be possible to cover the roof with sand or sawdust that325 can be wet down with the hose to create a moist atmosphere; but where this can be done a very successful roof garden can be created with the principal expenditure that for earth and sawdust. Most flowers of the summer garden can be grown in such a position and one could arrange a very satisfactory little lily pool and fountain by means of a big zinc tub, a length of hose, two or three water lilies and some gold fish. A few inches of earth in the tub will supply a footing for the lilies and a mask of plants around the base will hide the crudeness of the pool.

You might have one of324 those apartments with side windows overlooking the roof of a lower building—an eyesore of a tin roof that disrupts peace and happiness. If that's the case, why not turn it into a roof garden? If the space is small, you can use all of it; if it’s larger, claim the part closest to you and set up a wire trellis along the edge where you can plant plenty of morning glories in long, narrow soil boxes. It doesn't matter if these boxes are roughly made; homemade boxes from old packing crates work just fine because the plants and vines will disguise them. These should wrap around three or even all four sides of the roof, with the rear and, if you want some privacy, the sides filled with vines or tall plants like ricinus, cannas, cleomes, cosmos, and similar varieties. It's best not to leave too much open space in a garden like this unless you can cover the roof with sand or sawdust that325 can be dampened with a hose to create a humid environment; if you can, you can create a very successful roof garden, primarily spending on soil and sawdust. Most summer flowers can thrive in such a setting, and you could set up a charming little lily pool and fountain using a large zinc tub, a length of hose, a couple of water lilies, and some goldfish. A few inches of soil in the tub will provide a base for the lilies, and surrounding plants will conceal the tub's rough appearance.

When one has undertaken a garden like this it will be found surprising how many things one will pick up in one's little excursions out of town to add to it; all one's friends will take an interest and pleasure in donating seeds and plants and if the roof affords room for a hammock and a few chairs, the question of where to go for a summer vacation will not take on such poignant interest, nor the inability to afford one be so great a tragedy. Such an oasis in the heart of a city will be326 a delight to a child and solve the problem of keeping it off the street and from undesirable companions. I should like to think that a good many such little oases will develop and that I might know of them.

When you create a garden like this, you'll be surprised at how many things you'll find during your little trips outside the city to add to it. All your friends will enjoy and happily give you seeds and plants, and if the roof has space for a hammock and a few chairs, figuring out where to go for a summer vacation won’t feel as urgent, and not being able to afford one won’t seem like such a big deal. This kind of oasis in the heart of a city will be326 a joy for a child and help keep them off the streets and away from bad influences. I hope many of these little oases will pop up and that I will know about them.

It might be that two or more people have homes overlooking a roof who would join together in the making of a garden. In that way a larger area could be undertaken and the expense would not be seriously felt. If the roof is one exposed to much sunshine, then one should select plants which revel in sunshine like the annual poppy, the verbena, salvia, sweet alyssum, candytuft, ageratum, dahlia, canna, California poppy, asters; all these are hardy, easily grown plants, which will give an abundance of bloom all summer. Of course geraniums' and coleus can also be depended upon to do their prettiest, but one and all should have a daily or semi-daily showering with a hose to remove the grime and dust of the day and freshen the foliage as well as to provide the necessary water to drink. Probably the entire success of the roof garden will depend327–328 upon just this one feature of an adequate water supply at the roots and a thorough cleansing of the foliage each day. Given this there is no reason why a garden of this sort should not be a success.

It’s possible that two or more people have homes overlooking a roof who would come together to create a garden. This way, a larger area could be managed, and the costs wouldn’t be too burdensome. If the roof gets a lot of sunshine, it’s best to choose plants that thrive in sunlight, like annual poppies, verbena, salvia, sweet alyssum, candytuft, ageratum, dahlias, cannas, California poppies, and asters; all of these are tough, easy-to-grow plants that will bloom abundantly all summer. Of course, you can also count on geraniums and coleus to look their best, but all of them should be hosed down daily or every other day to remove dirt and dust and freshen the leaves, as well as to ensure they have enough water. The overall success of the roof garden will likely rely on just this one aspect: a reliable water supply at the roots and a thorough cleaning of the foliage each day. With that in place, there’s no reason why this type of garden shouldn’t thrive.

THE END

THE END


INDEX


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!